Home

GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and

Contents

1. Y 18 Y 19 Y820 ol O S O a Cu cu O gt gt 1 8 006868808 8 26060 86 0 0068686 86 0260606 86 0 Y806 Y007 Y 8 Y 9 Y l 0206060868 8 Y023 Y 11 A DATA Fere e erona x srona ERR owe Fig 3 6 1 4 This is the signal sent to CNC system by PLC See GSK990MC CNC System PLC Installation and Connection Manual for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number 3 6 1 2 System Parameter Display Press SYSTEM soft key to enter the system signal diagnosis page Contents displayed in the page is shown below see Fig 3 6 1 2 1 II Operation O 5 5 5 5 5 F012 BA m LL g Sa O O 1 F001 Fo14 F015 O Q Q Q 5 5 Q F021 F 2 1 F003 1 i F 16 F004 F 1317 157 F005 1 1 Q F018 F 6 f T F019 F007
2. 1 1 Q Q Q Q Q Q F 1 F 14 F 2 FQ15 F003 1 F016 F004 KOL T l F005 1 1 a ee Q Q F 18 Q F 6 F019 F O7 F020 F 8 F F 21 089 F022 F010 F023 F 11 17 03 54 PATH 1 Re sr cro ro ome AN DATA Fig 3 6 1 1 This is the signal sent to PLC by CNC system See GSK990MC CNC System PLC Installation and Connection Manual for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number to enter diagnosis In lt DIAGNOSE gt page press soft key G SIGNAL PMC gt CNC page which is shown in Fig 3 6 1 2 2 G signal page 217 GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Bk ESEE amp Q c012 Q 1 O a 1 OTELE O 17 04 05 00 1 1 O O O
3. Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 3 At Power On the system displays the workpiece coordinate codes G54 G59 G92 or additional workpiece coordinate system ever executed before Power Off 4 When different workpiece coordinate systems are called in a block the axis to move is positioned to the coordinate of the new coordinate system for the axis not to move its coordinate shifts to the corresponding coordinate in the new coordinate system with its actual position on the machine tool unchanged Example The corresponding machine tool coordinate for G54 coordinate system origin is 10 10 10 The corresponding machine coordinate for G55 coordinate system origin is 30 30 30 33 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual When the program is executed in order the absolute coordinates and machine coordinates of the end point are displayed as follows Table 4 2 8 1 Absolute coordinate Machine coordinate GO G54 X50 Y50 Z50 50 50 50 60 60 60 150 130 110 5 The offset value of external workpiece zero or the one of workpiece zero can be modified by G10 which is shown as follows Using code G10 L2 Pp XYZ P 0 Exter
4. N ON D i4 Jog SAVE ol FI m W i X xha HE SEJ mM U W ES H He m O m w fafafa x ao _ SHIFT E ND 4 HOME INSERT ALTER E E f Mae f U BBE DIAGNOSIS JEBE 3 Hips PLC SETTING GRAPH ALARM D HELP Fig 1 2 2 1 Editing keyboard area of GSK990MC Il The functions of the keys on the editing keyboard area are divided into 10 small areas which are explained as follows Explanation Reset key For system reset feed and output stop For inputting addresses in MDI mode For inputting numerical values in MDI mode For Inputting numerical values addresses or data into the buffer Input key oe i area confirming the operation result By pressing any of the keys the corresponding page is entered operation key See chapter 3 for details O Le D s Q O 5 For page switching in the same display mode and page KJ coger down up in the program For moving the cursor in different directions E For moving the cursor to the beginning or the end of a block or a KI FANGES sale i 9 Search key For searching data and addresses to view and modif For inserting modifying or deleting a program or a block during 10 Editing key programming by using compound keys 1 2 3 Screen Operation Keys There are 8 display keys for operation pages and 1
5. DLF 1 reference point return by manual feed after reference point is setup and memorized 0 reference point return by rapid traverse after reference point is setup and memorized DLF Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 1 5 PIIS PPCK ASL PLAC STL STL 1 select prereading working type 0 select non prereading working type PLAC 1 acceleration deceleration type after forecasting interpolation exponential 0 acceleration deceleration type after forecasting interpolation linear ASL 1 Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting speed difference control 0 Auto corner deceleration function of forecasting angular control PPCK 1 perform in position check by forecasting 0 donot perform in position check by forecasting 1 overlapping interpolation effective in acceleration deceleration blocks before forecasting 0 overlapping interpolation ineffective in acceleration deceleration blocks before forecasting Standard setting 0000 OOOO PIIS system parameter number 01116 ALS FLLS FBLS FBOL FBOL 1 rapid traverse type post acceleration deceleration 2 0 rapid traverse type pre acceleration deceleration FBLS 1 pre acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse S 0 pre acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse linear FLLS 1 post acceleration deceleration type of rapid traverse exponential 0 post acceleration decel
6. O Q F020 a d F 8 F 9S F RER 1 1 0866 8 F010 F 23 F 11 l 46 32 How me ce me A DATA Fig 3 6 1 2 1 3 6 1 3 Bus Parameter Display soft key to enter the bus signal diagnosis page Contents displayed in the page is Press BUS shown below see Fig 3 6 1 3 1 219 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual PAA Bus link slaev qty Bus servo slave qty 002 003 004 Bus servo card slave qty Bus IO card slave qty Bus DAQ card slave qty Bus DAQ card slave qty 00G 007 008 Bus realtime link states 1 normal abnor 49173 FPGALINK retransmission once times FPGALINK invalid MDT packet counter DATA td 18 47 89 PATH 1 ow sere Ee owe Fig 3 6 1 3 1 Bus spindle slave qty FPGALINK realtime state word 3 6 1 4 DSP Parameter Display Press DSP soft key to enter the system signal diagnosis page Contents displayed in the page is shown below see Fig 3 6 1 4 1 Il 080 DSP scan counter DSP the number of interpolation control point DSP interpolation task completion times DSP x194 error alarm DSP x1944 error alarm ARM buffer capacity DSP sign for task completion o o A O CD Q O DSP buffer capacity FY DSP fitting point quantity DSP x13Se8 signal acquisition Cd 40 47 589
7. F013 ah Q Q Q 5 5 F001 F014 0 1 Foo2 F015 F003 11 F 16 F004 B O F017 B eae F005 1 1 F018 5 F 6 a F019 F007 F 20 1 1 F08 F 21 F S F 22 1 1 F lJ F 23 F 11 l 46 32 F vee ce oe owe A DATA Fig 3 6 1 Diagnosis Data Display 3 6 1 3 6 1 1 Signal Parameter Display Press Signal soft key to enter the signal diagnosis page The page is shown in the following figures See Fig 3 6 1 1 1 Fig 3 6 1 1 4 Operation F signal page Press soft key F SIGNAL in lt DIAGNOSIS gt page to enter diagnosis NC PLC page See Fig 3 6 1 1 1 Q Q Q Q Q Q F012 F013 Q
8. MU HU SAMPLE ANALYSE Press lt OR gt to select SAMPLE or ANALYSE HE zs H4 H4 6 4 H4 H T JE a JE Tz a 6667mm d iv DATA Co s 14 87 41 PATH 1 RIGIDITY CIRCUL RETURN Fig 3 3 5 3 3 1 Note After debugging the rigid grade and parameter opitimization function using the circle degree test tool teststhe current feed axis synchronization each plane circle degree test in 6u is taken the current servo axis synchronization to be the better and the parameter debugging is completed 3 3 9 4 Double Drive Debugging Tool When the system is set to the double drive and the double dirve offsets during running Double drive debugging tool can debug the double drive axis Observe the double drive motor feedback current size to be consistent to parallel the double drive 3 3 5 4 1 Set the Double Drive Function Double drive debugging tool is used P380 1 3 1 the 4 axis is synchronous with X 2 the 4 axis is synchronous with Y 3 the A axis is synchronous with Z No O 0 is set to 1 it is the driver bus transmission mode which can be debugged in MPG mode 3 3 5 4 2 Enter the Double drive Debugging Function SYSTEM For the double drive debugging tool page after pressing sera on the control panel to enter the page select the soft key EBUS to enter the parameter page then select the Double dr
9. a GSEComm Communicator File Edit Series Port Operation View Help Q C Hew a Open fel Save Paste SS Print P About System GSK 218MC D a B S GSN i Communic Send File pita Receive File dfaa Set Port ee 5 Ready HUM Fig 11 1 1 1 11 1 2 Functions 1 File menu The file menu involves functions of New Open Save Print and Print setting and the latest file list etc 2 Edit menu The edit menu involves functions such as Cut Copy Paste Undo Find and Replace 3 Serial port menu It is mainly used for opening and setting the serial port 267 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 4 Transfer Operation menu It consists of three transmission types DNC file sending and file receiving 5 View menu It is used for hiding and displaying the tool bar and status bar 6 Help menu It is used to view the software version Serial Port Data Transmission Steps are shown as follows 1 Select lt MDI gt mode SETTING 2 Press key i to enter the setting page set the I O channel to 0 or 1 3 Press PASSWORD to enter the setting password page input the corresponding authority password See Section 3 4 5 Password Authority Setting and Modification 4 Press key E to enter SETTING DATA DEAL page then press key or to move the cursor to the target position A Data output CNC PC 1 Press system soft key OUTPUT then the system prompts transfer wait
10. 1 98 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code N2 G43 2 32 HOT i scannes 2 N3 G01 2 21 F200 oe as 3 N4 G04 P2000 3 eee 4 NS GOO 22 S nornir N 5 NG XSO YES ONE arian a 6 N7 G01 Z 41 F200 sss seerereene 7 NG GOOZAT E akri aoaia 8 NO ADO O00 8 ra aa 9 N10 G01Z 25 F100 a gt wettest 10 NGOS P2000 7 asoraire e D N12 G00 Z5 THOS arisin 12 N13 X 200 Y 60 3 ou andre 13 N14 M30 4 7 2 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 Command format G41D_ XY G42D XY G40 XY Function G41 specifies the left compensation of the tool moving G42 specifies the right compensation of the tool moving G40 cancels the tool radius compensation Explanation 1 Tool radius compensation As the following figure when using a tool with radius R to cut workpiece A the tool center path is shown as B and the distance from path B to path A is R That the tool is moved by tool radius apart from the workpiece A is called compensation B offset tool center path A programmed path Vector Compensation and vector Fig 4 7 2 1 Programmers write machining programs using the tool radius compensation mode During the machining the tool diameter is measured and input into the CNC memory then the tool path turns into offset path B 2 Offset value D value 99 I 7 O ta S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operatio
11. R level saan gt F Point R P P Spindle CW Spindle CW P Point Z P Point Z Fig 4 4 5 1 When G74 is commanded taping is performed by rotating the spindle clockwise when G84 is commanded the spindle rotates counterclockwise When the bottom of the hole is reached the spindle is rotated in the reverse direction for retraction This operation creates threads Example G94 The spindle starts to rotate M29 S1000 The spindle orientates and its speed is specified G43 G44 H10 Call the tool length compensation G90 G99 G74 G84 X100 Y110 Z 50 R5 P3000 F100 Position tap hole 1 and return to point R Y150 Position tap hole 2 and return to point R G91 X50 K5 X100 Y150 as a reference point along X axis 50mm is the increment unit execute 5 times tapping 64 G98 Y 750 point G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO M30 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Position tap hole 8 and return to the initial Cancle the tapping cycle Return to the reference point End of program Tool length compensation when the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is in the same block with a fixed cycle command and the tool positions to point R and simultaneously executes the offset or cancels the offset when the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Thread lead in feed
12. 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 In manual rapid traverse press keys to select the override of the manual rapid traverse speed The rapid override is divided into four gears including Fo 25 50 and 100 The speed of FO is set by data parameter P93 Note The rapid overrides are effective for the following speed 1 GOO rapid traverse 2 Rapid traverse in canned cycle 3 Rapid traverse in G28 4 Manual rapid traverse Example If the rapid traverse speed is 6m min and override is 50 the actual speed is 3m min 233 O D Q mp O 5 Il O O D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 4 1 4 Manual Intervention While a program being executed in Auto MDI or DNC mode is shifted to MANUAL mode after a dwell operation the manual intervention is available Move the axes manually then shift the mode to the previous one after the intervention When key PEER is pressed to run the program each axis returns to the original intervention point rapidly by GOO and the program execution continues While a program being executed in Auto MDI or DNC mode is shifted to MANUAL mode after a dwell operation the manual intervention is available Move the axes manually then shift the mode to the previous one after the intervention When key ER is pressed to run the program each axis returns to the original intervention point rapidly by GOO and the program exec
13. Fig 4 8 2 4 Straight line to straight line arc to straight line Restrictions 1 Override for inner corners is disabled during acceleration deceleration before interpolation 2 Override for inner corners is disabled if the corner is preceded by a start up block or followed by a block including G41 or G42 3 Override for inner corners is not performed if the offset is zero 123 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 4 9 Macro G Code 4 9 1 Custom Macro The functions realized by a group of codes can be prestored into memory like a subprogram using an representing code If the code is written into the program all these functions can be realized This group of codes is called custom macro body and the representing code is called custom macro code Moreover the custom macro body is also called macro program for short and the custom macro code is also called macro calling code Custom macro body Main program certain function I 7 O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Fig 4 9 1 1 Variables can be used in custom macro body Operation can be performed between them and they can be assigned values by macro instructions 4 9 2 Macro Variables The common CNC instructions and the variables operation as well as the transfer instructions can be used in the custom macro body The custom macro body begins with a program number and ends with M99
14. SETTING 2 Press to enter lt SET gt page set the parameter switch to 1 SETTING 3 Press to enter lt SET gt page input the final user password and the level password SYSTEM 4 Press sox press the soft key EBUS to enter the servo debugging page then press HISERVO PARA to enter the parameter display page 5 Select GRADE ZERO to recover all servo axes parameters into grade 0 s parameters SAVE 6 Press to make the servo save the refreshed parameters and the status bar displays the drivers parameter is successfully saved 7 After all parameters are set the parameter switches are closed 190 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 3 3 5 2 Spindle Parameter When the system selects the spindle driver using the bus control mode No 1 1 is set to 1 the user can view and set the servo drive parameters corresponded to the spindle inf SPINDLE PARA 3 3 5 2 1 Spindle Parameter Display When No 0 4 is set to 0 the system selects to use the single spindle control Press the soft key SPINDLE PARA to enter the spindle parameter page The displayed content in the page is shown in Fig 3 3 5 2 1 1 STANDBY 0001 0002 0003 0804 0005 000G 0007 STANDBY oaos O U a aso o me 10 STANDBY 0011 STANDBY 16 54 12 PATH 1 BE me Fe a ee STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY 2000 E 201 S a w O 2002 S ao aw 2093s S o w O 2004 ee 2095 stay 2
15. 104 Y coordinate of hole Yi The custom macro body can be programmed as follows 09010 N100 G65 H01 P 100 QO I 0 G65 H22 P 101 Q 504 IE N N200 G65 H04 P 102 Q 100 R360 G65 H05 P 102 Q 102 R 504 Q1 A 360 xI N G65 H02 P 102 Q 503 R 102 G65 H32 P 103 Q 502 R 102 X X I R COS 6l G65 H02 P 103 Q 500 R 103 G65 H31 P 104 Q 502 R 102 Y I Y I R SIN 61 G65 H02 P 104 Q 501 R 104 G90 G00 X 103 Y 104 Positioning of hole G Hole machining G code G65 H02 P 100 Q 100 R1 1 1 1 I 7 a O Ca 2 Q 3 3 5 vo 135 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual G65 H84 P200 Q 100 R 101 When I lt IE go to block N 200 drill IE holes M99 Example for a program calling the above custom macro body is as follows 00010 G65 H01 P 500 Q100 Xo 100MM G65 H01 P 501 Q 200 YO 200MM G65 H01 P 502 Q100 R 100MM G65 H01 P 503 Q20 A 20 G65 H01 P 504 Q12 N 12 in CCW rotation G92 X0 YO Z0 M98 P9010 Calling the custom macro G80 XO YO M30 I 4 9 5 Custom Macro Function B 1 Arithmetic and logic operation The operations listed in the following table can be executed on variables The expressions on the right of the operation characters can contain constants and or variables constituted by functions or operation characters The variables j and k in the expression can be replaced by constants The values of the variables on the left can also be
16. 2 PRESS lt START gt SET IT TO COORDINATE gt N lt X O O MEAS POINT 1 Pix Ply 00A CENTER Cx B Pax P2y CENTER Cy a m Pax o Pay o B00 a mm i mm i F N lt x S Manual 1 Automatic DATA S88 39 13 l p PATH 1 RES eee m Fig 3 4 3 1 3 4 3 1 Halving Function Introduction and Operation Explanation Halving measure it includes manual halving and automatic halving Manual halving is valid to a hole or outer circle convex worktable or concave circle automatic halving is valid to holes or outer circles vector holes or outer circles vector convex worktables or grooves vector holes or outer circles vector convex worktables or grooves 1 Manual halving Page display Hole or outer circle A Il O CD Q O MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE COORDINATE SEL 5 OPERATER STEP MANUAL MODE 1 WHEN MOVE TO P1 3 PRESS lt MEASURE gt 2 PRESS lt START gt SET IT TO COORDINATE MEAS POINT Pix Ply CENTER Cx Pex Pay CENTER Cy B D P3x Pay a Manual 1 Automatic 20 39 13 DATA MTC PATH 1 Sa aa Este snr rere O Fig 3 4 3 1 1 B Convex worktable or groove 203 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual WORK MEAS MEASURE MODE g WORKPIECE TYPE A COORDINATE SEL S ABSOLUTE OPERA
17. 2 SWITCH INTO AUTO MODEs SURFACE TOL H 61 5870 mm 3 PRESS lt START gt THEN lt CYCLE START gt RADIAL CLE R 8 DAAA PROBE EXCEED AQ 18 O mm WORKPIECE SIZE D 34 5667 mm 61 5870 mm Z OAOA mm Manual 1 Automat ic DATA Doo 10 86 27 PATH 1 a oro aaa Fig 3 4 3 1 3 II 1 Target size D Diameter of the measured hole or outer circle The value cannot be null or O O CD Q O C Convex worktable and groove parameter MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE ected COORDINATE SEL 5 TOOL OFFSET NO T EMP Val OFT No E CENTER COOR Cx CENTER COOR Cy OPERATER STEP AUTO MODE i 1 INPUT WORKPIECE PAREMETER MEAS PONT COOR Z 2 SWITCH INTO AUTO MODE SURFACE TOL H 3 PRESS lt START gt THEN lt CYCLE START gt RADIAL CLE R 8 PROBE EXCEED Q 10 000 z O mm WORKPIECE SIZE D 2 8247 mm mm i mm O O 31 7420 mm 61 587 mm 34 5667 mm 61 5878 mm Z mm Manual 1 Automat ic DATA Rd 86 27 PATH 1 e er a Fig 3 4 3 1 4 1 target dimension Lx It is the measured X profile dimension The axial measure is not performed when the parameter is null or 0 206 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 2 target dimension Ly It is the measured Y profile dimension The axial measure is not performed when the parameter is null or 0 Note Lx Ly cannot be null or 0 at the same time
18. 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo I mm a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 2 4 Coordinate System 2 4 1 Machine Coordinate System A special point used to the machining reference on the machine is called a machine zero The machine tool manufacturers have set a machine zero on each machine Taking the machine zero as an origin sets a coordinate system is called a machine coordinate system After power on executing manual returning to the machine zero can create a machine coordinate system Once the machine coordinate system is set it remains unchanged till the power supply is turned off or the system is restarted or the Emergency Stop key is pressed The system uses the right hand Cartesian coordinate system its vertical movement motion in spindle direction is Z axis motion From the spindle to the workpiece direction the motion of the spindle box approaching the workpiece is Z s negative motion and the motion of be far away from the workpiece is Z s positive motion other directions is decided by right hand Cartesian coordinate system 2 4 2 Reference Point On the CNC machine there is a special position where a tool change is performed or a coordinate system is set is called a reference point Using the reference point return function can easily traverse the tool to the position Generally the reference point and machine zero of
19. Note 1 If the subprogram number specified by address P is not retrieved an alarm PS 078 will be issued Note 2 No 90000 99999 subprograms are the system reserved programs if such subprograms are called they can be executed but the cursor will keep staying at block N65 and the program page displays the main program all the time The subprogram can be displayed by setting bit parameter No 27 4 Note 3 The macro program cannot be called in DNC mode Note 4 The macro program call can nest up to 5 level 4 9 4 Custom Macro Function A 1 Format G65 Hm P i Q j R k m 01 99 indicate functions of operation instruction or transfer instruction i Variable name for saving the operation result j Variable name 1 for operation or a constant which is expressed directly without k Variable name 2 for operation or a constant Meaning fi j o k L Operation sign specified by Hm I Example P 100 Q 101 R 102 100 101 o 102 P 100 Q 101 R15_ 100 101 o 15 P 100 Q 100 R 102 100 100 o 102 H code specified by G65 has no effect on the offset selection EEE Logic multiplication a ld i Exclusive OR i j XOR k a i Renos laei i ani trunc j k x k 7 O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo Complement Compound multiplication and i x j division operation Compound square a ULDEN Fj ik GOTON 131 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC Sy
20. Q x001 X X O O 014 015 1 1 1 Q Q 0880608680 8 X023 2 3 X 16 1 x004 x005 X806 x007 Operation 0 O 668660606 6 O x017 x018 x019 X020 X 21 x022 TEAL 1 TATAL O X008 x009 x010 1 X 11 17 04 18 PATH 1 F arema e erona ee me Fig 3 6 1 3 Eas DATA This is the signal sent to PLC by CNC system See GSK990MC CNC System PLC Installation and Connection User Manual for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number 4 Y signal page Press soft key Y SIGNAL lin lt DIAGNOSIS gt page to enter PLC MT page as is shown in Fig 3 6 1 4 218 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting Q 1 1 Y 1e 1 Y 1 Y 13 Y014 Y R Y 3 Y 04 008060680 8 1 Y 15 Y 16 g Y017 00686868 8 Y S g 1 1 g
21. SE Too weas MEASURE START RETURN Fig 3 4 3 2 1 TOOL LENGTH MEASURE DEPTH EXCEED DIS R amp Q WEAROUT OFT NO M WEAROUT ALLOW E TOOL DIA TRIM I Z AXIS ORIGIN SET COORD SYS SELECT 654 nn N gt 1 L 2 D 3 L8D 4 Calibrate L 5S calibrate D DATA Toolsetting function includes automatic tool length measure and Z workpiece origin setting A Tool measure The automatic tool length measure function uses the toolsetting instrument installed on the worktable to perform the length measure and diameter measure and the length and diameter of each tool are automatically set to the specified tool offset register which ensures a correct machining can be executed even if the tools with different lengths and diameters are used when the same program is running B Zworkpiece s origin setting O D FR Q ang O 5 After the tool length measure is completed the tool is moved to the workpiece s surface at the moment at the moment lt Measure gt is pressed to set the current machine coordinate value as an origin to the selected workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 G54 P1 P50 Tool measure A Parameter item explanation 1 measure mode selection 1 length 2 diameter 3 length amp diameter 4 length demarcated 5 diameter demarcated 2 tool number T the currentlr required tool number to measure 3 tool length s offset number H store the current tool length
22. Setting range 0 0000 50 0000 gt O O D 5 Q x Appendix 2 Alarm List Appendix 2 Alarm List w freona O O w Dataimputoveriow S Program number already in use 0003 There is no address but figure or character at the beginning of the block a Modify the program There is no appropriate data but another address or EOB code behind the 0004 address Modify the program Sign input is wrong One or more signs are input behind the address where negative sign can not be used Modify the program 0006 Decimal point input is wrong One or more signs are input in the address where the sign can not be used Modify the program The program file is too large Please use CNC to transmit it i 0008 egal address input Modiy the pogam T 2008 Geode wrong Mody the progam T 0010 Feon OOS O O 001 Feearate is not specified oritis wrong in cutting feed Modiy the program 0012 Disk space is not enough Setup orada fie isnotalowea 0013 The program fies are up to the upper imit New program can notbe setup 0014 695 can not be specified itis not supported bythe spindle 0015 Exccea the number of simultaneously contoledaxes 0016 Current pitch compensation beyond rens modify parameter of user grade In circular interpolation G02 or G03 the distance between the start point and the circle center is not equal to the distance between the end point and the circle center The va
23. by a code for end of block ISO uses LF EIA uses CR Using a character means a code for end of block program 000022 6 000016 G92X Y Z N106Z39 N108Ze 3 N128X75 472Y 48 356Z 031 ne N130X75 496 48 174Z 33 Block end code N132Y 48 011 IN134X75 472Y 47 876Z 031 Block N136X75 425Y 47 776Z 028 N138X75 354Y 47 719Z 023 N140X75 26Y 47 712Z 017 N142X75 142Y 47 764Z 009 N144 Program end Input Input 03 06 12 i are ee o KORK a Fig 3 1 1 structure of a program 7 a O Ca 2 S 3 3 5 vo A group of commands for controlling the CNC machine to finish workpiece machining is called a program After the compiled program is input to the CNC system the system make the tool move along a straight line or an arc or rotate or stop the spindle Please edit these commands according to the actual movement sequence of the machine tool in the program Structure of the program is shown in Fig 3 1 1 3 1 1 Program Name In the system the system s memory can store many programs In order to mutually differentiate these programs each program begins with an address O followed by a five digit number which is shown in Fig 3 1 1 1 I mm a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual O UUL Program name 0 99999 Leading zero can be omitted Address O
24. 4 2 2 Spindle Rotation CW 9 da Specifies S speed in MDI mode in Manual MPG Step mode press this key to rotate the spindle clockwise 4 2 3 Spindle Stop ho STOP sn Manual MPG Step mode press this key to stop the spindle Il 4 2 4 Spindle Automatic Gear Shift O D s Q mp O 5 Whether the spindle is frequency conversion control or gear control is set by bit parameter No 1 2 If parameter No 1 2 1 the spindle auto gear shift is controlled by PLC Three gears gear 1 to gear 3 are available in this system and the maximum speed of each gear is set by parameters P246 P247and P248 respectively The corresponding gear can be output by modifying the ladder In MANUAL or Auto mode the increase or decrease for the corresponding spindle gear can be adjusted for the spindle CCW or CW rotation by pressing positive negative override keys In MDI mode the system will automatically select the corresponding gear after the specified speed is input 237 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Spindle motor speed Max speed 10V Spindle motor max clamp speed Spindle motor min clamp speed Spindle rotation instruction S instruction Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 Max speed Max speed Max speed Fig 4 2 4 1 Note When the spindle auto gear shift is effective the spindle gear is detected by gear in position signal and S instruction is executed 4 3 Other Manual
25. 5 __ of 009729 it is defaulted to 5 when the least different value is changed 5 __ is modified E Vector convex worktable amp groove 207 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual WORK MEAS MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE COORDINATE SEL S TOOL OFFSET NO T EMP Val OFT No E CENTER COOR Cx CENTER COOR Cy OPERATER STEP AUTO MODE i 1 INPUT WORKPIECE PAREMETER MEAS PONT COOR Z 2 SWITCH INTO AUTO MODE SURFACE TOL H 3 PRESS lt START gt THEN lt CYCLE START gt RADIAL CLE R PROBE EXCEED Q WORKPIECE SIZE D START ANGLE A MACHINE K 2 8247 Y OAOA mm 2 0000 ABSOLUTE X 31 7420 m Y 61 5870 m 0088 G54 5667 mm 5870 mm OOOO mm lholegexcircle Groove amp boss S Vectorhole amp Sexcircle 4Yector groovegboss DATA 10 37 09 PATH 1 SETTING HWORK ESS HDATA PASSWORD Fig 3 4 3 1 6 1 target size D It is the measured profile dimension The axial measure is not performed when the parameter is null or O 2 initial angle A Il Angle of the measured plane is started to count from X direction Data input A Data input condition When the automatic halving measure is not started data can be input in any modes B Input format 1 data lt Input gt to input the required input data 2 directly press lt Input gt to input a null value
26. D Vector hole amp outer circle WORK MEAS MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE COORDINATE SEL S TOOL OFFSET NO T EMP Val OFT No E CENTER COOR Cx CENTER COOR Cy OPERATER STEP AUTO MODE 1 INPUT WORKPIECE PAREMETER WEAS PONT COOR Z 2 SWITCH INTO AUTO MODE SURFACE TOL H 3 PRESS lt START gt THEN lt CYCLE START gt RADIAL CLE R PROBE EXCEED QQ WORKPIECE SIZE D START ANGLE At B Es MACHINE X 2 8247 Y 0000 0000 ABSOLUTE X 31 7420 m Y 61 5870 mm 080 G54 5667 mm 5870 m OOOO mm 5 48 10 Baa SECOND ANGLE THIRD ANGLE UL lholegexcircle 2Groove amp boss 3Vectorhole amp excircle 4Vector groove amp boss DATA l 36 49 PATH 1 SET TING WORK MEASURE EIDATA PASSWORD Fig 3 4 3 1 5 1 target size D Diameter of the measured hole or outer circle The value cannot be null or O O D 3 Q ang O 5 2 initial angle A Angle of the 1 vector measure is started to count from X direction When it is ignored an alarm occurs 3 angle B of the 2 point Angle of the 2 vector measure is started to count from X direction When it is ignored an alarm occurs 4 angle C of the 3 point Angle of the 3 vector measure is started to count from X direction When it is ignored an alarm occurs Note the least different value of any two points is determined by
27. O0066 Program number G65 HOT Operation instruction G90 GOO X 101 CNC instruction using variables Transfer instruction Custom macro body ends Fig 4 9 2 1 structure of custom macro body 1 Variable usage With a variable the parameter value in custom macro body can be specified The variable value can be assigned by the main program or set by LCD MDI or be assigned by a computation during the execution of custom macro body Multiple variables can be used in custom macro and they are differentiated by their variable numbers 1 Variable representation 124 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code The variable is expressed by a sign followed by a variable number the format of which is as follows Hi i 1 2 3 4 example 5 109 1005 2 Variable reference The variable can be used to replace the value of a parameter Example F 103 When 103 15 it is the same as F15 G 130 When 103 3 it is the same as G3 Note 1 Variables cannot be referenced by parameter word O and N program number and sequence number e g 05100 and N 120 are not permitted in programming Note 2 Variables exceeding the max limit of the parameter cannot t be used When 30 120 M 30 exceeds the max limit of the instruction Note 3 Display and setting of variable values The values can be displayed on LCD or be set by MDI mode 2 Types of variables Variables are divided into null variables local varia
28. Setting range 0 99999 0360 Accumulative time of cutting h Setting range 0 99999 0371 The 1 axis reverse position allowance 0 0150 setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0372 The 2 axis reverse position allowance 0 0150 Setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0373 The 3 axis reverse position allowance 0 0150 setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0374 The 4 axis reverse position allowance 0 0150 setting range 0 99 9999 mm When the set backlash compensation value P0190 P0193 of an axis is bigger than the reverse positioning allowable error P0371 P0374 of this axis the speed at the end point of a single block reduces to minimum speed before this backlash compensation begins This will make the other axes move a small distance in the backlash compensation period and that will ensure the resultant path deviates the real path least 0375 The 5 axis reverse position allowance 0 0150 setting range 0 99 9999 mm 0376 Axes moving sequence to program restart 12345 Setting range 0 99999 0387 The 1 axis positioning value for toolsetting instrument in G53 setting range 999 9999 999 9999 0388 The 2 axis positioning value for toolsetting instrument in G53 setting range 999 9999 999 9999 0389 The 3 axis positioning value for toolsetting instrument in G53 Setting range 999 9999 999 9999 0390 Estimated length from tool nose to tool holder setting range 0 0000 999 9999 0391 Automatic probe s diameter Set
29. cccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeesaneees 184 B g Macro Variable DISDIOY srcressectmoadoccemisciectsevaebcierestacccevpsrenensaiade A N 184 3 3 3 2 Modification and Setting for Macro Variables cesccsssscccssssceessecesssseccsseeeessseeeseeeesssseeesesneeeseanees 185 3 3 4 Display Modification and Setting for Screw Pitch Offset ccccceccceesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeseeeeesaeeees 186 ISA Pitch Onset Display cinten a E E ee anaes 186 3 3 4 2 Modification and Setting for Pitch Offset eccssscesssecssseeeseseeessseeessseeessseeesseeesssseeesenseeesseeess 186 3 3 5 Bus Servo Parameter Display Modification and Setting ccccccceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeseesaaeees 186 SOO Servo Parameter DISplay creien secduesnstannsecosa ie saaden iocaanth week seoeanc a EDER 188 S3 SA ASPINGIC Para ER 5 a saws etc aes GEA R 191 33 93 SERVO DEDUGJING secme a a a a res r 193 335954 Double Drive Debugging Tool r LEE EEA ENEA ATE i 198 34 SENE DISD iVn n N RER 199 gA SERRA Es aa aa a ke ane ak cee Dea alee 199 3 4 2 Workpiece Coordinate Setting PagGe ccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeesaeeeeeseeeeeas 201 3 4 3 Halving and Toolsetting FUNCTION ccccccccssececesceceseesceseecsececeueeseueeseaeeeseeeseueessueesseeseesseetenseteneas 202 RE CORO De AMIN ONS System Brogre mm Ing Aid Spe ret On set Maney 3 4 3 1 Halving Function Introduction and Oper
30. ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo ooo 0 000 ooo aoo aoo ooo ooo fj i d fj d i 000 000 000 000 0 000 0 000 00O 0 000 2 B R A D R A 00A A BBE fj A D R A D R ooo oo 2 008 ooo ooo 0 000 0 000 ooo oo 3 008 Z 2 B R A D R A 00A A BBE A OOA j OUY UU AG HV i B R J OE 4 UE fj i A OBE J BE i A HOE A Oe A HOE i ooo ooo 0000 0000 oo ooo ooo 0 000 owo 000 ooo 0000 J YOY OY J YY BBB 7 AE D R A mm mm OOmm weur 10 40 10 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 1 1 1 JOFFSET I in the above figure to enter offset operation subpage See fig Press soft key E 3 3 1 1 2 oo ooo ooo ooo o ooo ooo 0 000 0000 as 0 000 ooo 0 000 0 000 oa ooo ooo 0o00 0 000 os ooo ooo 0 000 0 000 a ooo ooo 0 000 0 000 o7 ooo 0 000 0 000 0 000 os ooo ooo oo oo II O CD Q O a 000 0 000 a a a a 000 X 62 273mm W 47 897mm Z 5 488mm INPUT rr E EAEE PATH 1 i ae ae ee eee Fig 3 3 1 1 2 The offset value can be input directly or added to or subtracted from the actual position value GEOM H stands for tool length compensation WEAR H for tool length abrasion GEOM D stands for tool radius compensation and WEAR D for tool radius abrasion 3 3 1 2 Modification and Setting for Offset Value The steps
31. paste Chapter 10 Eidt Operation Note 1 If the last character keyed in occurs many times in the program the system will copy the blocks till the word nearest to the cursor location Note 2 If the blocks are copied with method N sequence number the blocks from the cursor to the N sequence number are copied Note 3 10 000 lines of blocks can be copied at most 10 1 6 Cut and Paste of Blocks Steps for cutting blocks are as follows a Enter the program edit page as Fig 10 1 1 b Locate the cursor to the beginning of the block to be cut c Key in the last character of the block to be cut d Press soft key CUT to cut the block into clipboard e Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted and press soft key PASTE to finish block pasting Note 1 If the last character keyed in occurs many times in the program the system will cut the blocks from the cursor to the word nearest to the cursor Note 2 If the blocks are cut with method N sequence number the blocks from the cursor to the N sequence number are cut Note 3 In Edit mode when the program name is in a block with the program content in the program page the system executes copy operation to the character followed by the program name but cannot execute the cut operation 10 1 7 Block Replacement Il Steps for replacing a block are as follows a Enter the program edit page Fig 10 1 1 b Locate the cursor to the character to be replaced c Key in
32. s offset number it is defaulted to the same value with T 4 tool diameter s offset number D store the current tool diameter s offset number it is defaulted to the same value with T 5 tool diameter S 209 SGT HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual It is the test tool s diameter When S is value it means the tool is a right hand cutting tool when S is value it means the tool is a left hand cutting tool When the tool radius offset number D register has a nominal tool diameter the value can not be input after the tool number T is modified the parameter value is cleared 6 tool length test L It is the tested tool length When the tool length offset number H register has a nominal tool length the value can not be input after the tool number T is modified the parameter value is cleared Note 1 When the measure mode selects the length demarcation the length must be input and is the exact standard tool s length 7 measure depth Z depth from the the probe s surface to the measure position of the diameter default value 5 0mm 0 20 inch its negative value means it is downward 8 overtravel amount R amp Q overtravel amount and radial clearance when it moves downward to the probe s side default value 4 0 mm 0 16 inch Note 2 When the length is measured it is the length direction s overtravel amount when the diameter is measured i
33. 59 I 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with a canned cycle instructioin the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level when the tool compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Example M3 S2000 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G81 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 10 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drilling hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning drilling hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Limitation When G81 is used G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G81 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G81 is replaced by other G codes in group 01 Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation 4 4
34. 7 aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo 1 Rapid positioning to a location within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 To make circular interpolation by the transition arc 1 from the start point 5 To make circular interpolation for the whole circle by the path of arc2 and arc 3 6 To make circular interpolation by transition arc 4 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial level or R level according to code G98 or G99 Command path G26 CCW outer circle finish milling cycle G32 CW E finish milling cycle Y Tool center path Tool center path Fig 4 6 3 1 Explanation In outer circle finish milling the interpolation directions of the transition arc and fine milling arc are different The interpolation direction in the code means the one of the fine milling Example Fine milling a circular groove that has been rough milled as follows by the canned cycle code G26 90 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code _ X25 Y25 start point Fig 4 6 3 2 G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 600 rapid positioning 7 G99 G26 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 J30 D1 F800 Canned cycle starts and goes down to the bottom O to perform the outer circle fine milling R G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level 3 M30 3 mD Q Limitation when G26 G32 is used G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal code NO 48 0 is set to 1 otherwise G26 G32 is replaced by other
35. D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 6 1 3 MPG Feed Explanation 1 The relationship between handwheel scale and machine moving amount is as follows Table 6 1 3 1 0 Moving amount per MPG scale MPG increment mm 0 007 Machine moving amount mm 0 001 0 01 MPG increment inch 0 001 0 01 Machine moving amount inch 0 0001 0 001 2 The values in the table above vary with the mechanical transmission See the manual provided by the machine tool builder for details 3 The rotation speed of the handwheel cannot exceed 5r s otherwise the scale and the moving amount may be inconsistent 6 2 Control in MPG Interruption 6 2 1 MPG Interruption Operation The MPG interruption operation can overlap the automatic movement in Auto mode Tool position in Tool position aft ool position after Reade MPG interruption Cutting depth caused by MPG interruption Fig 6 2 1 1 The operations are as follows 1 After the dwell operation switch the program being executed in Auto mode to MPG mode 2 Move the tool by the handwheel to modify the coordinate system such as moving Z axis upward and downward moving X and Y axes horizontally or rotating A axis 3 After the control is switched to Auto mode the workpiece coordinates remain unchanged till the machine zero return operation is performed again After the operation the coordinates restore to their a
36. Function They are used for fine milling within a rectangle by the specified width and direction and the tool returns after finishing the fine milling Explanation G35 CCW inner rectangular groove finish milling cycle G36 CW inner rectangular groove finish milling cycle X Y The start point within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference plane in G91 R R reference plane which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to the start point of this block in G91 l Rectangular width in X axis ranging from tool diameter 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative J Rectangular width in Y axis ranging from tool diameter 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative L Distance from milling start point to rectangular side in X axis ranging from tool radius 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative U Corner arc radius No corner transition if it is omitted Alarm is issued if 0 lt U lt tool radius D Tool diameter number ranging from 1 256 DO is 0 by default The current tool diameter value is given by the specified number 93 Or hd Sy GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual K Number of repeats Cycle process 1 Rapid positioning to the start point within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 Perform circular interpola
37. G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 8001 0000 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 00O 0O 00 DATA 28 87 52 PATH 1 MEI ee Fig 3 1 2 1 The meanings of them are as follows Speed The actual cutting speed overridden Programmed speed Speed specified by F code Feedrate override Feed override selected by feedrate override keys Rapid override Rapid override selected by rapid override keys G codes The values of the G codes in the block being executed Tool offset HOOOO the tool length compensation for the current program DOOOO the tool radius compensation for the current program Part count When M30 or MO2 is executed in Auto or DNC mode the count increases by 1 In other modes the count does not increase when M30 or M02 is executed Cut time Time counting starts after Auto run starts with a unit of hour minute second S00000 command speed fe in LREL LABS page to position to S 00000 the spindle speed at the moment modify the S value modification range is the set value of O P258 T0000 Tool number specified by T code in a program Note The part count is reserved after power down Ways to clear part count and cut time 1 Switch to POSITION page select MDI mode 175 O D FR Q mp O 5 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 2 Press key to locate the cursor to the PRT CNT item input data and press key for confirmation if k
38. In G00 block the feedrate F code is invalid even if it is specified The system performs positioning at the speed specified by G0 7 2 Cutting Feedrate The tool feedrates in linear interpolation G01 and circular interpolation G02 G03 are specified with the numbers after F code in mm min The tool is moved by the programmed feedrate An override can be applied to the cutting feedrate using the override keys on the operator panel Override range 0 200 In order to prevent mechanical vibration acceleration deceleration is automatically applied at the beginning and the end of the tool movement respectively The acceleration can be set by data parameters P125 P128 The minimum cutting feedrate is set by data parameter P96 and the maximum cutting feedrate in the forecast mode is set by P97 If it is smaller than the lower limit the cutting feedrate is clamped to the lower limit The cutting feedrate in auto mode at power on is set by data parameter P87 The cutting feedrate can be specified by the following two types A Feed per minute G94 it is used to specify the feed amount per minute after F code B Feed per revolution G95 it is used to specify the feed amount per revolution after F code 7 2 1 Feed per Minute G94 Command format G94 F_ Function It specifies the tool feed amount per minute Unit mm min or inch min 151 I 7 a O Ca S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC Sy
39. It is invalid during the rigid taping Note when the flexible tapping rigid tapping or deep hole rigid tapping is executed using G97 cancels the constant surface cutting feedrate otherwise teeth disorder or broken screw taper exists 4 5 2 Right Hand Tapping Cycle G84 Format G84X YZRPFK Function In rigid taping the spindle motor is controlled as if it were a servo motor which is used for high speed and high precision taping It keeps the start positions of the taping unchanged if point R is not changed Even if taping is performed repeatedly in a position the threads will not be broken Explanation X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P_ Dwell time at the bottom of the hole with its absolute value used if it is negative F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Number of repeats specify it if necessary G84 G98 G84 G99 Spindle stop Spindle stop gt O Q Initial level Operation 2 Operation 6 Ce oC Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Point R level Spindle sto Spindle CW Spindle stop Spindle CW p p p Point R P Point R P Operation 3 Operation 5 Op
40. N1088 Z2 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 N130 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 11 N134 X75 N136 X75 N138 X75 N140 X75 N142 X75 N144 X75 N146 X74 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 26 4 V12 2 017 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 Y 47 882 Z 608 Y 48 274 Z 026 DATA O0 002 08 S 37 PATH 1 E aa 0880Ge2 DATA to set up the new program name as is shown in Fig 10 1 1 2 3 Fig 10 1 1 2 2 il 5 CD Q 08 50 53 PATH 1 aa ooo a au Fig 10 1 1 2 3 Input the written program word by word After the input the program will be saved automatically when the control is switched to other operation modes However if the control SAVE needs to be switched to other pages e g page first press key e to save the program and then finish the input of the program 257 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Note 1 Pure numerical value input is unavailable in Edit mode Note 2 If a wrong instruction word is detected during program inputting press key cancel the instruction Note 3 No more than 65 characters can be input in one block each time 10 1 1 3 Search of Sequence Number Word and Line Number The sequence number search operation is used to search for a sequence number from which the program execution an
41. Regulate the rigid grade lt Press lt RESET gt to reset the initial operation No press the direction keys to continously regulate th Whether to enter the next step Yes v Yes press lt lnput gt key to clear the optimization state and prepar Fess T s move or Axis initialize the rigid grade and then optimize it again mave J To fest the rigid grade No press f or H gt to regulate the rigid grade No press lt Cancel gt to return the grade regulation Then directly regulate or test the rigid grade hether a vibration or abnormal occurs Whether it has No press lt Input gt to directly enter the optimization flow Yes press lt Input gt to directly enter the optimization flow been optimized No y Step3 enter the optimization flow O D x 7 e O DD Whether to optimize Yes press Axis Move or Axis Move to optimize it Step 4 optimization is completed y No press lt Cancel gt key to clear the optimization data and then optimize it again Whether to download parameters Yes v Step5 Press lt Input gt To download parameters Whether the download is successful I axis to continuously optimize it The operation is completed Enter step0 use the U
42. Setting range 3 400 ms 0126 S type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100 of cutting feed Setting range 3 400 ms 0127 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of cutting feed Setting range 3 400 ms 0128 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of cutting feed Setting range 3 400 ms 0129 FL speed of exponential acceleration deceleration 10 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0130 Maximum blocks merged in pre interpolation Setting range 0 10 0131 In position precision of cutting feed 0 03 Setting range 0 001 0 5 mm 0132 Control precision of circular interpolation 0 03 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0133 Contour control precision of pre interpolation 0 01 Setting range 0 01 0 5 mm 0134 Acceleration of the fore linear acceleration deceleration interpolated in forecasting control Setting range 0 2000 mm s 0135 Forecasting control S type _ pre acceleration 100 deceleration time constant 305 gt Lej D 5 Q x Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Setting range 0 400 ms 0136 Linear time constant of the post acceleration deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 0 400 ms 0137 Exponential time constant of the post acceleration deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 0 400 ms 0138 Exponential acceleration deceleration FL speed of 10 cutting feed in fo
43. The contents are shown as follows see Fig 3 4 1 1 199 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual PAR SWITCH _ OFF 1 ON PRG SWITCH 0 OFF 1 ON KeyBoard 218MC H 1 218MC V 2 218MC IN UNIT 0 MM 1 INCH I O CHAN 0 Xon Xoff 1 XModem 2 USB AUTO SEQ OFF 1 ON SEQ INC 0 1000 SEQ STOP PROGRAM NO SEQ STOP SEQUENCE NO DATE 2o11 y a7 M __12 D TIME 10 H solm 13 5 INPUT f 10 50 13 ee PATH 1 WORK DATA PASSWORD Fig 3 4 1 1 2 Explanation for SETTING page Press soft key SETTING to enter the page shown as Fig 3 4 1 1 After entering the page users can view and modify the parameters The operation steps are as follows Ca Enter lt MDI gt mode b Move the cursor to the item to be altered by pressing cursor keys Cc According to the explanation below key in 1 or 0 or use left and right keys for modification 1 Parameter switch 0 Parameter switch OFF 1 Parameter switch ON When the parameter switch is set to O it is forbidden to modify and set the system parameters meanwhile an alarm 0100 parameter writing valid cancel is issued When the parameter switch is set to 1 an alarm 0100 parameter writing valid is issued Here the SHIFT user can cancel the alarm pressing key key Ea This operation is only effective in SETTING page 2 Program switch 0 Program swit
44. Workpiece origin offset amount along the 5 axis in G55 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0025 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 1 axis in G56 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0026 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 2 axis in G56 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0027 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 3 axis in G56 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 297 gt Lej D 5 Q x Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0028 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 4 axis in 0 0000 G56 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0029 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 5 axis in 0 0000 G56 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0030 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 1 axis in 0 0000 G57 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0031 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 2 axis in 0 0000 G57 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0032 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 3 axis in 0 0000 G57 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0033 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 4 axis in 0 0000 G57 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0034 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 5 axis in 0 0000 G57 Set
45. Wrong movement or distance is specified after rounding or chamfering Modify the program Mirror image function can not be used in grooving canned cycle Modify the program 0053 Wrong instruction format for rounding or chamfering Modify the program DNC transmission error Chamfer movement failed M99 shall not in the same block with macro instruction G65 Modify the program 0057 File input failed Cut off the power and reset it In block of rounding or chamfering specified axis is not in the selected plane 0058 Modify the program Program number is not found in external program retrieving or it is edited in background Check program number or external signal or stop background editting gt 3 Z O J CD se Go DO 4 Appendix 2 Alarm List 0060 Specified sequence number is not found in retrieving Check sequence La number 0061 The 1 axis is not on the reference point i 0062 The 2 axis is not on the reference point an 0063 The 3 axis is not on the reference point a 0064 The 4 axis is not on the reference point i T0066 Cancel canned oyote mode vetore muting parameter e10 T0067 Gtodoes not supponthesetiommat oee Parameter swt srorsweneaon 0069 u ask operation page shouldbe closed when macra 0070 insuficient memory Delete unneeded programs and vy taon Cor The addressienotfound S 0072 Too many programs 63 basic 125 optional 200 optional or 400 HE optiona
46. bit par 39 041 num par 266 267 0013 parameters related to fixed canned cycle bit par 42 043 num par 0270 0280 P 1 3 DA 47 12 82 PATH 1 a Fre SYS INFO OPRT ALARM cco EN gt Fig 3 9 6 The parameter setting for each function is described in the page If you are not familiar with the setting you can find corresponding information here 6 Macro page In lt HELP gt page press soft key MACRO to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 10 7 228 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting G65 H M PI OJ RK M 91 93 operation instruction 1 operation result var seq alarm J operand 1 variable invariable K operand 2 variable invariable Hg1 1 J H 1 J K HgS 1 J K H 4 1 J K H 5 1 J K H11 1 J or K H12 1 J and K H13 I J xor K H21 I sqrt u P 1 4 PATH 1 S EA Fig 3 9 7 The formats and a variety of operation codes of the macro instructions are described in this page and the setting ranges for local variable common variable and system variable are also given If you are unfamiliar with the macro instruction operations you can get corresponding information here 7 PLC AD page In lt HELP gt page press soft key PLC AD to enter this page There are four subpages including F ADDR G ADDR X ADDR Jand Y ADDR as is shown in figures 3 9 8 3 9 11
47. direction of the previous block is formed when the block specified together with offset cancel contains amp no tool movement This vector will be cancelled in next moving code S 3 2 N6 G91 X100 Y100 N7 G40 N8 X100 YO Programmed path Tool center path Fig 4 7 3 19 9 Corner movement If two or more vectors are formed at the end of the block the tool traverses linearly from one vector to another The movement is called corner movement If AVXSAV limit and AVYSAV limit the latter vector is ignored If these vectors do not coincide then a movement around the corner is created This movement belongs to the former block REE This move belongs to block N6 thus the feedrate is equal to that in block N6 If block N6 is GOO mode the tool moves at rapid feedrate if block N6 is G01 G02 G03 mode the tool moves at cutting feedrate Fig 4 7 3 20 However if the path of the next block overpasses the semicircle the function above is not performed The reason is that 115 I mm aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Or hd Sy GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual N4 G41 G91 X150 Y200 N5 X150 Y200 N6 G02 J 600 N7 G01 X150 Y 200 N8 G40 X150 Y 200 Tool center path al Programmed path Fig 4 7 3 21 If the vector is not ignored the tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P3 arc P4 P5 P6 P7 If the distance between P2 and P
48. or G91 mode the parameter is 1 at Power On is set by bit parameter N0 31 4 4 2 5 Dwell G04 Format G04 X_ or P_ Function G40 is for dwell operation It delays the specified time before executing the next block In cutting mode G64 it is used for exact stop check The dwell per revolution in Feed per Revolution mode G95 can be specified by bit parameter No 34 0 Table 4 2 5 1 Value range of dwell time commanded with X Least command increment Value range Unit of dwell time No 5 1 0 0 001 9999 999 Serrey No 5 1 1 0 0001 9999 9999 Table 4 2 5 2 Value range of dwell time commanded with P Least command increment Value range Unit of dwell time 30 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code No 5 1 0 1 99999 999 0 001s or rev No 5 1 1 1 99999 999 0 0001s or rev Explanation 1 G04 is non modal command which is only effective in the current block 2 If parameters X and P appear simultaneously parameter X is effective 3 An alarm occurs if the values of X and P are negative 4 Dwell is not executed if neither X nor P is specified 4 2 6 Single direction positioning G60 Format G60 X_ Y_Z_ I Overrun Dwell Start point 7 O ta S 3 3 5 vo O DN Start point Dwell End point Fig 4 2 6 1 Function For accurate positioning without machine backlash G60 can be used for accurate positioning in a single direction Explanation G60 is a non modal G cod
49. positioning and their values for the overrun Note 2 If overrun gt 0 the positioning direction is positive Note 3 If overrun lt 0 the positioning direction is negative Note 4 If overrun 0 no single direction positioning is available 4 2 7 On line modification for system parameters G10 Function It is used to set or modify the values of tool radius length offset external zero offset workpiece zero offset additional workpiece zero offset data parameter bit parameter and so on in a program Format G10 L50N P R Setting or modifying the bit parameter G10 L51N_R_ Setting or modifying the data parameter G11 Canceling the parameter input mode Parameter definition N Parameter number Sequence number to be modified P Parameter bit number Bit number to be modified R Value Parameter value after being modified The values can also be modified by following codes Refer to relative sections for details 32 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code G10L2 PXYZAB Setting or modifying external zero offset or workpiece zero offset G10 L10P R Setting or modifying length offset G10L11 P_R_ Setting or modifying length wear G10L12P_R_ Setting or modifying radius offset G10L13P_R_ Setting or modifying radius wear G10L20P_ X YZAB Setting or modifying additional workpiece zero offset Note 1 In parameter input mode no NC statement can be specified except annotation statement Note 2 G10 must be specified in a
50. s gt Typical program The program below calculates the sum of numerical value 1 to 10 139 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 09500 1 0 Initial value of the variable to hold the sum 2 1 Initial value of the variable as an addend N1 IF 1 GE 10 JGOTO 2 Transfers to N2 when the addend is greater than or equal to 10 1 1 2 Calculation to find the sum 1 2 1 The next addend GOTO 1 Traverse to N1 N2 M30 Program end 4 Loop WHILE statement Specify a conditional expression behind WHILE when the specified condition is satisfied the program from DO to END is executed otherwise program execution proceeds to the block after END WHILE conditional expression DO m m 1 2 3 I If the condition is satisfied Program If the condition is not satisfied END mM mm a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo When the specified condition is satisfied the program from DO to END is executed Otherwise program execution proceeds to the block after END This kind of instruction format is applicable to IF statement A number after DO and a number after END are the identification numbers for specifying the range of execution The identification numbers are 1 2 and 3 If numbers other than 1 2 and 3 are used an alarm occurs Explanation gt Nesting The identification numbers 1 to 3 in the loop from DO to END can be used repeated
51. 0 9999 Setting range 0 9999 0 9999 Pitch error of the 4 axis moving to the origin from the direction which is opposite to the zero return s direction Setting range 0 9999 0 9999 Pitch error of the 5 axis moving to the origin from the Pitch error of the 3 axis moving to the origin from the direction which is opposite to the zero return s direction direction which is opposite to the zero return s direction Setting range 0 9999 0 9999 0226 Pitch error compensation points of the 1 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0227 Pitch error compensation points of the 2 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0228 Pitch error compensation points of the 3 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0229 Pitch error compensation points of the 4 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 0230 Pitch error compensation points of the 5 axis Setting range 0 9999 9999 rapidly moves ae mmm ML a gt O D 5 Q x Setting range 0 5 0 5 0232 Backlash compensation amount when the 2 axis rapidly moves Setting range 0 5 0 5 0233 Backlash compensation amount when the 3 axis rapidly moves Setting range 0 5 0 5 0234 Backlash compensation amount when the 4 axis rapidly moves Setting range 0 5 0 5 0235 Backlash compensation amount when the 5 axis rapidly moves E 3 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List Setting range 0 5 0 5 0236 Circular sharp corner processing parameter
52. 1 Setting range 0 5 0237 Circular sharp corner processing parameter 2 Setting range O 5 0238 Circular sharp corner processing parameter 3 Setting range O 5 0240 Gain adjustment data for spindle analog output Setting range 0 98 1 02 0241 Compensation value of offset voltage for spindle analog output Setting range 0 2 0 2 0242 Spindle speed at spindle orientation or motor speed at spindle gear shift Setting range 0 9999 r min Spindle maximum speed to gear 1 6000 0246 Setting ra 0247 Setting ra 0248 Setting ra 0249 Setting ra 0250 Setting ra 0251 Setting ra 0254 Setting ra 0255 Setting ra 0257 nge 0 99999 r min Spindle maximum speed to gear 2 nge 0 99999 r min Spindle maximum speed to gear 3 nge 0 99999 r min Spindle maximum speed to gear 4 nge 0 99999 r min Spindle motor speed of gear shifting nge O 1000 r min Maximum spindle motor speed of shifting nge 0 99999 r min Axis as counting for surface speed control nge 0 4 Spindle minimum speed for constant surface speed control G96 nge 0 9999 r min Spindle upper limit speed in tapping cycle 50 6000 6000 6000 50 6000 100 2000 313 gt Lej D 5 Q x Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Setting range 0 5000 r min 0258 Spindle upper limit speed 6000 Sett
53. 1 65536 0168 Frequency division coefficient of the 4 axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 0169 Frequency division coefficient of the 5 axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 0170 The 1 axis manual rapid positioning speed 5000 Setting range 0 30000 0171 The 2 axis manual rapid positioning speed 5000 Setting range O 30000 0172 The 3 axis manual rapid positioning speed 5000 Setting range O0 30000 0173 The 4 axis manual rapid positioning speed 5000 Setting range O0 30000 0174 The 5 axis manual rapid positioning speed 5000 Setting range 0 30000 0175 Program name of the 1 axis Setting range O 8 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 3 A 4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0176 Program name of the 2 axis Setting range O 8 0 X 1 Y 2 2 3 A4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0177 Program name of the 3 axis Setting range O 8 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 3 A4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0178 Program name of the 4 axis Setting range O 8 0 X 1 Y 2 2 3 A4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W 0179 Program name of the 5 axis setting range O 8 0 X 1 Y 2 2 3 A4 B 5 C 6 U 7 V 8 W gt O O D 5 Q x 308 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0180 The 1 axis grid reference point offset amount Setting range 0 50 0181 The 2 axis grid reference point offset amount Setting range 0 50 0182 The 3 axis grid reference point offset amount Setting range 0 50 0183 The 4 axis grid reference point offset amount Setting range 0 50 When the m
54. 1 4 1 below further edit for the program files by serial communication software 271 Il O O D s Q O 5 212 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual New Open fe Save Paste EhPrint P About System GSK218M GSN DE DNC Communic Ga Send File Receive File SZ Set Port Port CAMT Ma Ej y Pa it 38400 007999 G54G0x0Y020 N102 GO G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 730M351500M8 N10822 3 N126X75 425Y 48 5512 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 2 031 N130 X75 496 Y 48 174 2 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 2 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 2 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 2 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 2 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 2 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z0 N146 X74 608 Y 48 274 Z 026 N148 X74 503 Y 48 379 2 047 N150 X74 445 Y 48 437 Z 052 N1R2 X73 71 Y 49 17 7 191 Ready Fig 11 1 4 1 Pale joe Communi c 4 DNC transmission Click in the toolbar or pull down menu DNC Communic in menu Operation to send the data When the system I O channel is set to 0 PC sends the files directly in a common way then DNC COMMUNICATION dialog displays the states of file sending including the file name sent bytes sent lines as well as sent time and speed byte s as is shown in Fig 11 1 4 2 When the system I O channel is set to 1 PC sends the files by pack and the dialog displays the states such as sent pack and retransmission times as is shown in Fig 11 1 4 3 DAC Co
55. 2 Fags 1 5012 7 R 87 7 xA 4 KOOS 2 F R 1 5012 lt ROSG K 6 K S 2 Faas 1 0012 i xGG8 K 1 R 88 1 KOOS 2 Fae 1 6813 K B K 2 K 3 R B8 2 KOOS 2 Faas 1 G 13 r Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting Kooo K 1 K 3 f 9 0 e 9s e 9s e 9s 9 0 o k e 9s e S O O O O co ic O O fj as ray K 5 k r 0 0 oe 0 K 39 Z fj ko oo o o o o o o Ad 16 58 16 Baie 1 Fig 3 8 3 8 9o o9 e O O S JdS S SJQd S S JdQd S BIOS 9 O O S oS O Sa e e O 7 2 fj S olo olo olo olo olo olo Slo Fooo F001 F003 F004 F 5 F 6 F 07 F 8 F 09 F010 F011 ole o S ole ole ole e s ole ole 4 fj So O S S O S O S O S O S SS II Ols olo olo olo olo olo ofe Sele O O O Boong S 8S S S S Sa O 8S S Ss Ss Ss S Ss O O O O O O O O O CD Q O Ad 58 84 BRE 1 Fig 3 8 4 SAMPLING MODE TIME CYCLE SIGNAL TRANSITION RESOLUTION 8 8ms 1000ms TIME 81920 100 ms 8192 ms STOP CONDITION NONE BUFFER FULL TRIGGER TRIGGER ADDRESS unknown MODE RISING EDGE FALLING EDGE BOTH EDGE SAMPLING CONDITION TRIGGER ANY CHANGE TRIGGER ADDRESS unknown MODE RISIN
56. 2 in this manual for details An alarm is issued when G13 is converted to G12 in the forbidden area Whether the stroke check is performed is set by bit parameter NO 10 1 When bit parameter NO 10 1 0 the stroke check is not performed before movement when bit parameter NO 10 1 1 the stroke check is performed before movement 171 O D s Q O 5 SGT HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual II D s Q O 3 F72 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 3 1 Position Display 3 1 1 Four Types of Position Display POSITION Press key rs to enter position page which consists of REL ABS AII and PMONI I The four subpages can be viewed using corresponding soft keys which is shown below 1 Relative coordinate It displays the position of the current tool in the relative coordinate system by pressing soft key REL See Fig 3 1 1 1 PRG SPEED FEED OYRD 108 x e 2 a 0 40 88 120 160 200 Y 4 f e Bfm Z e 480 5 100 S G 7 88 90 199 110 120 eee COMMAND T NO T 000 OFFSET H 08 DAGAA G G17 G90 G94 G21 G4 G49 G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 O G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 613 CUT TIME 009 00 DATA Lo id D E p PATH OD E ew S Fig 3 1 1 1 2 Absolute coordinate It displays the current
57. 3 when the current operation is the rough center coordinate X rough center coordinate Y rough center coordinate Z it can be input according to the following formats O O D s Q O 5 directly press lt Input gt to input a null value X Y Z lt Input gt to input the selected axis current absolute coordinate value X Y Z data lt input gt to input the selected axis current absolute value data Directly press Measure to input the current axis absolute value X Y Z Measure to input the current axis absolute value X Y Z data measure to input the selected axis current absolute value data Operation steps Step 1 orderly set all halving parameters Q aOOHO Step 2 switch to Auto mode Step 3 press lt Start gt to start the automatic halving programs press lt Cycle start gt to test macro programs After the measure is completed the system automatically sets the center point s coordinates to the selected workpiece coordinate system 3 4 3 2 Toolsetting Function Introduction and Operation Explanation Page display and function introduction 208 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting TOOL MEASURE MEASUREMENT MODE TOOL NO T OFFSET L NO t OFFSET D NO OD TOOL DIA S L Z MACHINE xX 4 7183 m Y OOOO mm Z OAOA mm ABSOLUTE X 29 8483 mh Y 61 587 mh OOOO m WORK G54 X 34 5667 m Y 61 5870 m Z O mm 10 46 21 PATH 1
58. 3 8 270 Chapter 11 System Communication Send File Dialog File list File path File Name Par State C Documents and Setti 000889 txt user Sent C Documents and Setti 000890 txt user Sent Only send the edited file amp file Add File Cancel Fig 11 1 3 8 Note 1 Make sure the baudrate is correctly set and the serial line is reliably connected before data transmission Note 2 It is forbidden to switch operation modes or pages during data transmission or critical errors will occur Note 3 File LADCHI TXT is ineffective when transferred to the system unless the power is turned off 11 1 4 Serial Port On Line Machining Operation steps 3 1 Setting for CNC side Sj S SETTING 1 Press key to enter setting page and set 1 0 channel to 0 or 1 2 Select lt DNC gt mode then the system prompts DNC state ready press key INPUT after sent by PC 2 Setting for serial communication software 1 Click menu Series Port set the baudrate to 38400 in Serial Port Setting Dialog 2 When the system I O channel is set to 0 select Xon Xoff in the pull down menu DNC Protocol of Menu Operation When the system I O channel is set to 1 select XModem in the pull down menu DNC Protocol of Menu Operation 3 Open CNC program files Open the program files by pressing button Open in menu File or button k Uren in the toolbar as is shown in Fig 11
59. 4 2 3 Circular Helical Interpolation G02 G03 A Circular interpolation G02 G03 Prescriptions for G02 and G03 The plane circular interpolation means that the arc path is finished according to the specified rotation direction and radius or circle center from the start point to end point in the specified plane Since the arc path can not be determined only by the start point and the end point other conditions are required gt Arc rotation direction G02 G03 gt Circular interpolation plane G17 G18 G19 gt Circle center coordinate or radius which thus leads to two Command formats Circle center coordinate J K or radius R programming Only the three points above are all determined could the interpolation operation be done in coordinate system The circular interpolation can be done by the following Commands to make the tool move along an arc as is shown below Arc in XY plane I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo F F G02 R_ G17 XY G03 IJ rc in ZX plane G02 R_ G18 XZ de G03 IK rc in YZ plane G02 R_ G19 be F G03 JK Table 4 2 3 1 Arc specification on XY plane G17 G18 G19 1 Plane specification Arc specification on ZX plane Arc specification on YZ plane i G02 CW rotation Two axes of X Y and Z axes Two axes of X Y and Z axes G90 mode End point position G91 mode 4 Distance from start point LL axes of I J and to circle center axes End point coordina
60. 4 Cinch min Rotary axis 0 30000 deg min 0089 GO rapid traverse speed of the 2 axis 5000 Setting range Metric O 30000 mm min Inch O 30000 25 4 Cinch min Rotary axis 0 30000 deg min 0090 GO rapid traverse speed of the 3 axis 5000 Setting range Metric 0 30000 mm min Inch O0 30000 25 4 Cinch min Rotary axis 0 30000 deg min 0091 GO rapid traverse speed of the 4 axis 5000 Setting range Metric O 30000 mm min Inch O0 30000 25 4 Cinch min Rotary axis 0 30000 deg min 0092 GO rapid traverse speed of the 5 axis 5000 Setting range Metric O 30000 mm min Inch O0 30000 25 4 Cinch min Rotary axis 0 30000 deg min 0093 FO rapid override of axis for all axes gt O O D 5 Q x 302 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List setting range O0 1000 mm min 0094 Maximum control speed in rapid positioning for all 8000 axes setting range 300 30000 mm min 0095 Minimum control speed in rapid positioning for all axes setting range 0 300 mm min 0096 Maximum control speed in cutting feed for all axes 6000 Setting range 300 9999 mm min 0097 Minimum control speed in cutting feed for all axes setting range 0 300 mm min 0098 Feedrate of manual continuous feed for axes JOG 2000 setting range 0 9999 mm min 0099 Speed FL when gaining Z pulse signal reference 40 return for all axes Setting range 1 60 mm min 0100 The 1 axis ref
61. 40 60 80 100120140 160180 200 220240 260 280300 Fig 6 3 2 Relation between workpiece radius spindle speed and surface speed 148 Chapter 6 Spindle Function S Code 5 Surface speed specified in G96 mode G96 mode G97 mode Specify surface speed in mm min inch min Save the speed in mm min inch min Specified I Specify the The specified spindle spindle speed speed is used rpm Not specified mm a O Ca A Q 3 3 5 vo The surface speed mm min or inch min is converted to the spindle speed rpm Codes other than G96 G96 Specified The specified Specify the surface surface speed is speed used Not specified The saved surface speed mm min inch min is used If there is no saved surface speed the speed is assumed as 0 Fig 6 3 3 6 G96 s relevant parameter setting No 37 2 sets the reference coordinate used for counting G96 spindle speed when GO executes the rapid positioning 0 end point 1 current point No 3 7 3 sets the clamping of G96 spindle speed 0 before the spindle override 1 after the spindle override No 61 0 sets whether to use the constant surface speed control Restrictions 1 Because the response problem in the servo system may not be considered when the 149 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual spindle speed changes and the constant surface speed is also effective during threading it
62. 9999 9999 mm 0056 The 2 axis coordinate of the 3 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0057 The 3 axis coordinate of the 3 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0058 The 4 axis coordinate of the 3 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0059 The 5 axis coordinate of the 3 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0060 The 1 axis coordinate of the 4 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0061 The 2 axis coordinate of the 4 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0062 The 3 axis coordinate of the 4 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm gt O O D 5 Q x 0063 The 4 axis coordinate of the 4 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0064 The 5 axis coordinate of the 4 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0066 The 1 axis negative border coordinate of the stored 9999 stroke detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0067 The 1 axis pos
63. B Fig 4 4 2 B Return to initial level in canned cycle G98 G99 7 aS O Ca Q 3 3 5 vo After the tool reaches the bottom of a hole it may return to the point R level or the initial level These operations can be specified by G98 and G99 Generally G99 is used for the 1st drilling operation and G98 for the last drilling operation The initial level does not change even if the drilling is performed in G99 mode The following figure illustrates the operations of G98 and G99 G98 is the system default mode G98 return to initial level G99 return to point R level Initial level Table 4 4 3 The following symbols are used for the canned cycle illustration 56 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code gt Positioning rapid traverse GO Cutting feed linear interpolation G1 CR Ny Manual feed Offset rapid traverse GO Dwell Fig 4 4 4 Canned cycle comparison table G73 G89 Table 4 4 3 Driling Z hole bottom Retraction Z Application Intermittent feed SS Rapid traverse High speed deep hole drilling cycle Cutting feed Dwell spindle Rapid traverse Counter tapping cycle CCW stop sei Gare Rapawaverse ng spot aiing 68s_ interittent Teed Repidwaverse Deep noide ariing cyce G84 Cutting feed Stop gt spindle Cutting feed Taping CCW Cutting feed Stop gt spindle stop Manual gt spindle CW Restrictions Tool radius offset D is ignored
64. CLR BACKUP COMEBACK RETURN Fig 3 3 5 1 1 Il O O D s Q O 5 3 3 5 1 1 Servo Parameter Modification and Setting 1 Select lt MDI gt mode SETTING 2 Press to enter lt SET gt page set the parameter switch to 1 SYSTEM 3 Press ser then press KE BUS to enter the servo debugging page press E SERVO PARA to enter the parameter setting and display page 4 Move the cursor to the current selected axis parameter 0 input the password 315 0 42 can be seen and modified press the input key to download the driver parameters into the system and modify the servo parameters in SERVO PARA page 5 Move the cursor to the required parameter number s position to be modified 188 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting Method 1 press down the key Page Up Page Down to display the page wheter the required parameter to be set is or press the direction key to move the cursor and position the required parameter to be modified Method 2 press to position after inputting the parameter number 6 Press for confirmation and then the parameter value is downloaded into the driver and the status bar displays the driver s parameter is successfully downloaded SAVE 7 Press to make the servo save the refreshed parameters and the status bar displays the driver s parameter is successfully saved 8 After all parameters are set the parameter switche
65. Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code G74 G84 G98 d retraction distance High speed peck taping Initial level ae G74 G84 G99 d retraction distance High speed peck taping Point R level G74 G84 G98 d cutting start distance Standard peck taping Initial level G74 G84 G99 d cutting start distance Standard peck taping I 7 a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Fig 4 5 3 1 Table 4 5 3 1 Deep hole tapping cycle Parameter setting Used tapping mode Deep hole flexible tapping cycle Deep hole rigid tapping cycle NO 46 1 0 and NO K007 7 0 NO 46 1 1 and NO K007 7 1 NO 44 5 1 high speed deep hole tapping cycle NO 44 5 0 standard deep hole tapping cycle NO 44 5 1 high speed deep hold tapping cycle NO 44 5 0 standard deep hole tapping cycle There are two types of peck rigid tapping cycles high speed peck tapping cycle and standard peck tapping cycle both of which are set by bit parameter NO 46 1 Deep hole flexible tapping cycle When NO 46 1 0 and NO K007 7 0 it is a deep hole flexble tapping cycle which is divided into high speed deep hole tapping cycle and standard deep hole tapping cycle set by NO 44 5 High speed deep hole tapping cycle 83 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual When NO 44 5 1 itis a high speed deep hole tapping cycl
66. Code for specifying the intermediate point absolute incremental 2 The setting and restrictions of code G30 are the same as those of code G28 See data parameter P50 63 for the 2nd 3rd 4th reference point setting 3 The G30 code can also be used together with G29 code return from the reference point of which the setting and restrictions are identical with those of G28 code 4 3 3 Automatic return from reference point G29 Format G29 X_Y_Z_ Function G29 performs the operation of returning to the specified point via the intermediate point specified by G28 or G29 from the reference point or the current point Explanation 51 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo I 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 1 The action of block G29 can be divided as follows refer to Fig 4 3 1 1 1 Positioning to the intermediate point point R point B specified by G28 or G30 from the reference point at a traverse speed 2 Positioning to a specified point from the intermediate point point B point C at a traverse speed 2 G29 is a non modal code which is only effective in the current block In general the code return from Reference Point should be specified immediately after code G28 or G29 3 The optional parameters X Y and Z in G29 code are used for specifying the target point i e point C in Fig 4 3 1 1 of the return f
67. GOO X0 YO M5 N020 G49 Z250 T31 M6 N021 G43 Z0 H31 N022 S100 M3 N023 G85 G99 X800 Y 350 Z 153 R47 F50 N024 G91 Y 200 Positioning then hole 1 drilling Positioning then hole 2 drilling and point R level return Positioning then hole 3 drilling and initial level return Positioning then hole 4 drilling and point R level return Positioning then hole 5 drilling and point R level return Positioning then hole 6 drilling and initial level return Reference point return then spindle stop Tool length compensation cancel then tool change Initial level tool length compensation Spindle start Positioning then hole 7 drilling and point R level return Positioning then hole 8 drilling and initial level return Positioning then hole 9 drilling and point R level return Positioning then hole 10 drilling and initial level return Reference point return spindle stop Tool length compensation cancel tool change Initial level tool length compensation Spindle start Positioning then hole 11 drilling and point R level return Positioning then holes 12 and 13 drilling and Y 200 point R level return N025 GOO G90 X0 YO M5 Reference point return spindle stop NO026 G49 ZO Tool length compensation cancel N027 M30 Program sto I 7 O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo 4 5 Rigid Tapping G Code 4 5 1 Left Hand Tapping Cycle G74 Format G74 X_Y_ZR_P_F_K Functi
68. O G G17 G9 G94 Gel G40 G49 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 i 72 om mm 47 897 mm mm 5 488 mm mm G92 X YO Z N1082 G G90 X74 295 Y S N1 6 Z308 M3 51500 M8 N1 8 28538 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 DATA rl S 07 05 PATH 1 Fig 3 1 1 4 174 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting Note 1 Whether the modes are displayed in PMONI page can be set by parameter NO 23 6 When BIT6 0 the machine coordinates are displayed in the position where the modal instructions are displayed Note 2 In lt MACHINE ZERO gt lt STEP gt lt MANUAL gt and lt MPG gt modes the intermediate coordinate system is a relative one while in lt AUTO gt lt MDI gt and lt DNC gt modes it is the distance to go 3 1 2 Display of Cut Time Part Count Programming Speed Override and Actual Speed The programming speed actual speed feedrate and rapid override G codes tool offset part number cut time spindle override spindle speed tools etc can be displayed on the subpages REL and ABS of page lt POSITION gt see Fig 3 1 2 1 FEED F mm min PRG SPEED FEED OYRD 100 amp mm 44 86 128 168 cha a Fa 25 50 100 a rpm SENE Y 4 f e BY Lim 500000 M 100 S 66 78 88 98 100 118 120 SS Z s ABU m Tool T COMMAND T NO TOO OFFSET H 08 DAOA G G17 G9
69. O D SYMBOL MEANING D Fagan SPL FEED HOLD oO F R ZS STL Cycle start F R ZE SA Servo ready Faaa OP Auto run F g1 0 AL Alarm F g1 1 RST Reset FaGl 3 SAR Spindle rev arrive Fabled ENB Spindle enable FaG1 5 TAP Tapping FaG1 6 DTAP Tapping exe Fool MTAP GES Tapping mode F g2 a THRD Threading Faber4 SRNMY Program start Foa2 6 CUT Cutt ing een als PATH 1 E Fig 3 9 8 229 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual SYMBOL MEANING Gaae e FIN MST End signal Gbbo 1 MFIN Miscellaneous function completion signal Gaaa 4 SFIN Spindle function completion signal GABB 5 TFIN Tool function completion signal GEG1 8 ESP Emergency stop Gaa1 1 SKIPP Skip Gaa24a GR1 Gear input Gag2 1 GR2 Gear input Gage 2 GR Gear input Gane 4 GEAR Gear in position input GAB3 1 RGTAP Rigid tapping GHH9 1 UINT Macroprogram interruption 661640 MT1 Mirror image 5010 1 MT2 Mirror image a 1 108 Fig 3 9 9 SYMBOL MEANING x 20 0 MT EDIT xo20 1 MT AUTO xo20 2 MT INPUT xo20 3 MT ZERO X 2 ZA MT SINGLE STEP x 2045 MT MANUAL X 2 ZE MT HANDWHEEL x 2047 MT DNC x 21 0 MT SKIP X 21 1 MT SINGLE BLOCK x021 2 MT DRY RUN x 21 3 MT MST LOCK X 21 4 MT MACHINE LOCK X 21 5 MT OPTIONAL HALT P 1 6 Il O CD Q O Fig 3 9 10 SYMBOL MEANING
70. OPRT ALARM PARA gt Fig 3 9 5 The formats functions explanations and restrictions of instructions are introduced in this page You can find the corresponding information here if you are unfamiliar with these instructions 5 Parameter page In lt HELP gt page press soft key PARA to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 10 5 NO MEANING cm parameters related to SETTING bit par G num par 000 0004 B61 parameters related to axis control bit par 603 6008 num par 5 B A parameters related to coordinate system bit par 9 J num par 0010 0065 O 3Z parameters related to travel detection bit par 0011 num par 66 85 eD 4 parameters related to feedrate bit par 012 0014 num par 86 104 Q S parameters related to acc dec control bit par 9915 17 num par 1 5 157 5 B parameters related to servo bit par 0018 num par 168 8186 a HO parameters related to backlash bit par 0018 num par 0190 0200 AAS parameters related to DI DO bit par 9919 2 num par 0200 0206 J parameters related to MDI display and edit bit par 821 029 num par 0210 0214 J parameters related to pitch error comp bit par 0037 num par 216 235 0011 parameters related to spindle control bit par 038 num par 24 268 H1e parameters related to tool compensation
71. Operations 4 3 1 Cooling control Y er A compound key used to switch between coolant ON and OFF ON the indicator lights up OFF the indicator goes out Il O D mp Q O 5 4 3 2 Lubricating control LUBRICATING ON the indicator lights up OFF the indicator goess out 4 3 3 Chip Removal Control 2 CH REMOVAL A compound key used to switch between chip removal ON and OFF ON the indicator lights up OFF the indicator goes out 4 3 4 Working Light Control R a A compound key used to switch between working light ON OFF ON the indicator lights up OFF the indicator goes out 238 Chapter 5 Step Operation Chapter 5 Step Operation 5 1 Step Feed igk Press key STER to enter the STEP mode In this mode the machine moves by the step defined by the system each time 5 1 1 Selection of Moving Amount W R OVERRIDE 100 TXI Nu Press any of keys mme to select a moving increment then the increment will be shown on the screen which is shown in Fig 5 1 1 1 the step width is displayed 0 100 in lt POSITION gt page FEED F mm min STEP W 100 FEED OYRD 100 mm 40 88 120 160 200 Fa 25 50 100 _ SP Orpm Y O o Om Js ccc a 100 S 66 78 88 90 100118 120 Sa Z O OOl jem COMMAND T NO T G OFFSET H 808 DAOA G G17 G9 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 8000 0000 G11 G98 G15 G5S G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 00O 00 00 DATA te ba
72. PATH 1 sw em e Ewe Fig 3 6 1 4 1 201 202 203 D 4 005 B G 207 208 009 DATA 3 6 1 5 Wave Parameter Display Press WAVE soft key to enter the wave page See Fig 3 6 1 5 1 220 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting AXIS ALL 1 1st 2 2nd 3 3rd 4 4th 5 Sth WAVE TYPE 0 Speed 1 Acc 2 Acc Acc HOR SCALE VER SCALE E a HISIGNAL SYSTEM BUS DSP WAVE Fig 3 6 1 5 AXIS select the axis for WAVE diagnosis WAVE select the waveform type HOR SCALE select the graph ratio INPUT Data In any mode input corresponding data and press key m Using key lt START gt to monitor signals key lt STOP gt to stop monitoring signals 3 6 2 Signal State Viewing DIAGNOSIS 1 Press key to select the DIAGNOSE page 2 The respective address explanation and meaning are shown at the lower left corner of the screen when the cursor is moved left or right 3 Move the cursor to the target parameter address or key in the parameter address then press key to search 4 In WAVE page the feedrate acceleration and jerk of each axis can be displayed It is easy to debug the system and find the optimum suited parameters for the drive and the motor 3 Alarm Display When an alarm is issued ALARM is displayed at the lower left corner of the LCD Press key 221 Il O D FR Q ang O 5 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Mi
73. R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R level F_ Cutting feedrate K Number of repeats if necessary G81 G98 G81 G99 p I 7 a O Ca Q 3 3 5 vo Point R level Point R x b Fig 4 4 2 1 Z R If either of hole bottom parameter Z and R is missing when the first drilling is executed the system only changes the mode with no Z axis action executed After positioning along X axis and Y axis rapid traverse is performed to point R Drilling from point R to point Z is performed the tool is then retracted in the rapid traverse Miscellaneous function M codes are used to rotate the spindle before G81 is specified When G81 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first hole positioning the system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only performed for the first hole For the other holes it is not performed Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block
74. SEE KEE Fig 4 2 3 2 J K are assigned with a sign according to the direction of the circle center relative to the start point The circle center can also be specified by radius R besides J and K G02X Y R G03X Y R 1 Two arcs can be drawn as follows one arc is more than 180 and the other one is less than 180 For the arc more than 180 its radius is specified by a negative value Example Fig 4 2 3 3 When arc is less than 180 G91 G02 X60 Y20 R50 F300 When arc is more than 180 G91 G02 X60 Y20 R 50 F300 26 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Fig 4 2 3 3 2 The arc equal to 180 can be programmed either by I JandK or by R Example G90 GO X0 Y0 G2 X20 110 F100 Equal to G90 GO X0 Y0 G2 X20 R10 F100 Or G90 GO X0 Y0 G2 X20 R 10 F100 Note For the arc of 180 the arc path is not affected whether the value of R is positive or negative 3 For the arc equal to 360 only J and K can be used for programming Program example Y HOO Een a End point _ R50 60 eee ee Start point R60 a eR a a oe 90 120 140 200 X Fig 4 2 3 4 The tool path programming for Fig 4 2 3 4 is as follows 1 Absolute programming G90 GO X200 Y40 ZO G3 X140 Y100 R60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 R50 Or GO X200 Y40 Z0 G90 G3 X140 Y100 I 60 F300 G2 X120 Y60 I 50 2 Incremental programming GO G90 X200 Y40 Z0 I 7 a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo
75. SEQ INC a 1000 SEQ STOP PROGRAM NO SEQ STOP SEQUENCE NO DATE 2011 y a7 m __12 p TIME 12 H o6 m a6 s DATA Vd 12 06 88 PATH 1 ee Sa SETTING EWORK DATA PASSWORD Fig 10 1 1 1 1 In this way the sequence number will be automatically inserted into the blocks during program editing The incremental amount of the sequence number is set by its corresponding parameter em 10 1 1 2 Program Content Input aS OD g D e EDIT 1 Press key to enter Edit mode PROGRAM 1 2 Press key to enter program page See Fig 10 1 1 2 1 G92 XO YO ZO NI 2 G G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 51500 M8 N1 8 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 N136 X75 N138 X75 N14 X75 N142 X75 N144 X75 N146 X74 472 Y 47 425 Y 47 354 Y 47 876 Z 831 776 Z 028 719 Z 823 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 Y 47 882 Z 608 Y 48 274 Z 26 PATH 1 DATA Po o ooo 88 48 38 C _ Fig 10 1 1 2 1 4 Press key 5 and Chapter 10 Eidt Operation and key in numerical keys o o El J J J in sequence an example for setting up a program name of 000002 here then 000002 is displayed behind the DATA column See Fig 10 1 1 2 2 G92 XB YO ZO N102 G G90 X74 295 Y 50 N1086 230 M3 51500 M8
76. Selection of Moving Axis ANd Direction cccccccceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesaeaeeseesaees 239 5 1532 Step Feed Ep IA ASO saa as a ia ssl sees Sede N Gen Rio 240 OZ SOLED IRC HUD IO rar etc cs eran attain a pase E T E A 240 5 3 Auxiliary Control in Step MOd eu cc eecccccccccccssssssceeeccccesssssceescccecssssseeescccesesssteeesecessssaees 240 CHAPTER 6 IMPG OPERATION wissersesdetesecucceestescicnctecanscielstevsteuctesiuidis seedede seere 241 oe MPO ECE For TT TO TEE EEG FN SNEDE SEE er DE FEBER Aa NO E 241 GALT MOVING AIMOUNL SelGCON s aars rss opal ceeds seins pews cette a cen clit ed aE BRUS DE 241 6 1 2 Selection of Moving Axis ANd Direction ccecccccseecceseeeeeeseeeeecaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeessaeeeeseaeeeeseeeesaeaeeeeesaees 241 6 23 MPG Peed Explanations crt 2 gece oth tek te oA tte A See toh aig a a 242 6 2 COnIFOI IA MPG IKEK ON sol satsen bleen dealeren a ee hance antes 242 6 2 1 MPG Interruption Operation cccceccccecccceececeececseeeeceececeeeecsacesseeeeseueessaeeseeeeeseeceseasessaceeesseeesaeeeees 242 6 2 2 Relationship between MPG linterruption and Other FUNCTIONS ccccceecceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenees 243 03 Auxiliary Control If MPG Mode iiss mogensen T AE AE ENN 243 6 4 Electronic MPG Drive FUNCTION 00 ccc ccccsccesssseceesseceeesssseecesssaeeeeseeseeceseaseeeessaeesesesaeeeseaes 244 CHAPTER 7 AUTO OPERATION sccsieins Aieciseecstodcars cizdt
77. Table 4 1 2 gt For example 000001 X100 Y100 Rpaidly position to X100 Y100 GO is the system s initial state G1 X0 YO F100 Execute linear interpolation to XO YO feedrate per minute 100mm min The non modal is defined that a corresponding address value is valid in a block in which the command is and it must be specified again in the next block G commands in group 00 are shown in Table 4 1 2 Its modal and non modal description of functional word is referred to Table 2 5 1 I Table 2 5 1 functional command s modal and non modal G functions in the group can mutually cancel Once each function is Modal G function executed it is valid till it is cancelled by other G function in the the Modal group i M functions in the group are mutually replaced Each functions is valid Modal M function i ea before it are replaced by other function in the group 7 a O Ca Sd Q 3 3 5 vo It is valid only in the specified block and it is replaced when the block Non modal G function Non modal ends Non modal M function It is valid only in the block in which it is 11 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 7 a O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo 12 Chapter 3 Structure of an Part Program Chapter 3 Structure of an Part Program 3 1 Structure of a Program A program consists of many blocks and a block is composed of words Each block is separated
78. The page is used to machine debugging and real time monitoring the current run state which is shown in Fig 3 1 4 179 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 2014 6997 4029 52362 Y 416 Y 82602 0 0000 4048 44299 Y Y PATH 1 MDI pe REE Fig 3 1 4 3 2 Program Display PROGRAM Press key rc to enter program display page which consists of 5 subpages HIPRG MDI CCUR MOD CUR NXT and DIR They can be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 2 1 Il 1 Program display Press soft key HIPRG to enter program page In this page a page of blocks being executed in the memory can be displayed See Fig 3 2 1 O CD Q O G92 X0 YO ZO N1 2 G G90 X74 295 Y 50 N106 Z30 M3 51500 M8 NI 8 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 11 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 M3 9 08 6 DATA ooo PATH 1 ER arco ono om Fig 3 2 1 By pressing soft key HIPRG again the program EDIT and modification page is entered see Fig 3 2 2 178 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting G92 X0 Y
79. Y S N106 Z30 M3 51500 M8 N108 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 017 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 X74 608 Y 48 274 Z 26 DATA f 17 24 47 D Ee y E PATH 1 BG EDT BG END CHECK SAYE RETURN gt Fig 7 11 1 Press soft key BG EDT to enter the program background edit page The program editing operation is the same as that in Edit mode Refer to Chapter 10 PROGRAM EDIT in this manual Press soft key BG END to save the edited program and exit this page Note 1 It is suggested that the file size in background edit be not more than 3000 lines otherwise the processing effect will be affected Note 2 The foreground program at the background edit can be opened but cannot be edited or cleared Note 3 The background edit cannot edit the foreground program which is running 249 O D FR Q mp O 5 SGT HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual II D s Q O 3 250 Chapter 8 MDI Operation Chapter 8 MDI Operation Besides the input and modification for parameters and offsets the MDI operation function is also provided in MDI mode The instructions can be input directly using this f
80. Z N1 2 G G90 X74 295 Y S N106 Z30 M3 51500 M8 N1 8 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 33 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 31 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 28 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 23 N14 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 917 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 09 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 M3 DATA 09 08 19 PATH 1 Fig 3 2 2 Press key gt Ito enter the next page O 4 REPLACE OUT COY PASTE RETURN gt Press key gt to enter the next page eN Press key 4 to return to the previous page Note The CHECK function can only be performed in Auto mode BG EDIT and BG END are used only in AUTO and DNC mode background edit function Functions of BGEDIT are the same as the program edited in lt EDIT gt mode See CHAPTER 10 Program Edit Save the editing by BG END or exit the background EDIT page by RETURN after editing 2 MDI display Press soft key MDI to enter MDI page In this mode multiple blocks can be edited and executed The program format is the same as that of the editing program MDI mode is applicable to simple program testing operation see Fig 3 2 3 G G17 G9 G94 Gel G40 G49 G11 G98 G15 G50 G69 G64 G97 G13 G54 1 727 om 1 727 mm 47 897 mm 47 897 mm 5 488 mm 5 488 mm 080020 DATA ds 289 8 g Fig 3 2 3 1
81. absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P_ Dwell time at the bottom of the hole F_ Cutting feedrate F2 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code G88 G98 G88 G99 H H Spindle CW La TA Q fi Initial level o Spindle CW Point Point R Point R level Spindle stop Point Z Point Z Spindle sto Fig 4 4 10 1 After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R Boring is performed from point R to point Z When boring is completed a dwell is performed then the spindle is stopped The tool is manually retracted from point Z at the hole bottom to point R in G99 or the initial level in G98 and the spindle is rotated CCW Before specifying G88 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G88 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1 hole Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement blo
82. also available in this system The part D Q programs saved in CNC are not affected during the data backup and restoration See Fig 3 4 4 1 a CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM 3 FILE DIR LADDER PLC ladder d arp 159118 11 07 12 10 44 LADDER A GRP 155718 11 07 11 15 26 PARA PLC ladder 1 bak 153118 11 07 11 15 32 O PARAMETER O CUTTER COMP OPITCH COMP OMACRO YAR O MACRO PRG OPART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA l 59 6 PATH 1 SETTING HWORK ES PASSWORD Fig 3 4 4 1 Operation 1 Set the password for a corresponding level in password page pressing soft key PASSWORD The corresponding password levels of the data are shown as follows 2 Press soft key MDATA twice to enter the DATA DEAL page as is shown in Fig 3 4 4 2 211 Il uoneJadO Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM FILE DIR LADDER PLC ladder d arp 153118 11 07 11 15 29 LADDER GRP 155718 11 07 11 15 26 PARA PLC ladder 1 bak 153118 11 07 11 15 32 PARAMETER O CUTTER COMP OPITCH COMP OMACRO VAR OMACRO PRG OPART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 17 00 49 PATH 1 BACKUP RESTORE OUTPUT INPUT RETURN gt Fig 3 4 4 2 OTB Ghost Onekey Output Onekey Input Return Press P to enter the next page a eae The functions of the operati
83. assigned by an expression 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Table 4 9 5 1 Arithmetic and logic operation Definition HHT Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Sine Hi SIN i rcsine Hi ASIN J Cosine i COS Hj Arc cosine Hi ACOS I Tangent i TAN Arc tangent Hi ATAN I k Square root i SQRT Fj Absolute value Hi ABS Rounding off Hi ROUND Rounding up to an Hi FUP integer Rounding down to Hi FIX j j an integer Natural logarithm Hi LN j Exponential Hi EXP function OR i j OR k Logic operation is Exclusive OR Hi fj XOR k executed by the binary AND Hi j AND k system BCD to BIN Hi BIN Used for switching with Bin to BCD Hi BCD i PMC signal The angle is specified by degree 90 30 indicates an angle of 90 5 136 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Explanation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Angle unit The angle unit of functions SIN COS ASIN ACOS TAN and ATAN is degree e g 90730 indicates an angle of 90 5 ARCSIN i ASIN Ranging from 90 to 90 When j is beyond the range from 1 to 1 an alarm occurs The constant can replace the variable fj ARCCOS i ACOS Ranging from 180 to 0 I When j is beyond the range from 1 to 1 an alarm occurs Variable j can be replaced by constants ARCTAN i ATAN j k Specify the lengt
84. behind G16 is not specified the system takes the current tool position as the default positioning parameter of the hole cycle At present the first canned cycle code behind the polar coordinate must be complete or the tool movement is incorrect The positioning words of the positioning parameters of the tool movement codes behind G16 except for the hole cycle are relevant to the actual plane selection mode After the polar coordinate is cancelled with G15 if there is a movement code following it the default current tool position is the start point of this movement code 4 2 14 Scaling in a plane G51 G50 I Format G51 X_Y_Z_P_ X Y Z absolute code for the scaling center coordinates P each axis is scaled up or down at the same rate of magnification jai Scaled machining blocks G50 Scaling cancelled Or G51 X_ YZ I J K Each axis is scaled up and down at different rates lI J K of magnification ee Scaled machining blocks G50 Scaling cancelled Function G51 scales up and down the programmed figure in the same or different rate taking a specified position as its center It is suggested that the G51 be specified in a separate block or unexpected results may occur resulting in workpiece damage and personal injury and cancelled with G50 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Y Po Scaling center Fig 4 2 14 1 Scaling up and down P1P2P3P4 P1 P2 P3 P4_ Explanation 1 Scaling center G51 can be specifi
85. code is 46 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code interrupted and the next block is executed When the machining end point is not programmed but it is specified using a signal from the machine use the skip function For example use it for grinding The function is used for measuring the dimension of a workpiece as well Explanation 1 G31 is a non modal G code only effective in the block in which it is specified 2 When tool radius compensation is being executed if G31 is specified an alarm will occur Therefore the tool radius compensation should be cancelled before G31 Example The block after G31 is a single axis movement specified by incremental values as Fig 4 2 16 1 shows I Skip signal is input here 7 O ta S 3 3 5 vo Actual motion Motion without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 1 The next block is the single axis movement specified by incremental values The next block after G31 is a single axis movement specified by absolute values as shown in fig 4 2 16 2 G31 G90 X200 F100 Y100 Skip signal is input here f vb X200 Actual motion Motion without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 2 The next block is a single axis movement specified by absolute values The next block after G31 is two axis movement specified by absolute values as shown in fig 4 2 16 3 47 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and O
86. compensation mode The circular interpolation G02 G03 is not permitted 102 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code C Switching between tool radius compensation left and tool radius compensation right In general the offset direction is changed from the left to the right or vice versus via offset cancel mode but the direction in positioning GOO or linear interpolation G01 can be changed directly regardless of the offset cancel mode and the tool path is as follows Tool center path X Y Programmed path usually not a straight line New actor Start point i New yecto od old X Y yecto Programmed path yecto Tool center path Start point Fig 4 7 2 6 G1G41D_ X Y G42D X Y G1G42D_ X Y G41D X Y A D Change of offset value In general the tool offset value is changed in the offset cancel mode when the tool is changed but for positioning G00 and linear interpolation the value can also be changed in the offset mode It is shown below 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Tool center path Tool center path Programmed path gt Programmed path Start point Start point Fig 4 7 2 7 Change of offset value E Positive and negative offset value and the tool center path If the offset value is negative the workpiece is machined in the same way as G41 and G42 are replaced with each other in the program Therefore the outer cutting for workpiece turns into inner cutting and th
87. coordinate system please see sections 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 The feedrate specified by F keeps effective till a new F value is specified The feedrate specified by F code is calculated by an interpolation along a straight line If F code is not specified in a program the default F value at system Power On is used see data parameter P87 for details Program example Fig 4 2 2 1 mm aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo G01 X200 Y100 F200 Note feedrate of each axis is as follows G01 Xa YB ZyFf In this program End point Start point Feedrate of X axis Feedrate of Y axis Feedrate of Z axis P a 3 Fig 4 2 2 1 Note 1 All code parameters are positioning parameters except for F code The upper limit of feedrate F is set by data parameter P96 If the actual cutting feedrate after using feedrate override exceeds the upper limit it is clamped to the upper limit unit mm min The lower limit of the feedrate F is set by data parameter P97 If the actual cutting feedrate after using feedrate override exceeds the lower limit it is clamped to the lower limit unit mm min 2 The tool does not move when no positioning parameter is specified behind G01 and the 24 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code system only changes the mode of the current tool movement mode for G01 By altering the system bit parameter NO 31 0 the system default mode at power on can be set to G00 value is 0 or G01 value is 1
88. coordinate system origins 34 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code X Workpiece zero offset Machine zero Fig 4 2 8 2 I Example N10 G55 G90 GOO X100 Y20 N20 G56 X80 5 225 5 In the above example when block N10 is executed the tool traverses rapidly to the position in workpiece coordinate system G55 X 100 Y 20 When block N20 is executed the tool traverses rapidly to the position in workpiece coordinate system G56 and the absolute coordinates shifts to the coordinates X 80 5 Z 25 5 in workpiece coordinate system G55 automatically 7 O ta S 3 3 5 vo 4 2 9 Additional workpiece coordinate system Another 50 additional workpiece coordinate systems can be used besides the 6 workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 Format G54 Pn Pn A code to specify the additional coordinate system with a range of 1 50 The setting and restrictions of the additional workpiece coordinate system are the same as those of workpiece coordinate systems G54 G59 G10 can be used to set the offset value of the workpiece zero in the additional workpiece system as shown below Command G10L20Pn XYZ n 1 to 50 Code of additional workpiece coordinate system X Y Z For setting axis address and offset value for workpiece zero offset For absolute code G90 the specified value is the new offset value For incremental code G91 the specified value is added to the current offset value to produce a new offset value B
89. directory page See Fig 10 2 1 1 Program i information Storage capacity Program dictory 001201 10B 11 07 07 16 04 Q 002014 11 07 07 09 15 D Q 000500 T o54690agoaypxoz tsr TT Program preview GO2X3 F1GF1000 5 yf681x30Y10Z 12F5 s A DATA E 8 52 32 mam 1 REN PRG MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT or Fig 10 2 1 1 1 Open a program Open a specified program O sequence number key ENTER or key EOB or sequence number key ENTER or key EOB In Edit mode if the sequence number input does not exist a new program will be created 2 Deletion of a program 1 In Edit mode press key DEL to delete the program where cursor is located 2 In Edit mode press O sequence number DEL or sequence number DEL 10 2 2 Number of Stored Programs Not more than 400 programs can be stored in this system The number of the stored programs can be viewed in the program directory page program information in Fig 10 2 1 265 II D s Q O 3 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 10 2 3 Storage Capacity The storage capacity can be viewed in the program directory page storage capacity in Fig 10 2 1 10 2 4 Viewing of Program List One program directory page can display 6 CNC program names at most If there are more than 6 names it is unavailable to display them all in one page Here you can press the P
90. follows M98 PLLLIII LLLLITI BE ais ole Number of called times Subprogram number Fig 5 2 4 1 5 2 5 Program End and Return M99 1 In auto mode if M99 is executed at the end of the main program the control returns to the program beginning to continue automatic operation Meanwhile the following blocks are not to be executed and the number of the machined workpieces is not accumulated 2 If M99 is executed at the end of a subprogram the control returns to the main program and proceeds to the next block following the subprogram block 145 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 3 In DNC mode M99 is processes as M30 thus the cursor keeps staying at the end of the program I 7 a O ta s S 3 3 5 vo 146 Chapter 6 Spindle Function S Code Chapter 6 Spindle Function S Code By using an S code and the numerical values behind it the code signal can be converted to the analog signal and then sent to the machine for controlling the machine spindle S is a modal value 6 1 Spindle Analog Control When the bit parameter NO 1 2 SPT 0 the spindle speed is controlled by the analog voltage which is specified by address S and the numerical values behind See OPERATION in the manual for details Command format S_ Explanation 1 Only one S code can be specified in a block 2 The spindle speed is specified di
91. gt is directly pressed to input a null value rough center coordinate Cy Y absolute coordinate value of the workpiece s rough center When the current point is set to the rough center lt Input gt is directly pressed to input a null value measured point coordinate Z Z absolute position during measure When the current point is set to the rough center lt Input gt is directly pressed to input a null value profile dimension tolerance H The tested profile dimension tolerance value 10 radial clearance R When the external profile is measured before Z moves it is the distance between the probe and the targets surface After power on the system defaults to be 8mm 0 3149inch 11 measuring head s overtravel distance Q 205 O D s Q O 5 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual It is the measuring head s overtravel distance A value is input during programming the measuring head takes the value as a distance exceeding the target dimension to find out the surface When it is not programmed its defaulted value is 10 0 mm 0 394 inch B Hole amp outer circle parameter MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE a COORDINATE SEL 5 2 8247 mm mm TOOL OFFSET NO T 2 ER EMP Val OFT Ef CENTER COOR HH O CENTER COOR vw OPERATER STEP AUTO MODE lt AOA TER 1 INPUT WORKPIECE PAREMETER MEAS PONT COOR Z
92. is adpted to the CNC milling machine CNC drilling milling machine and CNC grinding machine I Gr miexde 7 a O Ca 3 S 3 3 5 vo Wi pf EYI k E ea fi ct O ow e Max position speed max traverse speed 60m min Metric inch programming least command increment 0 001mm 0 0001inch e Rotation zooming polar cycle rigid tapping and various of milling grooving compound cycle function Time limit stop function Brand new designed human machine interface with friend characteristics of beauty and easily use PLC on line monitor edit compiling and signals trace function Statemnt macro program macro B to get concise programming Easily study use and debugging abundant helps prompt messages Standard RS232 and USB interfaces to realize file transmission serial port DNC machining and USB on line machining e 8 4 inch color LCD with Chinese English Russian Spainish and Turkish display Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 1 2 Technical Specifications Controlled axes and link axes 4 axes and 3 link and optional to 4 axes and 4 link Each axis can be set to the linear or rotary Interpolation positioning G00 linear G01 circular G02 G03 spirial interpolation Maximum programmable dimensions metric 99999 999mm 99999 999mm least command increment 0 001mm inch 9999 9999inch 9999 9999inch least command increment 0 0001inch Electronic gear comma
93. is stopped and a dwell is performed The spindle is then rotated in the reverse direction the tool is retracted to point R level then the spindle is stopped Rapid traverse is then performed to initial level When the tapping is being performed the feedrate override and the spindle override are assumed to be 100 Rigid mode in position mode NO 46 1 is set to 1 K parameter NO 7 7 to 1 before the tapping code specifying M29 S can specify the rigid mode Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level when the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Thread lead in feed per minute relationship between the thread lead and feedrate spindle spindle Feedrate speed F screw taper pitchxspindle speed S Example machining the thread hole M12x1 5 on a workpiece can select the parameters S500 500 r min F 1 5x500 750mm min 78 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code When a multi head thread is machined it multiplies the number of head to get the F value In feed per rev the thread lead is equal to the feedate Example Feed per minute mode Feed per rev mode Spindle speed 1000r min Spindle speed 1000r min Thread lead 1 0mm Thread
94. its unit A positive value of R indicates the counterclock rotation When there is no rotation angle code in the coordinate rotation the rotation angle to be used is set by data parameter P329 3 In G91 mode the system takes the current tool position as the rotation center the rotation angle by increment is set by bit parameter NO 47 0 rotation angle of coordinate system 0 by absolute code 1 by G90 91 code 4 When programming please note that no plane selection is allowed when the system is in rotation mode otherwise an alarm occurs 5 In coordinate system rotation mode G codes for reference point return G27 G30 etc and coordinate system specification G52 G59 G92 etc cannot be specified They should be specified after the scaling is cancelled if needed 6 After coordinate system rotation perform operations such as the tool radius compensation tool length compensation tool offset and other compensation 7 If the coordinate system rotation is performed in scaling mode G51 the rotation center coordinate values will be scaled rather than the rotation angle When a movement code is given the scaling will be executed first then the coordinate system rotation Example 1 Rotation G92 X 50 Y 50 G69 G17 G68 X 50Y 50 R60 44 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code G90 G01 X0 YO F200 G91 X100 G02 Y100 R100 G3 X 100 l 50 J 50 G01 Y 100 G69 M30 Tool path after rotation Previous progra
95. magnifications of the axes are different and the circular interpolation is programmed with I J and K an alarm is given if the arc does not exist 7 Scaling has no effect on the tool offset value see Fig 4 2 14 3 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Programmed figure Scaled figure Tool radius compensation value is not scaled Fig 4 2 14 3 Scaling for tool radius compensation Example of a mirror image program Main program 42 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code G00 G90 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 l 1 J1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 l 1 J 1 M98 P9000 G51 X50 0 Y50 0 11 J 1 M98 P9000 G50 M30 Subprogram 09000 G00 G90 X60 0 Y60 0 I G01 X100 0 F100 Y G01 Y100 amp G01 X60 0 Y60 0 3 M99 3 Q 100 40 50 60 0 40 50 60 100 Fig 4 2 14 4 Restrictions 1 When the canned cycle is executed in scaling mode the system only scales up or down the hole positioning data rather than point R value Q point Z at hole bottom and dwell time P at hole bottom 2 In MANUAL mode the traverse distance cannot be increased or decreased by scaling Note 1 The position displays the coordinate values after scaling Note 2 The results are as follows when a mirror image is applied to one axis of a specified plane 1 Circular code 4 Direction of rotation is reversed 2 Tool radius compensation C Direction of offset is reversed 3 Coordinat
96. microsecond PLW5 1 The 1 axis pulse width is changeable along with speed 0 The 1 axis pulse width is fixed to 1 microsecond Standard setting 0000 0000 system parameter number 01519 LEDT LOPT LOPT 1 Use external operator panel lock 0 Not use external operator panel lock LEDT 1 Use external editing lock 0 Not use external editing lock Standard setting 0000 OOOO System parameter number 0 6 0 PMCA PMCP SCL PMCS EPW EPW 1 Max quantity of position switch is 16 0 Max quantity of position switch is 10 PMCS 1 PMC axis designation is specified by G signal 0 PMC axis designation is not specified by G signal SCL 1 Use scaling 0 Not use scaling PMCP 1 PMC zero return mode selection one roation signal 0 PMC zero return mode selection non one roation signal 1 An alarm occurs when PMC axis does not return to the reference point commading the machine coordinate system 0 An alarm does not occur when PMC axis does not return to the reference point commading the machine coordinate system Standard setting 0010 0000 PMCA gt O D 5 Q x System parameter number 0 6 1 FALM LALM EALM SALM AALM SSC SSC 1 To use constant surface speed control 0 Not use constant surface speed control AALM 1 External user alarm ignored 0 External user alarm not ignored SALM 1 Spindle driver
97. next page O4 ue ory E REN Press PJ to enter the next page mr Press lt 4 to return to the last page OA re OT Y PSE E Fig 10 1 1 Il O D FR Q mp O 5 The replacement cut copy paste reset operations etc can be done by pressing the corresponding soft keys The program switch must be turned on before program editting See Section 3 4 1 Parameter and program switch page in this manual for its operation Note 1 A program contains no more than 200 000 lines Note 2 As is shown in Fig 10 1 1 if there is more than 1 sign ahead of a block the system will skip the block even if the block skip function is not turned on Note 3 It is forbidden to switch the control to other mode when the Check function is performed in Auto mode or unexpected results will occur During Check in Auto mode if there is a sign ahead of a block the Check function is performed for this block regardless of whether the skip function is ON 255 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 10 1 1 Program Creation 10 1 1 1 Automatic Creation of Sequence Number Set the AUTO SEQ to 1 according to the method described in Section 3 5 1 See Fig 10 1 1 1 1 PAR SWITCH OFF 1 ON PRG SWITCH 0 OFF 1 ON KeyBoard 218MC H 1 218MC V 2 218MC IN UNIT 0 MM 1 INCH I O CHAN 0 Xon Xoff 1 XModem 2 USB AUTO SEQ 1 0 OFF 1 ON
98. of chamfering and corner rounding are negative their absolute values are used in the system 4 3 Reference point G code The reference point is a fixed point on the machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by the reference point return function There are 3 codes for the reference point as is shown in Fig 4 3 1 The tool can be automatically moved to the reference point via an intermediate point along a specified axis by G28 or be moved automatically from the reference point to a specified point via an intermediate point along a specified axis by G29 49 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 3 R Reference point Intermediate point A C Start point for reference Target point of return from point return reference point Fig 4 3 1 4 3 1 Reference point return G28 I Format G28 X_Y_Z_ Function G28 is for the operation of returning to the reference point a specific point on the machine tool via intermediate point Explanation Intermediate point An intermediate point is specified by an code parameter in G28 It can be expressed by absolute or incremental codes During the execution of this block the coordinate values of the intermediate point of the axis specified are stored for the use of G29 code returning from the reference point mm a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Note T
99. offset vector points towards or is apart from the arc center from the start point or the end point 101 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual New vector New vector sie X Y X Y Tool center path Tool center path Programmed path W Start point Old vector Oe Vector Start point Programmed path Fig 4 7 2 3 Tool radius compensation right G42 In contrast with G41 G42 specifies the tool to deviate at the right side of the workpiece along the tool advancing direction i e the vector direction obtained in G42 is reverse to the vector direction obtained in G41 Except for the direction the deviation of G42 is identical with that of G41 3 1 G00 G01 2 G42X Y D 3 G42X Y 5 Bi Programmed path New yec Start point Q Tool center path Fig 4 7 2 4 2 G02 G03 X Y X Y New vector Programmed path New vector Tool center path Tool center path Start point Old vector Fig 4 7 2 5 6 Precautions on offset A Offset number specification G41 G42 and G40 are modal codes The offset number can be specified by D code anywhere before the offset cancel mode is switched to the tool radius compensation mode B Switching from the offset cancel mode to tool radius compensation mode The moving code must be positioning GOO or linear interpolation G01 when the mode is switched from the offset cancel mode to tool radius
100. one of the English letters A Z It specifies the meaning of its following digits In the system the used addresses and their meanings as well as their ranges are shown in Fig 3 1 3 1 Sometimes an address may have different meanings based on different preparatory functions An address is used more than one time in the same command and whether an alarm is issued is set by bit parameter NO 32 6 Chapter 3 Structure of an Part Program Table 3 1 3 1 A B C Set by data parameter P175 P178 Address of axis name Radius offset number DO defaults to 0 and it cannot be 0 255 changed by users Not used Eee 0 001 99999 999 mm min Feedrate per minute 0 001 500 mm r Feedrate per turn G 00 99 Preparation function HEN 01 99 Operator in G65 H Length offset number HO is defaulted to 0 which can O 255 m not be set or modified 99999999 99999999 mm X vector between arc center and start point arc spiral interpolation scaling value should be more than the radius of Interior grooving radius in G22 G23 current tool oo pagel eee ee ts Finishing circle radius in G24 G25 G26 G32 absolute value used if it is negative value should be more than data parameter P269 set value tool radius Width of the rectangular grooves in X direction in E F tool radius 2 The screwing cutting radius G33 G34 should be less than 1 2 tool radius used if it is negative G35 G36 G37 G38 interpolation scaling used if i
101. only for EQ and NE 129 DuluweJbolg Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Table 4 9 2 7 When 1 lt vacant gt When 1 0 1 EQ 0 1 EQ 0 i Established Not established 1 NE 0 1 NE 0 J l Not established Established 1 GE 0 1 GE 0 J Established Established 1 GT 0 1 GT 0 li l Not established Not established mo paa o pa 2000 ooa fo wa 0 eee PO ws fons poooe ff ong PO 05 fn pos ff ons PO 007 1 ae eee or 1 aa eee om 02 NOTE NULL VARIABLES DATA rea 30 31 PATH 1 1 SYSTEM RETURN Fig 4 9 2 2 Whne the variable value is vacant the variable is null 4 9 3 Custom Macro Call When G65 is specified the custom macro specified by address P is called and the data is transferred to the custom macro body by arguments Format G65 P o0000L0000 lt argument specification gt Calling times Program number of the custom macro body called Behind G65 code P is used to specify custom macro number L is used to specify custom macro calling times and the arguments are used to transfer data to custom macro If repetition is needed specify the number of repeats behind L code from 1 9999 if L is omitted the default time is 1 If it is specified by arguments the values will be assigned to the corresponding local variables 130 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code
102. p Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 2 3 Safety Operations 2 3 1 Reset Operation With key Ea pressed the system enters the reset state 1 2 3 A 10 2 3 2 All axes movement stops The M functions are ineffective Whether the G codes are saved after resetting is determined by bit parameters NO 35 1 NO 35 7 and NO 36 0 NO 36 7 Whether F H D codes are cleared after resetting is determined by bit parameters NO 34 7 In MDI mode whether the edited program is deleted after resetting is determined by bit parameters NO 28 7 Whether the relative coordinates are cancelled after resetting is determined by bit parameter NO 10 3 In non Edit mode whether the cursor returns to the beginning of the program after resetting is determined by bit parameter NO 10 7 Whether macro local variables 1 50 are cleared after resetting is determined by bit parameter NO 52 7 Whether macro common variables 100 199 are cleared after resetting is determined by bit parameter NO 52 6 Resetting can be used during abnormal system output and coordinate axis action Emergency Stop If the Emergency Stop button is pressed during machine running the system enters into emergency state and the machine movement is stopped immediately Release the button usually rotate the button towards left to exit the state Note 1 Confirm the faults have been removed before r
103. per minute relationship between the thread lead and feedrate spindle speed Feedrate F screw pitchxspindle speed S Example machining the thread hole M12x1 5 can select a parameter S500 500 r min F 1 5x500 750mm min When a multi head thread is machined multiplying the number of head can gain the F value In feed per rev the thread lead is equal to the feederate Example Feed per minute mode Spindle speed 1000r min Thread lead 1 0mm I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Feed per rev mode Spindle speed 1000r min Thread lead 1 0mm So Z axis feedrate 1000 1 1000mm min So Z axis feedrate thread lead 1mm r G94 feed per minute mode G95 feed per rev mode G00 X120 Y100 position G00 X120 Y100 position M29 S1000 specify rigid mode M29 S1000 specify rigid mode G84 Z 100 R 20 F1000 right hand rigid tapping G84 Z 100 R 20 F1 right hand rigid tapping G80 cancel tapping cycle G80 cancel tapping cycle G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 return to reference point G28 G91 X0 YO ZO return to reference point M30 end of program M30 end of program Limitation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 when G74 G84 is used otherwise G74 G84 is replaced by other G codes in group1 M codes before G74 G84 is specified using the miscellaneous function M code makes the spindle rotate When the spindle rotation is not specified the system automatically count the current spindle command sp
104. return G30 00 0 a a a en E G 51 4 3 3 Automatic return from reference point G29 cecccccececeeeceeeeeceeeeceaeeseeeesseeeeseeeeseasessaeeeseseesseeees 51 4 3 4 Reference Point Return Check G27 000 0 ccccccccssecccceeeecceececceececceueeeceuececseuseesseueeeseeeesseuesessseeeeesages 52 4A Canned Cy Cle G COde sais isi esses es 52 4 4 1 High speed peck drilling cycle G7 8 wer ccsdecseetencisescbisd EDEL EDER DD ee 57 4 4 2 Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle G81 0 0 eee cceccccceeeecceeeecceeeeceeeeesseececseueeesseuseessaececseseueeessgeeessass 59 se CORO Ong Ane AMIN CNE SY stem EO amin gang Operon wise Manuel 4 4 3 Drilling cycle counterboring cycle G82 W W u u u X dsssssenseeekkkt kk tk kk L ERE LER LERET ERE LER LERET ERE TERRE EET E REEL RES 60 4 4 4 Drilling Cycle with Chip Removal G83 W W W u dssssssneseee kk t kk kk ERE RENEE ERR E REE E REE REE REE E REE E REE REE E NERE NERE REE E ERR ER 62 AAS Tapping Cycle Gre OMA SE Noe ee oe ie oe aol ede el ay ea oes 63 4 4 6 Fine BORA Cycle GTO wes Al Fora as a Pod ler bas ved Pass ntencdsloeevesseak 66 AA BONING CVCE CO Oia ae a a a a 68 AAB Bong eyele GBG eee en nnn ae ee oe a a a lee er eee eee 69 4 4 9 Boring cycle back boring cycle G87 0 00 ccccccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeessaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeessesseeesseneeeeas 71 ATO BORING OV Cle GG nane erea OE Er lerede 72 AA Boring Cycle GE rad ou started el er N eta as EE E nese aes eee
105. separate block or an alarm occurs Please note that the parameter input mode must be cancelled by G11 after G10 is used Note 3 The parameter value modified by G10 must within the range of system parameter otherwise an alarm occurs Note 4 Modal codes of canned cycle must be cancelled prior to G10 execution otherwise an alarm occurs Note 5 Those parameters which take effect after Power OFF and then On are unavailable to be modified by G10 Note 6 On line modification for G20 and G21 is unavailable by G10 Note 7 When G10 modifies external zero offset workpiece offset additional workpiece zero offset or tool offset on line in G91 mode the system adds the code offset to the current offset when modifying them in G90 mode it modifies by the code offset Note 8 Cancel G10 mode when executing M00 M01 M02 M30 M99 M98 and MO6 Note 9 Bit parameter No 0 7 Selection mode 0 for normal mode 1 for high speed and high precision mode does not support G10 on line modification 7 O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo 4 2 8 Workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 Function for specifying the current workpiece coordinate system The workpiece coordinate system is selected by specifying G codes of workpiece coordinate system in a program Format G54 G59 Explanation 1 With no code parameter 2 The system itself is capable of setting 6 workpiece coordinate systems any one of which can be selected by codes G54 G59 G54
106. specifying max spindle speed r min Function The number following S is used to specify the surface speed relative speed between tool and workpiece The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant regardless 147 I 7 a O Ca FE Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual of the tool position Explanation 1 G96 is a modal instruction After it is specified the program enters the constant surface speed control mode and the specified S value is assumed as a surface speed 2 A G96 must specify the axis along which constant surface speed control is applied It can be cancelled by G97 3 To execute the constant surface speed control it is necessary to set a workpiece coordinate system then the coordinate value at the center of the rotary axis becomes zero X I Fig 6 3 1 Workpiece coordinate system for constant surface speed control 4 When constant surface speed control is applied if a spindle speed higher than the value specified in G 92 S it is clamped at the maximum spindle speed When the power is switched on and the maximum spindle speed is not yet set the S in G96 is regarded as zero till M3 or M4 appears in the program 7 aS O Ca 3 S 3 3 5 vo Spindle speed rpm The spindle speed almost coincides with the surface speed at approx 160mm radius Surface speed S is 600mm min Radius mm 0 20
107. specifying the cutting feedrate The number of repeats is specified in K_ which is only effective in the block in which it is specified If it is omitted the default is 1 time The maximum drilling times are 99999 When the value is negative its absolute value is executed When the value is 0 only the mode is changed with no drilling operation executed gt The canned cycle G codes are modal ones which remain effective till they are cancelled by a G code for cancelling it gt G80 and G codes in group 01 are used for cancelling the canned cycle gt Once the hole machining data in canned cycle is specified it is retained till the cycle is 54 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code cancelled All the required hole machining data should be specified at the beginning of the canned cycle and only the updated data needs to be specified in the subsequent canned cycle gt Note 1 The feedrate specified by F remains effective even if the canned cycle is cancelled Note 2 The scaling for Z axis cutting axis direction is invalid in the canned cycle Note 3 In single block mode the canned cycle uses the 3 stage machining type i e positioning R level initial level Note 4 In the canned cycle when the system bit parameter NO 36 1 is 1 if reset or emergency stop is performed both the hole machining data and hole position data will be cleared Examples for data remaining and data clearing above are shown in the following t
108. surface speed control cutting speed 15 Constant surface speed G97 G97S_ T control cancel cutting speed o e as BENE In 10 Written into blocks T y i Return to point R plane in G99 canned cycle Note 1 If modal Commands and non modal Commands are in the same block the non modal commands take precedence At the same time the corresponding modes are changed according to the other modal Commands in the same block but not executed Note 2 For the G code with sign when the power is switched on the system is in the state of this G code some G codes are determined by bit parameter NO 31 0 7 Note 3 The G codes of group 00 are all non modal G codes except G10 G11 G92 Note 4 An alarm occurs if G codes not listed in this table are used or G codes that cannot be selected are specified Note 5 G codes from different groups can be specified in a block but 2 or more G codes from the same group can not be specified in a block by principle If no alarm occurs when two or more G codes in the same group are in a block after parameter setting the latter G code functions Note 6 If a G code of group 01 is in the same block with a G code of group 09 the G code of group 01 prevails In canned cycle mode if G codes from 01 group are specified the canned cycle will be cancelled automatically and the system turns into G80 state Note 7 G codes are represented by group numbers respectively based on their types Whether the G codes of ea
109. the CNC drilling milling system coincide Reference point Fig 2 4 2 1 There are two methods to make the tool traverse to the reference point 1 Manual reference point return Refer to Section 9 Zero Operation Operation 2 Automatic reference point return 2 4 3 Workpiece Coordinate System When the system machines a workpiece the used coordinate system is called a workpiece coordinate system called a part coordinate system A workpiece coordinate system is set in advance by the CNC set a workpiece coordinate system Chapter 2 Programming Fundamentals z l Z 1 Program Instruction X X Coordinate system Machining drawing CNC system Machine tool Fig 2 4 3 1 The tool in the CNC commanding the workpiece coordinate system cuts a workpiece to the shape described in the drawing according to the programmed coordinate system s command programs represented in the machining drawing which must confirm their relative relationship between the machine coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system The method of confirming their relationship is called alignment There are different methods according to the workpiece s shape and machining quantity Using the part reference point II Fixing the part directly on the fixture Reference point mm a O Ca A S 3 3 5 vo Workpiece Workpiece reference point fixture Fixed distance Align the tool center to the workpiece reference Because
110. the M codes themselves to the machine without performing the internal operation can be specified in the same block 5 2 1 Program End and Return M30 M02 When M30 M02 in the program is executed in auto mode the auto mode is cancelled The blocks following them are not executed and the spindle and cooling are stopped Meanwhile the workpiece machined number increases by 1 Whether the control returns to the beginning of the program after M30 is executed is set by bit parameter NO 33 4 whether the control returns to the beginning of the program after MO2 is executed is set by bit parameter NO 33 2 If M02 and M03 are in a subprogram then the control returns to the program calling the subprogram after they are executed and proceeds to the following blocks 5 2 2 Program Dwell M00 In Auto running the automatic operation pauses after a block containing MOO is executed Meanwhile the previous modal information will be saved The automatic operation is continued by pressing Cycle Start key which is equivalent to pressing down key Feed Hold 5 2 3 Program Optional Stop M01 Automatic operation is stopped optionally after a block containing M01 is executed If the Optional Stop switch is set to ON M01 is equivalent to MOO if the Optional Stop switch is set to OFF M01 is ineffective See OPERATION MANUAL for its operation 5 2 4 Subprogram Call M98 M98 is used to call a subprogram in a main program Its format is as
111. the offset mode the position to be reached by the tool specified with G27 code is the position obtained after the offset is added Therefore if the position with the offset added to it is not the reference point the indicator does not light up and an alarm is issued Usually the tool offset should be cancelled before the use of G27 code 4 The coordinate position of X Y and Z specified by G27 is the position in the machine coordinate system 4 4 Canned cycle G code The canned cycle uses a single block containing G functions to achieve the machining action which needs to be done with multiple blocks to simply the programming making the programming easier for programmers in this system only the canned cycle in G17 plane is available 52 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code General process of canned cycle A canned cycle consists of a sequence of 6 operations as shown in Fig 4 4 1 Op ae Operation 2 gt lt Operation 6 R lt Initial level Operation 3 gt lt Operation 5 jo Rapid traverse Operation 4 Feed I Fig 4 4 1 Operation 1 Positioning of axes X and Y another axis can be included Operation 2 Rapid traverse to point R level Operation 3 Hole machining Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole Operation 5 Retraction to point R level Operation 6 Rapid traverse to the initial point Positioning is performed in XY plane and hole machining is per
112. the target point alone N4 G01 X20 N5 G28 Y60 intermediate point is X40 Y60 N6 G55 After the workpiece coordinate system is changed the intermediate point is changed into the point 40 60 in the workpiece coordinate system set by G55 from the point 40 60 in the workpiece coordinate system set by G54 N7 G29 X60 Y20 Return to point 60 20 via the intermediate point 40 60 in G55 workpiece coordinate system from the reference point The G28 code can automatically cancel the tool compensation but this code is only used in automatic tool change mode i e changing the tool at the reference point after reference point return Therefore the tool radius compensation and tool length compensation in principle should be cancelled before the use of this code See data parameters P45 P48 for the 1 reference point setting 4 3 2 2nd 3rd 4th reference point return G30 There are 4 reference points in machine coordinate system In a system without an absolute position detector the 2nd 3rd 4th reference point return functions can be used only after the auto reference point return G28 or manual reference point return is performed Format G30 P2X Y Z 2 reference point return P2 can be omitted G30 P3 X_Y_Z_ 3 reference point return G30 P4X_Y Z 4 reference point return Function G30 performs the operation of returning to the specified reference point via the intermediate point specified by G30 Explanation 1 X_Y_Z_
113. to Dry Run speed x rapid feed override In cutting feed the program speed equals to Dry Run speed x cutting feed override Note 1 The Dry Run speed is set by data parameter P86 Note 2 In rigid taping whether the Dry Run is effective is set by bit parameter NO 12 5 Note 3 In cutting feed whether the Dry Run is effective is set by bit parameter NO 12 6 Note 4 In rapid positioning whether the Dry Run is effective is set by bit parameter NO NO 12 7 7 6 Single Block Execution Single Block can be selected for checking the execution of a block Op In Auto DNC or MDI mode press key ae that the indicator on the key lights up means single block execution state is entered In single block execution the system stops after the 247 Il Oo D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual execution of a single block Press key GE STAR to execute the next block and perform the operation like this repeatedly till the whole program is executed Note In G28 mode the single block stop can be performed at an intermediate point 7 7 Machine Lock MACHINE In lt AUTO gt mode press key 8K that the indicator on the key lights up means the current Machine lock state is entered In this mode the axes on the machine do not move but the position along each axis changes on the display as if the tool were moving In addition M S and T functions can b
114. unavailable in the start up block and the block following it There is no such concepts as 110 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code inner and outer side when the offset direction is changed The following offset value is assumed to be positive i Linear Linear ii Linear Circular Programmed pathy r Y G41 Programmed G42 path Pa Tool center path iii Circular gt Linear Tool center path Civ Circular gt Circular G42 Tool center path Programmed Programmed path path Fig 4 7 3 6 v When the tool compensation is executed normally without an intersection When changing the offset direction from block A to block B using G41 and G42 if the intersection of the offset path is not required the vector normal to block B is created at the start point 1 Linear Linear L E EN Single block B Single block A PA Programmed G42 642 lt G41 path Tool center ee eee L path L ae Compensation vector Fig 4 7 3 7 2 Linear Circular S L A a Tool center path Block A Block B Programmed path Compensation vector Fig 4 7 3 8 111 I O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 3 Circular Circular end point is o not on the arc Center Tool center path Center Fig 4 7 3 9 vi Normally there is almost no possibility of generating the situation
115. 006 stacey 2097 0 SO o o 9 DATA Il O Fig 3 3 5 2 1 1 D When No 054 is set to 1 the system selects to use the double spindle control Press the soft key SPINDLE PARA to enter the spindle parameter page The displayed content in the page is shown in Fig 3 3 5 2 1 2 0888 STANDBY 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 00G 0007 000g 0009 0010 0011 DATA oss RR 16 52 21 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 5 2 1 2 STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY _2000 2001 S a 2002 2003 2004 2005 2005 I D 2007 oC joes O 2009 a 2010 o fo i 3 3 5 2 2 Spindle Parameter Modification and Setting 19 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 1 Select lt MDI gt mode SETTING to enter lt SET gt page set the parameter switch to 1 2 Press SYSTEM 3 Press ser press the soft key K JSPINDLE PARA to enter the parameter display page 4 Move the cursor to the current selected axis parameter 0 input the password 315 0 160 can be seen and modified press the input key to download the driver parameters into the system and modify the servo parameters in SPINDLE PARA page 5 Move the cursor to the required parameter number s position to be modified Method 1 press down the key Page Up Page Down to display the page wheter the required parame
116. 009 G32 G633 G634 G35 G636 G37 G38 G73 G74 G76 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 4010 G98 G99 4011 G15 G16 4012 G50 G51 4013 G68 G69 4014 G61 G62 G63 G64 a wM 4015 696 697 S moe e a A BEL 4023 1 2 3 4 5 T 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4029 O o O 4030 P the current selected additional workpiece coordinate system Note 1 P code indicates the current selected additional workpiece coordinate system Note 2 When G 4002 code is being executed the value obtained in 4002 is 17 18 or 19 Note 3 The modal message can be read but not written 2 Current position message 126 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Table 4 9 2 3 Reading operation Tool offset Relative coordinate system Variable number Tool nose ABSIO ABSIO Workpiece involved Position message during value moving 5003 Block end position of Z axis coordinate allowed Position program ABSIO ABSMT ABSMT HE 5008 Block end position of Z axis ah ines i Block end position of 4 axis ABSOT Block end position of Y axis ABSOT Block end position of Z axis ABSOT Block end position of 4 axis ABSOT Workpiece ABSKP system ABSKP unallowed Tool reference Position involved Machine coordinate ABSKP ABSKP axis Tool length offset value of Y axis axis unallowed 5024 Tool length offset value of 4 axis 5026 Servo position offset of X axis 5027 Servo po
117. 06 Tool function 15 7 a O Ca 2 Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual mo e a Set by data parameter P175 178 Address of axis name U Range of U D 2s U sthe smaller one Corning arc radius in fixed cycle between I 2 and J 2 Set by data parameter P175 178 Address of axis name More than 0 Distance to unprocessed plane when rapidly cutting En Set by data parameter P175 178 Address of axis name Should be more than OCif the fist cut depth is more than the groove bottom the user fist cut depth down in Z direction from R plane in fixed directly machines the workpiece at the cycle bottom x Maaressotasneme OoOO Set by data parameter P175 178 Address of axis name 99999 999 99999 999 mm Coordinate address in Z direction All described in Table 3 1 3 1 are limited values for the CNC device but the limit for the machine tool is not described here Therefore users are required to refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder besides this one in order to get a good understanding of the programming limits before programming Note each word should not exceed 79 characters mm a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo 3 2 General Structure of a Program The program is divided into main program and subprogram In general the CNC system is actuated by the main program If an Command for calling the subprogram is executed in the main progr
118. 1 ee aa Fig 3 7 3 In this page the messages are arranged in chronological order for users convenience 4 OPERATE page In lt ALARM gt page press soft key OPERATE to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 7 4 The OPERATE page displays the modification messages applied to the system parameters and ladders e g content modification and time modification Il O CD Q P 1 23 PATH 1 MDI Ea o jam m m A Fig 3 7 4 OPERATE page can display 34 pages while HISTORY alarm page can display 9 pages The alarm time alarm numbers alarm messages and page numbers can be viewed using page keys DELETE The records of the HISTORY and OPERATE can be deleted by pressing key system debugging level or above required 223 Il O CD Q O Or l CES E GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 3 8 PLC Display Press the key HIPLCGRA corresponding soft 224 to display the PLC page There are 5 subpages including INFO HIPLCPAR PLCDGN and HPLCTRA which can be viewed by the keys See Fig 3 8 1 to Fig 3 8 5 EXT FILE Ladder 1 MT MODEL 850 VERSION MC8 g CONTRIVER GSK ladder 155718 4414 117 4297 2011 06 10 15 11 DATA Rd 17 06 25 PATH 1 Fig 3 8 1 KOOS 2 F R 2 G81 K 1 4 F010 X B 7 K007 5 Fal 1 R087 5 x A K S 2 F R 1 5012 R 87 6 x00 2 K S
119. 10 138 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code 3 Conditional transfer IF statement lt conditional expression gt IF lt conditional expression gt GOTO n If the specified conditional expression is satisfied the system transfers to the block with sequence number n if the specified conditional expression is not satisfied the next block is executed If the value of a variable is greater than 10 the system transfers to the block with sequence number N2 If the condition is not satisfied IF 1 GT 10 GOTO 2 If the condition is Program satisfied N2 G00 G91 X10 0 I IF lt conditional expression gt THEN If the conditional expression is satisfied a predetermined macro statement is executed Only a single macro statement is executed If the values of 1 and 2 are the same 0 is assigned to 3 IF 1 EQ 2 THEN 3 0 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Explanation gt Conditional expression A conditional expression must include an operator which is inserted between two variables or between a variable and a constant and must be enclosed with brackets J An expression can replace a variable gt Operator Operators each consists of two letters are used to compare two values to determine whether they are equal or one is greater or smaller than the other one Table 4 9 5 2 Operators Equal to Not equal to es E R eee Q E T E LT LE PLE Smaller than or equal to
120. 102 the program is executed in sequence 3 Conditional transfer 2 J NE K G65 H82 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number e g G65 H82 P1000 Q 101 R 102 133 I 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo 134 4 5 6 7 WY WY WY WY 4 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual When 101 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101 102 the program is executed in sequence Conditional transfer 3 J GT K gt G65 H83 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number e g G65 H83 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 gt 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101 lt 102 the program is executed in sequence Conditional transfer 4 J LT K lt G65 H84 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number e g G65 H84 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 lt 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101 2 102 the program is executed in sequence Conditional transfer 5 J GE K 2 G65 H85 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number e g G65 H85 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 2 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101 lt 102 the program is executed in sequence Conditional transfer 6 J LE K lt G65 H86 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number e g G65 H86 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 lt 102 it goes to N1000 when 101 gt 102 the program is executed in sequence Note The sequence number can be specified by variables Such as G65 H81 P 100 Q 101 R 102 if the conditions are satisfied it goes to the
121. 252 8 4 Operation Modes Conversio M eeasnoaienia aaa AE AAE E ene rende 252 CHAPTER 9 ZERO RETURN OPERATION seesssoccesoccesoocessoceesoecssoccesoocesoocessoccesoocessosessoesesosee 253 9 1 Concept of Mechanical Zero Machine Zero esssssssssserrissssesrrrrrsrsssrrrrrrrssssrrrrrerssserrrrreessees 253 92 GEHST Machine ZTO RE tU I ozone A a 253 CHAPTER 10 EDT OPERATION Alsion sneskred eggs inden kl nd d sags aoa aaar aenda 255 MO ed PROC I AN te GU es nesta sie e totes cates We seen town encase a ieeuh eaten eee nae Coenen oleae 255 TOT Program Creation erci ets ones cs esate nee ese de eee ee ae 256 10 1 1 1 Automatic Creation of Sequence Number ccccssccessssscccssseecessssseeeessseeecessaeeeesssaeeeeessaeeessns 256 OMA Program Content AOU aar secretions dere lee goals icine tans ae ere dda erase deencsicanldeaeness 256 10 1 1 3 Search of Sequence Number Word and Line NUMDET cccccccsssssccceessssseeeecceeesssseeeeeeeeeaaes 258 10 1 1 4 Location Method of the Cursor cccssssscccssssseccsssseeesssseseesesseeseessseseesesseaseesssseseeesesseueesssnseesessass 258 10 1 1 5 Insertion Deletion and Modification Of a WO cece ceceeseseseeccccceesessecccececaaaseeececeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeas 259 TO 7 41 6 Singles Block DEIENE ESS ENEDES SE BERN ES E SENER ENES ERE SES SER SER ENESTE ESS 260 TORE SL Deletion OL BIOCKS xander 260 TOME SDGISUNG VV OF TS tes Ea RE A r N INANA 260 10 1 2 Deletion of a Single Pro
122. 3 Drilling cycle counterboring cycle G82 Format G82 X_Y Z RPF K Function This cycle is used for normal drilling Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole At the bottom a dwell is performed and the tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole in rapid traverse Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R F_ Cutting feedrate P_ The minimum dwell time at the hole bottom K Number of repeats 60 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code G82 G98 G82 G99 Initial level Point R level Fig 4 4 3 1 After positioning along axes X and Y rapid traverse is performed to point R and drilling is then performed from point R to point Z When the tool reaches the bottom of the hole a dwell is performed and the tool is then retracted in rapid traverse Miscellaneous function M codes are used to rotate the spindle before G82 is specified When G82 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first hole positioning and the system then proceeds to the next drilling operation When the number of repeats K is specified
123. 3 is ignored P3 is ignored The tool path is as follows PO P1 P2 P4 P6 P7 The arc cutting of the block N6 is ignored 10 Interference check The tool overcutting is called interference The Interference check function checks the tool overcutting in advance If the interference is detected by grammar check function after the program is loaded an alarm is issued Whether the interference check is performed during radius compensation is set by bit parameter NO 41 6 Basic conditions for interference 1 The moving distance of the block which establishes tool radius compensation is less than the tool radius 2 The direction of the tool path is different from that of the program path The included angle between the two paths is from 90 to 270 3 Besides the above conditions in arc machining the included angle between the start point and the end point of the tool center path is very different from that between the start point and end point of the program path above 180 Programmed Tool center path path The directions of the two paths are quite different 180 Fig 4 7 3 22 116 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Tool center path gt Programmed path The directions of the two paths are quite different 180 Fig 4 7 3 23 11 Manual operation Refer to Manual Operation section in Operation part for the manual operation during th
124. 431 Drive unit alarm 31 encoder UVW signal error or it doss not match encoder __ 0432 Drive unit alarm 32 UVW with al high level orwithalliowlevel 0433 Drive unt alarm 33 communication merupa 0434 Drive unit alarm 34 encoder speed is abnormal 0435 Drive unit alarm 35 encoder state isaonoma 0436 Drive unit alarm 36 encoder counter is abnorma 0437 Drive unit alarm 37 single circle number of encoder overtow 0438 Drive unit alarm 36 muti circle number of encoder overtow 0438 Drive unit alarm 38 encodertateryalamm T oso ormeuntaamso novateyinencor T o omeumtaamamoorwpeenr l 0442 Drive unit alarm 42 absolute position data abnormal alam 0443 Drive unit alarm 43 encoder EPPROM check alarm 0448 Ethernet initialization failure Please check hardwar 330 Appendix 2 Alarm List Content Drive unit is disconnected Please check whether connection of hardware is correct 0451 The 1 axis driver alarm i The 2 axis driver alarm 0453 The 3 axis driver alarm Fe 0454 The 4 axis driver alarm i 0456 The 5 axis driver alarm Lo 0500 The 1 axis software overtravel direction overtravel manual or MPG direction movement release 0501 The ile axis software overtravel direction overtravel manual or MPG direction movement release 0502 The 2 axis software overtravel direction overtravel manual or MPG direction movement release The 2 axis software over
125. 48 490 mm Y 47 897 m Y 593 mm 3 Z 6 186 mm Z 5 48 mm Z 786 mm LOADED MODAL CURRENT MODAL GOO G49 E 300 GOO G49 E G17 G80 5 1500 G17 G80 5 G90 G98 M 05 09 G90 G98 M 30 G94 G15 T 0000 G94 G15 T 000A G54 G50 H 0008 G54 G50 H 0008 G21 G69 D 0000 G21 G69 D 0000 G40 G64 N 262 G40 G64 N 2 DATA R85 54 PATH 1 E Ooo dew Fig 10 1 9 1 4 in CUR MOD page input corresponding modes according to the pre loaded modal values in Fig 10 1 9 1 O O D s Q O 5 e Op PROG are 5 Return to lt AUTO gt mode press key FESTART and then key SERME on the panel Then the program moves to the start point i e the end point of the last block of the interrupted block at the dry run speed and the execution continues The operation can be restarted anywhere Explanation 1 The 1 2 SY ahead of the coordinates in the figure above are the sequence in which the axes moves to the program restart position They are set by data parameter P376 2 When position movement of the coordinate axis is restarted the single block is turned on it stops when the tool every time completes one axis direction movement During execution the system cannot be switched into MDI mode to perform interference 3 Z movement mode is controlled by No 49 0 0 GOO 1 G01 Note 1 Check whether the collision occurs when the tool moves to the program restart position If such a possi
126. 5 vo I 7 O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 5 1 1 CW CCW Rotation Instructions M03 M04 Code M03 M04 SxxXx Explanation Viewed from the negative direction to the positive direction along Z axis that the spindle is rotated counterclockwise CCW is defined as CCW rotation vice versa that the spindle is rotated clockwise CW is defined as CW rotation The direction of moving forward to the workpiece by the right hand thread is defined as the positive direction and the direction of departing from the workpiece by the right hand thread is defined as the negative direction M03 means clockwise roation and M04 means counterclockwise rotation Sx x x specifies the spindle speed or the current gear in gear control mode Unit revolution per minute r min When it is controlled by a frequency converter Sx x x specifies the actual speed e g S1000 specifies the spindle to rotate at a speed of 1000r min 5 1 2 M05 Spindle Stop M05 Code M05 When MOS is executed in auto mode the spindle is stopped but the speed specified by S instruction is retained The deceleration at spindle stop is set by the machine builder It is usually done by energy consumption brake 5 1 3 Cooling ON OFF M08 M09 Code MO08 control the cooling pump ON MO9 control control the cooling pump OFF If the miscellaneous functions are locked in Auto m
127. 5 H01 P 100 Q10 Correct The input range of variable cannot exceed valid 15 digit numbers and operation result cannot exceed 9 digit numbers and manual input range of variable is valid 8 digit numbers The result of the variable operation can be a decimal fraction with a precision of 0 0001 All operations except H11 OR operation H12 AND operation H13 NOT operation H23 ROUNDING operation with decimal portions neglected in operation are done without the decimal portions abnegated Example L 100 35 101 10 102 5 S 110 100 101 3 5 3 111 110x 102 17 5 120 100x 102 175 121 120 101 17 5 The execution time of operation and transfer instruction differs depending on different conditions The average time is usually 10ms When the variable value is not defined the variable becomes vacant The variable 0 is always vacant It is read instead of being written a Reference When an undefined variabled is referred the address itselft is also ignored Example When the variable 1 value is 0 and the variable 2 value is vacant execution result of GOOX 1 Y 2 is GOOXO b Operation Besides using lt Vacant gt to assign lt Vacant gt is the same with 0 in other conditions Table 4 9 2 6 When 1 lt vacant gt When 1 0 2 1 2 lt 7 gt l 2 1 5 J 2 0 2 1 1 2 1 1 l 2 0 2 0 c conditional expressions lt Vacant gt differs from 0
128. 74 4 4 12 Canned cycle cancel G80 W W W ssssssseeekeke kk tk LER LER LER ERR REEL E REEL ERE LER Meedadecs tietledelactdeusecees eee 75 AS RIGA Wel k 0 9 i GC OE eee RTE SR SPITE 77 S Left Hand Tapping Cycler G7 A mr aroei e EEE eee LEE ter ale dedi E E ae 77 4 5 2 Right hand Tapping Cycle GOS iso iea en a E eaaa E a aa Aeae 80 4 5 3 Peck Rigid Taping Chip Removal CyCle cccccccccccseeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeesseeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeeseneeeeas 82 AG Compound Cle G ESTER 5 A SA 85 4 6 1 Inner circular groove rough milling G22 G23 udssssssnseneeeenkk tk LER LER LER ERE ERE LER LER LER LERET ERE EL ERE LER ERE 85 4 6 2 Fine Milling Cycle within a Full Circle G24 G25 oo ccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaeeeesaesaeeeeeas 88 4 6 3 Outer Circle Finish Milling Cycle G26 G32 00 cecccccceccceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeessaeeeseeseneeeeas 90 4 6 4 Rectangular Groove Rough Milling G33 G34 0 0 eccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeesanseeeneas 91 4 6 5 Inner Rectangular Groove Fine Milling Cycle G35 G36 0 0 cece cceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeaeeeeeseeeeeeaas 93 4 6 6 Rectangle Outside Fine Milling Cycle G37 G38 00 2 cccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaeeeessaeeseeeeas 95 AT JOOGOMpPenSalloncnG COGS shah anche ieee ice aad AAE Meee terasse eden 96 4 7 1 Tool Length Compensation G43 G44 G49 oo cccccceccceeececeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeess
129. 79 il O CD Q O Il O O D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 3 Program CUR MOD display Press soft key KCUR MOD I to enter current mode page It displays the instructions of the blocks being executed and the current modal values MDI data input and execution are available in MDI mode See Fig 3 2 4 MODAL GOO 30 0000 Se 0 1 ABSOLUTE z 1 727 m v 47 897 mm Z 5 480 mm SPRM 06000 SMAX 100000 09 09 42 PATH 1 HPRG MDI CUR NXT DIR Fig 3 2 4 4 Program CUR NXT display Press soft key CUR NXT to enter current next page It displays the instructions of the blocks being executed and the blocks to be executed See Fig 3 2 5 CURRENT NEXT X X Y Y Z Z ES R R I E IE J M J M K 5 K S P T P T D H Q H E D L D 09 09 58 PATH 1 PRG MDI CUR MOD DIR Fig 3 2 5 5 Program DIR display 180 I Press soft key DIR to enter program DIR page the contents of which are displayed as follows Fig 3 2 6 a PRG USED The saved programs including subprograms maximum number of the programs that can be saved b MEM USED The capacity occupied by the saved programs the remaining capacity for program storage c PROGRAM DIR The sequence numbers of the saved programs are displayed in s
130. AFSAT aaar EN S code output 3 3 G04 X10000 ooi Dwell D 4 G17 Z100 ee Move code not included in offset plane 5 G90 eee eeeeeeeeeeesaeeeee ees G code only 6 G01 G91 X0 eee Move distance is zero a Specified at offset start If the tool movement is not made by the start up block it will be done by the next moving code block by the system G40 G91 N6 X100 Y100 N7 G41 XO N8 Y 100 N9 X100 Y 100 Fig 4 7 3 16 b Specified in offset mode If a single block with no tool movement is specified in offset mode the vector and the tool center path are the same as when the block is not specified Refer to item 3 Offset mode This block is executed at the single block stop position N7 N8 N6 G91 X100 Y200 SE eet N7 G04 X100 N8 X100 Block N7 is executed here Programmed path Tool center path Fig 4 7 3 17 114 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code However when the block moving amount is 0 the tool movement is the same as that of two or more blocks without moving codes even if only one bloclk is specified N7 N8 N6 G91 X100 Y200 N8 X100 Block N7 is executed here Programmed path Tool center path Fig 4 7 3 18 Note The blocks above are executed in G1 G41 mode The path in G0 does not conform to the figure I c Specified together with offset cancel A vector with a length of offset value and with its direction perpendicular to the movement U
131. AGE key to display the remaining names on the next page If the Page key is pressed repeatedly all the CNC program names will be displayed circularly on LCD 10 2 5 Program Lock The program switch is provided in this system to prevent the user programs from being modified by unauthorized personnel After the program editing turn off the program switch to lock the program thus disabling the program edit See Section 3 4 1 for details 266 Chapter 11 System Communication Chapter 11 System Communication This system can communicate with PC or U disk via its own interfaces to realize data transmission and DNC on line machining 11 1 Serial Communication Preparation for serial communication 1 Connect the PC serial port and system RS232 interface using a serial line 2 Open GSK Com serial communication software on PC side Note GSK Com serial communication software uses Windows like interfaces It can run in Win98 WinMe WinXP and Win2000 3 Setting for GSK Com serial communication software 1 Select Suitable for GSK218MC 2 Click Series Port menu and set baudrate in Serial Setting dialog For data transmission select the baudrate of 115200 corresponding to the default set by data parameter P002 For DNC on line machining select the baudrate of 38400 corresponding to the default set by data parameter P001 11 1 1 Program Start Run program Comm990MC exe directly The page is as follows
132. AT Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual G91 G3 X 60 Y60 R60 F3000 G2 X 20 Y 40 R50 Or GO G90 X200 Y40 Z0 G91 G3 X 60 Y60 l 60 F300 G2 X 20 Y 40 l 50 Restrictions 1 If addresses I J K and R are specified simultaneously in a program the arc specified by R takes precedence and others are ignored 2 If neither arc radius parameter nor the parameter from the start point to the circle center is specified an alarm is issued in the system 3 A full circle can only be interpolated by parameters I J K from start point to circle center rather than parameter R 4 Pay attention to the setting for selecting the coordinate plane when the circular interpolation is being done 5 IfX Y Z are all omitted i e the start point and the final point coincides and R is specified U e g G02R50 the tool does not move amp S B Helical interpolation 3 5 Command format G02 G03 Q Arc on XY plane G02 J G17 i Xp Yop Zo i F_ G03 R_ Arc on ZX plane G02 K_ G18 Xo Ga ae i F_ G03 R_ Arc on YZ plane G02 J_K_ G19 i gt RED ae LER F_ G03 R_ Fig 4 2 3 5 Function It is used to move the tool to a specified position from the current position at a feedrate specified by parameter F in a helical path Explanation 28 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Z Tool path x j The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolat
133. Block This system allows the auto run to start from any block of the current program The steps are shown as follows D x 1 Press key MANUAL to enter Manual mode start spindle and other miscellaneous functions 2 Execute the modal values of the program in MDI mode and ensure the modal values are correct 2 PROGRAM 3 Press key EDIT to enter Edit mode and press key to enter program page then find the program to be machined in DIR 4 Open the program and move the cursor to the block to be executed AUTO 5 Press key to enter Auto mode 6 Press key FSA to execute the program automatically Note 1 Before execution confirm the current coordinate point is the end position of the last block confirmation for the current coordinate point is unnecessary if the block to be executed is absolute programming and contains G00 G01 Note 2 If the block to be executed is for tool change operation etc ensure no interference and collision occur between the current position and workpiece in a bid to prevent machine damage and personnel hurt Il O D 3 Q mp O 5 7 5 Dry Run Before the machining by a program use Dry Run usually in combination with M S T Lock or Machine Lock to check the program KO anp AUTO DRY Press key to enter Auto mode and press key that the indicator on the key lights up means Dry Run state is entered In rapid feed the program speed equals
134. C abandon the decimal portion G65 H23 P l Q J R K e g G65 H23 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 TRUNC 102 103 x 103 12 Compound multiplication and division operation 1 1x J K G65 H26 P l Q J R k e g G65 H26 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 101x 102 103 13 Compound square root af H HK G65 H27 P I Q J R K e g G65 H27 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 af 102 1037 I 14 Sine 1 JeSIN K Unit G65 H31 P I Q J R K e g G65 H31 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 SIN 103 15 Cosine 1 JeCOS K Unit G65 H32 P l Q J R K e g G65 H32 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 COS 103 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo 16 Tangent 1 J TAN K Unit G65 H33 Pil Q J R K Ce g G65 H33 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 TAN 103 17 Arc tangent 1 ATAN J K Unit G65 H34 P l Q J R K Ce g G65 H34 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 ATAN 102 103 Note 1 The unit of angular variable is degree Note 2 If the required Q and R are not specified in operations above their values are 0 by default Note 3 trunc rounding operation the decimal portion is abandoned 3 Transfer command 1 Unconditional transfer G65 H80 Pn n Sequence number Ce g G65 H80 P120 Go to block N120 2 Conditional transfer 1 J EQ K G65 H81 Pn Q J R K n Sequence number e g G65 H81 P1000 Q 101 R 102 When 101 102 it goes to block N1000 when 101
135. C and user can to the parameter modify the setting by requirement range 1 For bit and axis parameters the data are comprised by 8 bits with each bit having different meaning 2 The data value range in above table is common effective range The specific parameter value range actually differs See the parameter explanation for details Example 1 Meaning of the bit parameters Data BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO number 2 Meaning of the data parameters 0 21 Data number Data Note 1 The blank bits in the parameter explanation and the parameter numbers that are displayed on screen but not in parameter list are reserved for further expansion They must be set to 0 Note 2 If 0 or 1 of the parameter is not specified with a meaning It is assumed that 1 for affirmative 0 for negative Note 3 If INI is set to 0 in metric input the parameter setting unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary axis is deg deg min If INI is set to 1 in inch input the parameter setting unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min 1 Bit parameter System parameter number MODE SVCD SEQ MSP INI INM PBUS PBUS 1 Transmission type of the drive unit is bus type 0 Transmission type of the drive unit is pulse type INM 1 The least increment command of linear axis is inch mode 0 The least increment command of linear axis is metric mode INI 1 inch i
136. CODE to enter this page See fig 3 9 4 GOA G15 G24 G33 G43 G57 G68 G84 G94 G01 G R G83 G 4 G10 Salal G12 G13 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G25 G26 G32 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G40 G41 G42 G44 G49 G50 G51 G53 G54 G55 G56 G58 G59 G60 G62 G61 G63 G64 G65 G69 G73 G74 G76 G80 G81 G82 G83 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 G90 G91 G92 G95 G96 G97 G98 G99 Linear interpolation 6 1 es ss ae ee ed ee PATH 1 MDI Fig 3 9 4 Il O CD Q The definitions of G codes used in system are shown in G code page Move the cursor to the G code to be viewed then its definition is shown at the lower left corner of the page fig 3 9 4 If you need to know the format and usage of a G code press key G code Press key to return See fig 3 9 5 on the panel after selecting the 221 Or Wisi GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Rapid positioning Ga Instruction format 690 691 GBB XY TZ Funct ion GAA instructions tool traverse via linear interpolation to workpiece coordinate system position specified by absolute or incremental instruction Explanation In absolute programming parameter represents programming final coordinate in incremental programming parameter represents axes moving distance and direction Restriction G codes of GAG G01 GA or GAS are not allowed in a same block P 1 58 PATH 1 BEN sys INFO
137. Code Execution and Stop After the instructions are input according to the steps in Section 8 1 press key NGE STAR to execute them in MDI mode During the execution the instruction execution can be stopped by pressing key Note 1 MDI execution must be performed in MDI mode Note 2 The program input in CUR MOD page is executed prior to that input in MDI mode 8 3 Word Value Modification and Deletion of MDI Code If a mistake occurs during the input press key Ek I to cancel it if a mistake is detected after the input re input the contents to replace the wrong ones or press key Ea to delete all the contents and then input them again 8 4 Operation Modes Conversion In Auto MDI or DNC mode when the control is converted to MDI DNC Auto or Edit mode during the program execution the system stops the execution of the program after the current block is executed When the control is switched to Step mode by a dwell during the program execution in Auto MDI or DNC mode the step interruption is executed See Section 5 2 Step interruption If the control is switched to MPG mode by a dwell the MPG interruption is executed See section 6 2 MPG interruption If the control is switched to MANUAL mode by a dwell the manual intervention is executed See Section 4 1 4 Manual interruption When the control is directly switched to Step MPG MANUAL or Zero Return mode during the program execution in Auto MDI DNC mode the sy
138. Exponential acceleration deceleration time constant of handwheel Setting range 0 400 ms 0154 Acceleration clamp time constant of handwheel 100 Setting range 0 400 ms 0155 Maximum clamp speed of step feed 1000 Setting range O0 3000 mm min 0156 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant of 100 axes JOG feed Setting range 0 400 ms 0157 Exponential acceleration deceleration time constant 120 of axes JOG feed Setting range 0 400 ms 0158 Acceleration clamp time constant of handwheel 50 incomplete running Setting range 0 1000 ms 0160 Multiplication coefficient of the 1 axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 0161 Multiplication coefficient of the 2 axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 gt Lej D 5 Q x 0162 Multiplication coefficient of the 3 axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 0163 Multiplication coefficient of the 4 axis instruction 1 CMR Setting range 1 65536 0164 Multiplication coefficient of the 5 axis instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 307 Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0165 Frequency division coefficient of the 1 axis 1 instruction CMR Setting range 1 65536 0166 Frequency division coefficient of the 2 axis 1 instruction CMR Setting range 165536 0167 Frequency division coefficient of the 3 axis instruction CMR Setting range
139. F2 N6 is entered into the buffer storage when N3 N3 UA a is being executed By the relationship between them the correct offset is performed in the left VA figure N1 Offset start Fig 4 7 3 29 4 7 4 Corner offset circular interpolation G39 Format G39 Function By specifying G39 in offset mode during tool radius compensation corner offset circular interpolation can be specified The radius of the corner offset equals the offset value Whether the corner arc is valid or not is determined by bit parameter NO 4165 Explanation 1 When G39 is specified corner circular interpolation of which the radius equals offset value can be performed 2 G41 or G42 preceding this code determines whether the arc is CW or CCW G39 is a non modal G code 3 When G39 is programmed the arc is formed at the corner so that the vector at the end point of the arc is perpendicular to the start point of the next block It is shown as follows In offset mode N1 X10 N2 G39 Block N1 Block N2 Tool center path Programmed path a Offset vector Block N3 Fig 4 7 4 1 G39 4 7 5 Tool Offset Value and Offset Number Input by Program G10 Format G10L10P_R_ Geometric offset value of H code G10L12P_R_ Geometric offset value of D code G10L11P_R_ Wear offset value of H code G10L13P_R_ Wear offset value of D code P Tool offset number R Tool offset value in absolute mode G90 120 Chapter 4 Preparatory F
140. FK CW inner circular groove rough milling G24X YZRIJDFK CCW fine milling cycle G24 F ae within a circle G25 G25 X_Y ZR1IJDF K_ E CW fine milling cycle within a circle G26X YZRIJDFK CCW outer circle KS finishing cycle Reference point return T detection 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Reference point return aa point reference point return inal F Skipfunction 632 G338XYZRIJDFK aaa CW outer circle finishing cycle G33 G33X YZRIJLWQVUDFK F CCW rectangular groove rough milling G35 X_Y ZRIJL UDF EK CCW rectangular groove G35 F i rough milling cycle G36 GEX YZRIJLUDEK F CW rectangular groove ee AS rough milling cycle G37 G33XYZRIJLUDFK F CCW rectangular outside ee groove finishing cycle G38XYZRIJLUDFK CW rectangular outside groove finishing cycle Corner offset circular interpolation G40 8 o0 OD ak O J G41 G42 Q K OO G44 G49 G50 G51 G54 HE 01 Q9 G55 G56 G57 G58 G60 G6 G62 G63 G64 65 01 CO G Ol IQ G74 G76 G80 Group N 05 00 0 Q gt A Chapter 4 Preparatory Function Format Q 2 OO N G G Q KARA NO J gt lt gt lt N lt f Cc U lt N G43 G44 G49 lt x N G50 G51X Y Z P Written in a program Written in a block usually placed at the program beginning G60 X_Y_Z_ G61 G62 63 G64 G65 H_P i Q j R k G68 X_Y_R_
141. Fig 3 1 1 1 Structure of a program name 3 1 2 Sequence number and program block A program consists of many commands and an command unit is called a block see Fig 3 1 1 These blocks are separated by a code for end of program see Fig 3 1 1 In the manual the code of end of block is represented by a character Address N with a five digit sequence number behind it can be used at the beginning of the block see Fig 3 1 1 and the leading zero can be omitted Sequence numbers whether the sequence number is inserted is set by Parameter NO 0 5 or set the number in the setting page directly See Section 3 4 1 in Operation can be specified in a random order and the intervals between them can be unequal set by Data Parameter P210 They can be specified in all blocks or just in some important blocks However the numbers should be arranged in ascending order according to general machining sequence It is for convenience to insert sequence numbers to important parts of the program e g inserting sequence number for tool changing or when the index table moves to a new machining plane Note The N command is not taken as a line number when it and G10 are in the same block 3 1 3 Word A word See 3 1 3 1 is an element that composes a block It consists of an address and its following digits with sign or before the digits sometimes x 100 Address Figure T Word Fig 3 1 3 1 General structure of a word An address is
142. G EDGE FAIIING EDGE BOTH EDGE ON OFF DAA CO 17 08 95 PATH 1 Fig 3 8 5 Note Refer to GSK990MC CNC System PLC Installation and Connection Manual for the PLC 225 Il O O D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual ladder modification and relevant messages 3 9 Help Display HELP Press key to display help page There are 8 subpages including SYS INFO OPRT ALARM GCODE PARA MACRO HIPLC AD and CALCULA All of them can be viewed by corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 9 1 3 9 12 1 System information page In lt HELP gt page press soft key SYS INFO to enter system information page See fig 3 9 1 VERSION No MODIFY DATE RER SYS SOFTWARE YER 1 11test 5 2011 7 05 INTERPOLATION YER 08906022 DATA 17 08 27 FF es EEG OPRT ALARM G CODE FE gt Fig 3 9 2 2 OPRT page In lt HELP gt page press soft key LOPRT to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 9 2 MDI data MDI mode input value gt Enter Search NO any mode NO gt SER key POS interface Rel coord clear rel coord interface x Z gt cancel Rel coord mediating REL interface x Y Z gt Enter spindle Speed Set RES or ABS down keytspeed gt Enter PRT CNT clear REL or ABS interface down key gt Enter RUN TIME clear REL or ABS down key gt Enter MPG interrupt clear ALL interface xf Z gt down key g
143. G19 is not specified Example G18 X_Z ZX plane GOX Y Plane remains unchanged ZX plane In addition the movement code is irrelevant to the plane selection For example in the following code Y is not on the ZX plane and its movement is irrelevant to the ZX plane G18Y Note Only the canned cycle in G17 plane is supported at present For criterion or astringency it is strongly recommended that the plane be clearly specified in corresponding blocks when programming especially in the case that a system is used by different operators In this way accidents or abnormality caused by program errors can be avoided I 4 2 13 Polar coordinate start cancel G16 G15 Format G16 G15 Function G16 specifies start of the positioning parameter s polar coordinate mode G15 specifies cancel of the positioning parameter s polar coordinate mode Explanation No command parameters By setting G16 the coordinate value can be input with polar coordinate radius and angle The positive direction of the angle is the counterclockwise direction of the 1 axis in the selected plane and the negative direction is the clockwise direction Both the radius and angle can use either absolute code or incremental code G90 or G91 After G16 appears the 1 axis of the positioning parameter of the tool movement code is the polar radius in the polar coordinate system and the 2 axis is the polar angle in the polar coordinate system G15 can cancel the polar co
144. G69 G74 XYZRPF_ O4 XY ZRPP G76 XYZQRPFK Written in a block with other programs G Code Whether high speed and high precision mode is valid T Function Tool radius compensation cancel Left hand tool radius compensation Right hand tool radius compensation Tool length compensation in positive direction Tool length compensation in negative direction Tool length compensation cancel Scaling cancel Scaling Machine coordinate system selection Workpiece coordinate system 1 Workpiece coordinate system 2 Workpiece coordinate system 3 Workpiece coordinate system 4 Workpiece coordinate system 5 Workpiece coordinate system 6 Unidirectional positioning Exact stop mode Automatic corner override Tapping mode Cutting mode Macro program Command Coordinate rotation Coordinate rotation cancel Peck drilling cycle Left hand tapping cycle Fine boring cycle Canned cycle cancel 21 I O Ca 2 Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Whether high speed E Group Format a Function precision mode is valid G83 XY FA UF o Peck drilling T F Right hand tapping cycle TIT ea ring ses XYERE Boring cycle o a E T ER i aes 03 Written into blocks aoe ane Incremental programming G92X YZ Floating coordinate system Seung G95 T Feed per revolution G95 E G96 G96S_ Constant
145. G73 G83 Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 044 PCP DOV VGR VGR 1 Arbitrary gear ration of the spindle and position encoder enabled 0 Arbitrary gear ration of the spindle and position encoder disabled DOV 1 Override effective during rigid tapping retraction 0 Override ineffective during rigid tapping retraction PCP 1 High speed peck drilling cycle for flexible tapping 0 Standard peck drilling cycle for flexible tapping Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number gt 0 4 5 OVS OVU TDR NIZ S NIZ 1 To perform gig tapping smooting lt 0 Not perform rigid tapping smoothing TDR 1 To use the same constant during the rigid tapping advance and retraction 0 Not use the same constant during the rigid tapping advance and retraction OVU 1 10 retraction override for rigid tapping 0 1 retraction override for rigid tapping OVS 1 In rigid tapping selection and cancel signal for feedrate override enable 0 In rigid tapping selection and cancel signal for feedrate override disable Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 01416 ORI SSOG SSOG 1 For servo spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping 0 For following spindle control at the beginning of rigid tapping ORI 1 To perform spindle dwell when rigid tapping starts 0 Not perform spind
146. Hot Rec Get List Cancel Fig 11 1 3 4 B Data input PC CNC 1 Press system soft key IINPUT then the system prompts input waiting Ta se File 2 Click button or press Send File in the down menu of OPERATION to pop up Send File Dialog in the GSK com serial communication software as is shown in Fig 11 1 3 5 269 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Send File Dialog File list File path File Wame Par State Only send the edited file O file sed aa Fite Fig 11 1 3 5 3 Click button Add File in the Send File dialog then the Select Part Dialog pops up as in Fig 11 1 3 6 Select Part Dialog User Fart Sys Part Sys Upgrade Fig 11 1 3 6 Il 4 In the Select Part Dialog Select User Part when sending CNC part programs and custom macro programs select System Part when sending files such ladder PLC parameters PLC system parameter values tool offset values pitch offset values and system macro variables 5 After selecting the partition select the file or multiple files to be sent and click button Send 5 CD Q O to start the file sending as is shown in Fig 11 1 3 7 Sending File Hame Fartition Sent Pack Fig 11 1 3 7 6 After sending the file files Sent is displayed in the dialog as is shown in Fig 11 1
147. JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual W First cut depth in Z axis which is a downward distance from R level and is greater than 0 if the first cut exceeds the groove bottom it will cut at the bottom position Its absolute value is used if it is a negative one Q Cut depth of each cutting feed V Distance to the end surface to be machined in rapid feed which is greater than 0 Its absolute value is used if it is negative U Corner arc radius No corner arc transition if it is omitted The range of U is U which is greater than or equal to D 2 and smaller than 1 2 or J 2 whichever is smaller D Tool diameter number ranging from 1 256 DO is 0 by default The current tool diameter value is given by the specified number K Number of repeats Cycle process 1 Rapid positioning to the start point of helical feed within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level The diameter helical feed W width is obtained by radius compensation value multiplying the parameter NO 269 value 4 Feed to the rectangle center To mill a rectangular surface helically by an increment L from center outward each time Rapid return to R level along Z axis 7 Rapid positioning to star point of the helical feed in XY plane Rapid down to a position at which the distance to the end surface is V along Z axis 9 Z axis cuts downward for a Q V depth 10 Repeat the actions of 4 8 till the rectangula
148. MPG direction movement release 0600 The operation keboard is disconnected Please check its cable Address of relay or coil is not set Function code of input code does not exist Function instruction COM is not used correctly Corresponding relationship 1003 between COM and COME is wrong or function instruction is used between COM and COME User ladder beyond the maximum permissible linage or step number Reduce NET number END1 or END2 does not exist or incorrect END1 or END2 functional instruction is used or sequence of END1 or END2 is not correct Illegal output in NET Please check the output format 3 U9 gt O D 5 Q x xipueddy Gr M13 GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual or ecm Please contact with the supplier 4008 Functional instruction isnot inked corey moog Network horror ins O O O O 1010 Eating NET losses due topower offinladderedting 101 Address or data format is not tne one specified by tnis function Input tagan 4012 Address or aata is wrongly input Inputitagain 1013 legal characteris specified or data exceeds israr 1014 CTR address repeated Select again other unused CTR address os ET E LBL is wrong JMP is used again between JMP and LBL 1016 incomplete network structure Change tne ladder diagram 4017 Unsupported network exists Change tne ladder diagram TMR address repeated Select again other u
149. Machine coordinates and encoder feedback values exceed setting value _ error Called nests of macro program exceed 5 layers Modify the program KOR Macro program is used in DNC operation Modify the program 0124 Program end illegally without M30 M02 M99 or end sign Modify program Macro program format error Modify the program E 0126 Program cycle failure Modify the program O 0127 NC coexists with user macro instruction statement Modify the program m Sequence number in branch instruction is not at the range 0 99999 or the number is not found Modify the program The address of argument assignment Modify the program PLC axis control instruction is input to the axis controlled by CNC a 0130 ae lee Hi men ele epe nene rae a e ea the program 31 5 or more external alarm signals occur Check the ladder 5 or more external alarm signals occur Check the ladder diagram 0132 The alarm of the external alarm signal does not exist Check PLC E 0133 The system does not support axis instruction Modify the program 7 es Illegal angle instruction Modify the program Hoge nie eon Nef owe HE 0136 Illegal axis instruction Modify the progam axis instruction Modify the program Sequence number to be transferred by skip instruction is in loop 0137 Modify the program 0138 Cycle statement is wrong or skip instruction enters loop body Modify the T j program Appendix 2 Alarm List 0139 PLC axis change disabled Modify th
150. Manual The target position s coordinate value in the specified workpiece coordinate system is also the coordinate position to which the tool traverses A 15 60 40 I Fig 2 4 4 1 The tool traverses to point B from point A using point B s coordinate value in G54 workpiece coordinate system and its command is shown below G90 G54X10 Y30 Z20 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo 2 Incremental coordinate value Taking the current position as a coordinate origin the target position is relative to the current position s coordinate value Fig 2 4 4 2 The tool traverses to point B from point A and its command is shown below GO G91 X40 Y 30 Z 10 2 5 Modal and Non Modal Simple The modal is called that some address value is value once it is set till the address is set again For its another meaning after some functional word is set it is not needed to input again in the following block with the same function gt For example GO X100 Y100 Rpaidly position to X100 Y100 Chapter 2 Programming Fundamentals X20 Y30 Rpaidly position to X20 Y30 G0 is modal and it can be omitted G1 X50 Y50 F300 Execute linear interpolation to X50 Y50 feedrate 300mm min GO G 1 X100 Execute linear interpolation to X100 Y50 feedrate 300mm min G1 Y50 F300 are modal and can be omitted GO XO YO Rpaidly position to XO YO The initial state is the defaulted mode after the system is turned off See
151. NPUT page prompts Press INPUT key to confirm the cancellation after key Cal is pressed the page prompts Cancellation is Finished and the cursor returns to the password setting item The password is also automatically cancelled when the power is turned off 214 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 3 9 Graphic Display Press key to enter the graphic page which consists of two subpages KG PARA and HIGRAPH They can be switched between each other by corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 5 1 AXES XY 1 XZ 2 ZK 3 YZ 4 XYZ 5 ZXY GRPH MOD 0 GRPH CENTER 1 MINSMAX AUTO ERA ON 1 OFF SCALE GRPH CEN X COORDINATE GRPH CEN Y COORDINATE GRPH CEN Z COORDINATE MAX X MXY MAX Z MINX MINY MINZ DATA 17 02 14 ee PATH 1 FE ou Fig 3 5 1 1 Graphic parameter page Press soft key G PARA to enter this page see Fig 3 5 1 A Graphic parameter meaning AXIS set drawing plane with 6 selection modes 0 5 as shown in the next line Graphic mode set graphic display mode Automatic erasion When it is set to 1 the program graphic is erased automatically at next cycle start up after the program is finished Scale set drawing ratio Graphic center set the coordinates corresponding to the LCD center in workpiece coordinate system The maximum and minimum value The scaling and the graphic center are automatically set when
152. O G 13 6014 6015 G 16 G 17 6018 6019 GO20 G 21 G R G 23 1 1 0 C ke w V c O A 0 gt H O Z O O gt O O O 4 U a 2 T O E A Da i A gt Q v gt V O Z O Q T ab 0 TO C D 0 aD Cc D D a OD re 5 Cc Nn T O O O t O v OD ue O D E O 79 O D S Cc OD ta om OL 0 5 Cc C Ke prar O D C C O O O Cc Q 1 Q 1 Q Q Q Q AN C001 c0g2 C003 G 4 00000000 G 5 G06 G07 C008 C009 C010 G 11 al 2 oO H mm DATA O TO 1 2 D O z O amp Oo Ss L C D B O Q A z v O Z O lt Q V c lt Z Y x lt Raed gt D X E O D N D A O Q D D gt X lt m s wi a Mm D LL S c O D a oO O O II 0868660 86 86 Cu mi a gt lt Q x013 X X n Q Q Q 1 1 1 Q
153. P DOWN key to select one 196 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 2 Circle degree test Operation key A Digit key input all parameter values B B and key select a parameter item and key select functions collect and analyse C D key Input parameter values or confirm them and execute operations key Clear data and reset to the initial state Parameter items A Plane select the test plane G17 G18 G19 B Clockwise circle select the circle direction G02 G03 C Sample period the sample period is set according to the circle radius and federate The bigger the radius is the longer the sample period is the slower the federate is the longer the sample period is D Feedrate movement speed during testing E Enlargement factor circle analysis is the factor of error enlargement Operation steps Step 1 After all parameters are set or is pressed to select the collection function O D FR Q mp O 5 Step 2 Press to start the circular movement and start to collect data After the collection is completed or is pressed to select the analysis function to start the analysis function output the circle degree data and draw the circle error distribution diagram as follows 197 Il O O D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual STD R 0016 MAX DIS 0045 A
154. PATH 1 RIGIDITY CIRCUL MOVE MOYE RETURN Fig 3 3 5 3 1 rigid grade page 193 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual STD R 0000 MAX DIS 0 0000 MIN DIS 0 0000 CIRCUL SAMPLE ANALYS Press lt OR gt to select SAMPLE or ANALYSE DATA 14 37 13 PATH 1 RIGIDITY CIRCUL RETURN Fig 3 3 5 3 2 circular degree test page Note the coordinate display in the servo debugging page is determined by the least of the system s controllable axis number and the bus servo s slave number 3 3 5 3 2 Function Introduction 1 Rigid grade and parameter optimization operation function The function is to set the servo parameter to its optimum state of the servo performance Circular degree test The circular degree test can analog the circle executing the circle cutting movement and collect the motor s mask position to judge the synchronization of each servo axis response Il NO 3 3 5 3 3 Operation Explanations O D om Q O 5 1 Rigid grade debugging operation Explanation debugging and setting of the rigid grade are executed to one axis once Operation key A and key select an axis note after the system enters the optimization flow using the UP DOWN direction key cannot change the current used axis B and key reduce or increase the current axis rigid grade Press it every time and
155. Page Display and Data Modification and Setting NOTE ALWAYS NULL elit 16 56 48 PATH 1 Fig 3 3 3 1 1 2 System variable page Press soft key SYSTEM to enter this page 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1012 i A i Jey II 1008 1020 1009 ae o ie E E 2 NOTE INPUT INTERFACE SIGNAL 16 57 93 PATH 1 O CD Q O aA a a Fig 3 3 3 1 2 Refer to SECTION 4 9 2 in PROGRAMMING for the explanation and use of macro variables 3 3 3 2 Modification and Setting for Macro Variables 1 Select lt MDI gt mode 2 Press key J then soft key HIMACRO to enter macro variable page 3 Move the cursor to the variable number to be modified Method 1 Press page keys to display the page where the variable is to be modified move the cursor to the variable to be modified Method 2 Press key to search after inputting the variable number 4 Input a new value using number keys 185 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 5 Press key for confirmation and then the value will be input and displayed Note the system variables can be modified by assignation instead of manual modification 3 3 4 Display Modification and Setting for Screw Pitch Offset 3 3 4 1 Pitch Offset Display Press soft key PITCH to enter pitch offset page which is shown as follows fig 3 3 4 1 1 FEE ERE ER a ee KO HENCE o ow 0 o
156. Parameter List 0329 Rotational angle with no rotational angle specified in coordinate rotation Setting range 0 9999 9999 0330 Scaling with no scaling specified Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0331 Scaling override of the 1 axis Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0332 Scaling override of the 2 axis Setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0333 Scaling override of the 3 axis setting range 0 0001 9999 9999 0334 Dwell time unidirectional positioning Setting range 0 10 S 0335 Direction and overtravel amount of the 1 axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0336 Direction and overtravel amount of the 2 axis unidirectional positioning setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0337 Direction and overtravel amount of the 3 axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0338 Direction and overtravel amount of the 4 axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0339 Direction and overtravel amount of the 5 axis unidirectional positioning Setting range 1 64 0340 Number of coding preprocessing block 20 Setting range 99 9999 99 9999 0341 Buffer area size of ARM interpolation point 36 Setting range 0 99999 0342 The 1 axis zero return with low speed 200 Setting range O 1000 0343 The 2 axis zero return with low speed 200 0 317 gt Lej D 5 Q x Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User M
157. Programming and Operation User Manual G86 G98 G86 G99 Spindle CW Fs Initial level o wy Spindle CW A Point R level Spindle stop i Point Z I Fig 4 4 8 1 After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R And boring is performed from point R to point Z When the spindle stops at the bottom of the hole the tool is 7 a O Ca 2 S 3 3 5 vo retracted in rapid traverse Before specifying G86 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G86 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next boring operation Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle code the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching The canned cycle must be cancelled before the drilling axis is changed Boring Boring is not performed in a block which does not con
158. S 3 3 5 vo I mm a O Ca S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Limitation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G76 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G76 is replaced by other G codes in group 1 Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation Note In the instruction the tool infeed axis and the tool infeed direction are fixed and the tool infeed direction is not influenced by G68 coordinate system rotation 4 4 7 Boring cycle G85 Format G85 X_Y_Z R F_K_ Function This cycle is used for boring a hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R F_ Cutting feedrate K_ Repetitive number G85 G98 G85 G99 a SER Q Initial level om ARR O Point R level Point R Point Ry After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R and boring is perform
159. SK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual specified with a negative value the negative sign is ignored The hole bottom shift amount of Q is a modal value retained in the canned cycle which must be specified carefully because it is also used as the cutting depth for G73 and G83 Before specifying G87 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G87 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next boring operation If number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the block with the canned cycle code the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time The canned cycle can only be executed in G17 plane Boring In a block which contains no X Y Z or other additional axes boring is not performed Note The values of Z and R must be specified when the back boring cycle is b
160. Setting Page 1 Press soft key EWORK to enter coordinate system setting page the contents of which are shown as follows MACHINE G54 G55 O x mm X m X Q mm 5 D Y Q mm Y mm Y Q mm a r Z mm Z mm Z mm O EXT G56 G57 x mm X BBD mm X mm Y Q mm Y mm Y mm Z mm Z mm Z mm Jie LE 10 50 34 PATH 1 Te gt DR FAUTOMEAS INPUT INPUT RETURN Fig 3 4 2 1 Another 50 additional workpiece coordinate systems can be used besides the 6 standard workpiece coordinate systems G54 G59 coordinate systems as is shown in fig 3 4 2 2 Each coordinate system can be viewed or modified by page keys See section 4 2 9 Additional workpiece coordinate system in PROGRAMMING for details about its operation 201 Il O O D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual MACHINE G58 G59 x m X mh X Y fa Y mm Y e Z BBD mm zZ mm Z mm EXT G54 P l G54 P 2 x im X BBB m X a Y BBD mm 7 mm Y mm Z a Fi mm Z En INPUT 10 50 34 PATH 1 WORK BAUTOMEAS INPUT INPUT RETURN Fig 3 4 2 2 2 There are two ways to input coordinates 1 After entering this page in any mode move the cursor to the coordinate system to be altered INPUT Press the axis name to be assigned and then p
161. Start position mm aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Tool center path Start position Linear Linear Start position Linear Circular s y Programmed S path o Intersection Tool center path Intersection Note Intersection is the position where offset paths of Fool centernaih two successive blocks intersect p C Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an acute angle a lt 90 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which are set by bit parameter NO 40 0 106 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Linear Linear Linear Circul Start position Start position G42 G42 Tool center path d Movement around the outer side of a corner at an acute angle less than 1 a lt 1 Linear linear Programmed path N N Less than1 Fig 4 7 3 2 2 Tool movement in offset mode An alarm occurs and the tool is stopped if the offset plane is changed when the offset mode is being performed The tool movement in the offset mode is shown below a Movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 107 I Bulwuwesbold Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Linear Linear Linear Circular Programmed path S L Tool center path F Antersection Intersection Programmed path L Tool center path EG Circular gt Linear Circular Circular I Programmed path Programmed 8 path L Inte
162. T gt to copy the program files If the same program name already exists in the system disk the system prompts Please rename the file Here input the new program number e g O10 or 0100 and then press key lt INPUT gt to copy the CNC program files Note File LADCHI TXT is ineffective after transmitted to the system unless the power is turned off 3 To delete files from system disk U disk a Press key or to move the cursor to select the CNC program files to be deleted in the system disk U disk 275 O D FR Q ang O 5 SGT HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual b Press soft key DEL then DELETE CURRENT FILE is prompted at the bottom of the page Press key lt CANCEL gt to cancel the file deletion press key lt ENTER gt to delete the file II D s Q O 3 276 Appendix Appendix 217 Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual gt O O D 5 Q x 278 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List Parameter Explanation The parameters are classified into following patterns according to the data type 2 data types and data value range Data type Effective data range Remark The default value is given by the CNC and user can modify the setting by requirement Data Specified according The default value is given by the CN
163. TER STEP MANUAL MODE X 1 WHEN MOVE TO P1 4 PRESS lt MEASURE gt Y 2 PRESS lt START gt SET IT TO COORDINATE WORK G54 Pix a Ply a CENTER Cx 0AA fj ALU Pex a Pey a CENTER Cy x Pax a Pay a Y P4x a Pay a Z Manual 1 Automatic 15 21 49 PATH 1 SETTING WORK EMEASURE HDATA EPASSHORD Fig 3 4 3 1 2 Manaul halving operation A Item explanation 1 measure mode Il O manual 1 automatic 2 workpiece type 1 hole or outer circle 2 convex worktable or groove O O D s Q O 5 3 coordinate system selection S G54 G59 654 P1 P50 after the measure is completed the middle point is set to the required set coordinate system 4 measure a point A When the workpiece type is a hole or outer circle quantity of the measured point is 3 P1 P3 the measure sequence is not fixed when the three points coincide any point of them is coordinates of the circle center when the three points are on the one straight line coordinates of the circle center cannot be counted some point or all points must be measured to count the coordinates B When the workpiece type is a convex worktable or groove quantity of the measured point is 4 P1 P4 the measure sequence is not fixed P1 P2 is separate X s two points P3 P4 is separate Y s two points Coordinate of X s center point is counted by P1 and P2 X coordinates coordi
164. Y 12 0 EDIT indicator Y 1e 1 AUTO indicator Y 12 2 INPUT indicator Y 12 3 ZERO indicator Yale 4 SINGLE STEP indicator Y 12 5 MANUAL indicator Y 12 6 HANDWHEEL indicator Y 12 7 DNC indicator Y A13 0 Spindle reverse indicator Y 13 1 Spindle forward indicator Y 13 2 Spindle ovrd cancel indicator Y 13 3 X zero return indicator Y 13 4 Y zero return indicator Y 13 5 Z zero return indicator P 1 7 PATH 1 Fig 3 9 11 The PLC addresses signs meanings are described in this page and you may get the corresponding 230 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting information here if you are unfamiliar with these addresses 8 CALCULA page In lt HELP gt page press soft key CALCULA to enter this page See fig 3 9 12 ar x sin cos sqrt DATAT 17 20 09 PATH 1 v mer rn Fig 3 9 12 The operation formats of addition subtraction multiplication division sine cosine extraction are shown in this page You can move the cursor to the blank space where the data is to be input then INPUT input the data and press key After the data is input the system will calculate automatically and output the result to the blank behind sign If the user needs to input data to calculate again press key to clear all the data in the page O D FR Q ang O 5 231 SGT HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming an
165. Y are O on the machine of XY the floating coordinate system can be established by G92 and the XY machine coordinates of this point can also be written to the parameters of G5d4 G59 Il workpiece coordinate systems for system use 7 Then the operation using trial cutting and halving method to align the center of the square O O D s Q O 5 workpiece is finished With the assignment for the relative coordinate and halving function setting the assignment speed is increased and the operation is more conv _1 X _1 Xx Fig 4 1 5 1 Note 1 This system can only set and input the coordinates displayed at the relative position All the places where the offset value is modified can set the positions of the relative coordinates Note 2 Bearing operation function The displayed coordinates can be set after addition or subtraction operation is performed to it Note 3 After the coordinate system is set the coordinate system set by G92 will be lost due to 236 Chapter 4 Manual Operation mechanical zero return or G54 G59 workpiece coordinate system calling but the one of which the machine coordinates are written to the G54 G59 workpiece coordinate systems by parameters will not be lost It is recommended to use the latter method 4 2 Spindle Control 4 2 1 Spindle Rotation CCW h id Specifies S speed in MDI mode in Manual MPG Step mode press this key to rotate the spindle counterclockwise
166. a disordered after power off please ensure correct location 7 0102 Driver motor does not match CNC 0103 Bus communication error Please check reliability of the cable 325 gt O D 5 Q x gt O D 5 Q x Gr 44153 E GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0104 macrnezeropontsangenr i o onos Tmeoueror vie da isteni SSS S S SCSt iCS 0106 Drive unit is not consistent with gear ratio of servo parameter 0107 Drive unit seb is not consistent with servo unit parameter ors Prasemsnuas OOOO OOO Postion data exceeds tne alowed range Plessereset a Calculated result exceeds the allowed range 1047 to 10 29 0 and 10 29 to 1047 0112 Zero including tan900 is specified as a divisor 0113 Unusable functional instruction is specified in user macro program at the program 0114 G39 format error Modify the program ons Variable value can not be specified O N can not be specified as variables in user macro program one A variable is on the left of the assignment statement while value assignment to it is not allowed Modify the program 0117 G10 online modification is not supported by this parameter Please modify the program 0118 Nest exceeds the upper limit 5 Modify the program Instructions M00 M01 M02 M30 M98 M99 M06 can not in a same block 1 M instructions Part of Part of setting is restored is restored
167. able Table 4 4 2 Data designation Explanation eos TT G81 Z R F can all be omitted since the hole machining mode and data are the same as those specified in Drill the hole for the length Y once by G81 Move only in X axis direction relative to the position of hole 3 Perform hole machining by G82 using the hole machining data Z R and F specified in and Pin Since all the data are cancelled in Z and R need to be re specified F is identical with that in so it can be omitted P is not required in this block and it is saved It is the hole machining identical with that in except for Z value And there is movement only in X axis at the hole position Perform G89 hole machining using Z specified in R and P in F in as the machining data G0O1X_Y_ Cancel hole machining mode and clear hole machining data A Absolute code and incremental code in canned cycle G90 G91 The change of G90 G91 along drilling axis is shown as Fig 4 4 2 Usually it is programmed by G90 if it is programmed by G91 Z and R are processed according to the specified signs and 55 I 7 O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual G90 absolute instruction G91 incremental instruction l a a A A R Point R Z Point R A lt N ig Point Z Absolute Relative Point Z I A
168. absolute value is used if it is negative D Tool diameter number ranging from 1 256 DO is 0 by default The tool diameter value is obtained by the given number K Number of repeats Cycle process 1 Rapid positioning to a location within XY plane 88 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code 2 Rapid down to point R level 3 Feed to the machining start point at hole bottom 4 To make circular interpolation by the transition arc 1 from the start point 5 To make circular interpolation for the whole circle by inner arc path of finish milling 6 To make circular interpolation by transition arc 4 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial level or R level according to code G98 or G99 Command path G24 CCW fine milling cycle within a full circle G25 CW fine milling cycle with a full circle Y Y I Inner circle border Tool center path Tool center path 7 a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Fig 4 6 2 1 Note The NO 12 1 should be set to 1 when this code is used Example Fine milling a circular groove that has been rough milled as follows by canned cycle code G24 Y Z Y Initial level so LI _ z 50 _ _ __ _J_ _ p _Point R level Z 5 __ i i 50 _ S 5 Inner circle border Tool center path Fig 4 6 2 2 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G24 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 J10 D1 F800 Canned cycle starts and goes down to the bottom to perform the inner circle f
169. achine s Z axis wear compensations the compensation conditions default 1 0 Setting range 0 50 0185 When the machine s Z axis wear compensations the 1 mode Setting range 0 50 0 invalid 1 up 2 down 3 up and down 0186 The machine s Z axis wear compensation amount 0 5 mm Setting range 0 0 5 0187 Z backlash compensation conditions default 1 Setting range 0 50 0188 Z axis backlash compensation accumulated 0 02 distance default 0 02 Setting range 0 0 5 0189 Reverse precision by backlash compensation 0 0100 X0 0001 Setting range 0 0001 1 0000 mm Set a p 189 x 0 0001 in reverse feeding if the feeding of single servo period is over a the backlash compensation begins gt Lej D 5 Q x Therefore in machining outer circle contour with a large radius in order to make the offset position not to exceed the quadrant it needs to set a smaller precision While in machining a curve surface in order to not to perform backlash compensation in a fixed point of the tool path to form a swollen ridge it needs to set a larger precision to make the clearance compensation to be distributed in a certain width 0190 Backlash compensation amount of the 1 axis 0 0000 Setting range Metric 0 5 0 5 mm Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch Rotary axis 0 5 0 5000 deg 309 Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0191 Backlash compensation amount o
170. ading the machining shape automatically calculating the whole shape 0 Stop prereading smooth control function 1 Perform smooth processing according to the length 2 Perform smooth processing according to the length and the angle 0410 Precision smooth and balance coefficient 10 0000 Setting range 0 0000 10 0000 gt O D 5 Q x To realize high precision control user only needs to set parameter value of precision smooth and balance coefficient The parameter which includes 0 10 11 grades in total can control the grade of machining effect 410 0 indicates high precision control In position precision rather than smooth is strictly controlled It is especially beneficial for machining the materials with high requirements for subtle edges and corners such as characters 1 10 Return to high speed and high precision control The lower the grade the better the precision The higher the grade the better the smoothness The parameter can be adjusted to achieve the best results according to the actual machining situation 0411 Spline shape control coefficient 10 0000 setting range 0 0000 10 0000 0412 Fitting precision control of small lines 1 0000 Setting range 10 0000 50 0000 321 Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0413 Roundness smooth control coefficient n1 3 0000 Setting range 0 0000 50 0000 0414 Roundness smooth control coefficient n2 0 0000
171. ae This manual describes the various matters concerning the operations of GSK990MC system as much as possible However it is impossible to give detailed descriptions to all the unnecessary or unallowable operations due to space limitation and product specific applications Therefore the matters not specially described herein should be considered as impossible or unallowable ae This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights are reserved It is illegal for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability er IW BIE GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual II Warnings and Precautions Preface Dear users It is our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this machining center CNC system of GSK990MC series produced by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd This book is Programming and Operation Manual which introduces the programming and operation of the machining center CNC system of GSK990MC series in detail To ensure the product works in a safe and efficient state please read this manual carefully before installation and operation Warnings L improper operations may cause unexpected accidents Only those qualified staff are allowed to operate this system Special notes The power supply fixed on in the cabinet is exclusively used for the CNC sy
172. aeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeesaaeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeaees 33 4 2 9 Additional workpiece Coordinate SYStOM cccccceececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeseeeesseesseeeeseeeseeeesseneess 35 4 2 10 Selecting machine Coordinate system G53 1 W W W u u ddssssssseneseen kk kk k RER ERE ERE ERE E RE ERE REE SEERE ERE REE ERE R ERE nne 35 4 2 11 Floating Coordinate system G92 W W W W u ssssssssnneseen kk tk RE ERR RER ERNE REESE REESE REE E ERE E SEERE SEEREN ERNE ERE REE ERE REEL n 36 42 12 Pl he selettionG17IG FG sks an r aa A Area AEE eae ee pa eee 37 42 13 Polar coordinate start Gancel G1G G15 soci eevee rcs EET ee Re 38 A 2A Sam ina Diane G9 TG G0 eso h sos et a enn Seber acne ale weld al E daar eee dne BEEN SLS AERO ga Be tele 40 4 2 15 Coordinate system rotation G68 G69 W W X u usssssssnnsneenkkk tk kk ER ERE ERE RER E ER ER ERE REESE REE E REESE ERE E ERE SEERE ERE EL EE 43 42 160 Skip TUMGUON GIT eiri eea a ide Ten Ed Re ede ties eds en gar st dre mede dn stella ae ar EA 46 42 17 inchimetric conversion G2UGZT 26 42 0088 noe ae re en ROA eee ee le 48 4 2 18 Optional angle chamfering COrner rOUNCING ccccseccceceeeceeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesseeeeesaees 48 4o Relerence pont G COGS isis ees ihe ER a eae a eee 49 4 3 1 Reference point return G28 fares es occa bein s Jed lest aoa caleanseasn sex eonc oe ue cutee ES REE REE SEERE oda ERE ERE ERE RER kr seas 50 4 3 2 2nd 3rd 4th reference point
173. alarm ignored 0 Spindle driver alarm not ignored EALM 1 Emergency stop alarm ignored 0 Emergency stop alarm not ignored LALM 1 Limit alarm ignored 0 Limit alarm not ignored FALM 1 Feed axis driver alarm ignored 0 Feed axis driver alarm not ignored 295 Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Standard setting 0000 0000 2 Data Parameter Parameter No Parameter definiation Default value 0000 I O channel input output device 0 Xon Xoff 1 XModem 2 USB Setting range 0 2 It is set to O or 1 for communication between CNC and PC via RS232 interface and set to 2 when CNC connecting with U flash disk 0001 Baudrate of communication channel DNC 38400 Setting range 0 115200 unit BPS 0002 Baudrate of communication channel file 115200 transmission Setting range O0 115200 unit BPS 0004 To be extended Setting range 0 0 0005 Axes controlled by the CNC Setting range 3 5 0006 CNC language selection Setting range 0 3 0 Chinese 1 English 2 Russian 3 Spanish 0008 Ethernet bus slave station MDT data package size 6 Setting range 0 20 0009 Max retransmission times of Ethernet bus 0 Setting range 0 30 0010 External workpiece origin offset amount along the 1 0 0000 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm gt O O D 5 Q x 0011 External workpiece origin offset amount along the 0 0000 2 axis Setting ra
174. am the CNC system acts by the subprogram When an Command for returning to the main program is executed in the subprogram the CNC system will return to the main program and execute the following blocks The program execution sequence is shown in Fig 3 2 1 Main program Subprogram Command 2 Command 2 Calling subprogram M99 Returning to main program The structure of a subprogram is consistent with that of a main program Fig 3 2 1 16 Chapter 3 Structure of an Part Program If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern the sequence or pattern can be stored as a subprogram in the memory to simplify the program The subprogram can be called in Auto mode usually by M98 in the main program Besides the subprogram called can also call another subprogram The subprogram called from the main program is called the one level subprogram Up to 4 levels subprogram can be called in a program Fig 3 2 2 The last block of a subprogram is the Command M99 used for returning to the main program After the return the blocks following the subprogram calling block are executed If the last block of a subprogram is ended with M02 or M03 the system will also return to the main program and proceed to the next block just as ended with M99 When a main program is ended with M99 its execution will be repeated Main program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram I mm a O Ca A S 3 3 5 vo One le
175. ame block the M code is executed while the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block S instruction when the commanded spindle speed exceeds the max spindle speed during tapping P257 the spindle upper speed in the course of tapping cycle an alarm occurs the gear of the max spindle speed during the rigid tapping is determined by P294 P296 F instruction when the specified F value exceeds the cutting feedrate s upper value P96 sets the 81 I 7 O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual upper value the system takes the upper value as the reference P instruction P is a modal code the least value is set by P281 the max value is set by P282 P value is less than the least value and the system runs with the least value when it is more than the max value the system run with the max value Axis switch must cancel the fixed cycle before switching the tapping axis No 206 alarm occurs when the tapping axis is changed in the rigid tapping mode Override during tapping the feedrate and spindle speed overr
176. and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM 13 FILE DIR LADDER PLC 11 07 04 11 10 11 07 12 08 50 OPARA PLC 11 07 05 10 02 11 07 11 89 58 PARAMETER 11 07 07 16 04 082014 11 7 7 09 15 OCUTTER COMP 005663 11 07 09 09 52 OPITCH COMP 007000 11 07 08 13 53 11 07 05 16 02 OMACRO YAR 11 07 05 16 02 11 07 05 16 02 OMACRO PRG 11 07 11 16 49 561364 11 07 06 11 14 PART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 08 54 24 PATH 1 FE Ee amp see Fig 11 2 2 1 1 To copy CNC program files to U disk from the system disk gt a Press key to switch the cursor to the file directory b Press key t or to move the cursor to select the CNC program files to be copied in the system disk c Press soft key COPY then the systems prompts COPY TO USB DISC New Name as is shown in Fig 11 2 2 2 CUR DISK CNC DISK FILE NUM 13 FILE DIR LADDER PLC 11 07 04 11 10 OPARA PLC 000100 11 07 05 10 02 oaasog 11 07 11 09 58 O PARAMETER 11 07 07 16 04 11 07 07 09 15 O CUTTER COMP TETEE OPITCH COMP 5 11 07 08 13 53 11 07 05 16 02 OMACRO YAR 11 07 05 16 02 11 07 05 16 02 OMACRO PRG 11 07 11 16 49 581364 11 07 06 11 14 PART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 000002 8 54 55 COPY TO USB DISK New Name PATH 1 Fig 11 2 2 2 d If renaming for CNC program files is not required press key l
177. anual Setting range 0 1000 0344 The 3 axis zero return with low speed 200 Setting range 0 1000 0345 The 4 axis zero return with low speed 200 Setting range 0 1000 0346 The 5 axis zero return with low speed 200 Setting range 0 1000 0347 The 1 reference points absolute position when 65000 using an absolute rotary encoder Setting range 0 131071 0348 The 2 reference points absolute position when 65000 using an absolute rotary encoder Setting range 0 131071 0349 The 3 reference points absolute position when 65000 using an absolute rotary encoder Setting range 0 131071 0350 The 4 reference points absolute position when 65000 using an absolute rotary encoder Setting range 0 1310771 0351 The 5 reference point s absolute position when 65000 using an absolute rotary encoder Setting range 0 1310771 0352 Acceleration time constant of zero return with high speed Setting range 3 400 0353 Acceleration time constant of zero return with low 100 speed Setting range 3 400 0354 DSP unsuccessful start times Setting range 0 999999 0355 CNC successful start times Setting range 0 999999 0356 Number of machined workpiece Setting range 0 9999 0357 Total workpiece to be machined Setting range 0 9999 gt O O D 5 Q x 3 OO Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0358 Accumulative time of power on h Setting range 0 99999 0359 Accumulative time of days days
178. are subject to change without notice al k ES VI GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Warnings and Precautions I PROGRAMMING GSK990MC This part gives an introduction to the specification product portfolio parameter configuration instruction codes as well as program format of GSK990MC II OPERATION This part gives an introduction to the operation of the machining center CNC system of GSK990MC APPENDIX This part gives an introduction to the use of the machining center CNC system and its accessories of GSK990MC VII OHIE SI AIS EN MA ONE SGEN Programming and Spe alon set Manual Safety responsibility Manufacturer Responsibility Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated on the design and configuration of the provided CNC systems Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC and its accessories Be responsible for the provided information and advice User Responsibility Be trained with the safety operation of CNC system operation procedures and familiar with the safety operation Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding changing or modifying the original CNC systems and accessories Be responsible for the danger caused by failing to observe the operation maintenance installation and storage in the manual This user manual shall be kept by the end user Thank you for your kind support when you are using the
179. ation Explanation ccccccccccssscccssssceceesssseeeeesseeeeeesaees 203 3 4 3 2 Toolsetting Function Introduction and Operation Explanation cccccccsscccssssecessssseeeessssseeeeesaes 208 3 4 4 Backup Restoration and Transmission for Data ccccccccsecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeteeetaneeneeteeeaneeees 211 3 4 5 Setting and Modification for Password Authority ccccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeesaees 214 SENE Ce 167 9 ea 0 Fo Lam rea nar Reel Pea ne Sat en OTe ete nv ED STN DT ETE DTT OT RSET eal EP RTE 215 3 0 Diagnosis DIDIA Veeran i ae EN EEA CAN OE NEAN ENE A OANA 216 3021 Diagnoss Data DIS DIAY ceres A EA RREN E Eo N 217 26T Signal Parameter DiS BlI yeere n a a RO A a E E a ee 217 36 2 system Parameter DiS Play cscri a a Er a eee erinas 219 26 139 BUS Parameter DISBIAV rr A EN Area eN aged 219 3614 JDSP Parameter Dis PIA seroren anA N 220 30 Lo WIV Parameter Dis HIM rieni i te nel ele N NONN 220 302 Sga Slates VIG WING cer A a a ERE een 221 oY ANOIS EAE AE EEEE EAE 221 IO PEC DISPYT EN TANET EENE ee RAAN N E 224 GS MERE AEDS DAY rare tre a T E EET CE 226 CHAPTER 4 MANUAL OPERATION tissccesesutscust2uctvasueveseesctasuvesesucecucdtescus sacaste ehsa Ass isisi 233 4 1 Coordinate Axis M veMeN besss N 233 Akt Manual FeO senie E O A O EE Een ae REED ENES 233 41 2 Manual Rapid Traverse aa BE e A AEA ed acaue nude escenieeteasieadcmens ERE 233 4 1 3 Manual Feed
180. bility exists move the tool to the place where no obstruction occurs and then perform restart Note 2 the program restart s block is not always the block which is interrupted at midway the system run can be started from any blocks The method is the same that of the above but pressing the direction key in the MDI mode of the Step 4 can preload the modal value s N line number to directly define it and pressing Input key can confirm it Then enter the Mode page to input the corresponding modal code and M code Note 3 Do not perform the resetting during the program execution from block research at restarting to restarting or the restarting must be done from the first step 264 Chapter 10 Eidt Operation Note 4 If there is no absolute position detector the reference point return must be performed before the restart after power on Note 5 The restart function of the system does not support the program containing subprograms currently Note 6 The program restart function does not support the rotary image scale polar coordinate mode programs Note 7 The program restart function does not support the fixed cycle programs Note 8 The program restart function does not support DNC on line machining programs Note 9 The program restart function does not support macro programs type A B 10 2 Program Management 10 2 1 Program Directory Search PROGRAM Press key then press soft key DIR to enter the program
181. bit parameter NO 03 0 6 G20 or G21 must be specified in a separate block 4 2 18 Optional angle chamfering corner rounding Format gt L_ Chamfering R_ Corner rounding Function When the codes above are added to the end of the block specifying linear interpolation G01 or circular interpolation G02 G03 a chamfering or corner rounding is added automatically outside the corner during machining Blocks specifying chamfering or corner rounding arc can be specified consecutively Explanation 1 Chamfering after L specify the distance from the virtual corner point to the start and the 48 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code end points of the corner The virtual corner point is the corner point that exists if chamfering is not performed As the following figure shows 1 G91 GOT X100 L10 2 X100 Y100 Inserted chamfering block Virtual corner point Fig 4 2 18 1 2 Corner R after R specify the radius for the corner rounding as shown below 1 G91 G01 X100 R10 2 X100 Y100 Center of an arc with radius R Fig 4 2 18 2 Restrictions 1 Chamfering and corner rounding can only be performed in a specified plane and these functions cannot be performed for parallel axes 2 If the inserted chamfering or corner rounding block causes the tool to go beyond the Original interpolation move range an alarm is issued 3 Corner rounding cannot be specified in a threading block 4 When the values
182. bles In the conditional expression using EQ or NE lt vacant gt and zero have different affects In the other conditional expressions lt vacant gt is taken as 0 gt Typical program The program below calculates the sum of numbers 1 to 10 00001 1 0 2 1 WHILE 2 LE 10 DO 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 END 1 M30 I Notes When a macro program is called by G65 and M S T D and F are used for transferring variables only positive integers can be transferred e The line number N code cannot be in the same line with WHILE DO END or the loop is ineffective e Loop and skip instructions cannot be used in DNC mode A GOTO statement starts searching at the beginning of the program and skips when the first corresponding line number is retrieved Try not to use the same N code in one program e When the variable number is expressed by a decimal fraction the system will remove the decimal part with carry ignored The values of local variables are retained before the main program ends They are common to each subprogram mm a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo 142 Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Function M Code Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Function M Code The M codes of this machine available for users are listed as follows Table 5 1 m Funai ma The program ends and returns to the program beginning the machining number increases by 1 mo the program ends and returns to the program beginning the machining
183. bles common variables and system variables depending on their different applications and characteristics 1 Null variable 0 This variable is always null so no value can be assigned to it 2 Local variables 1 50 they can only be used for data storage in a macro such as the results of operations When the power is turned off or the program ends M30 or M02 is executed they are cleared automatically whether the local variables are cleared or not after reset is set by bit parameter NO 5257 When a macro is called arguments are assigned to local variables 3 Common variables 100 199 500 999 whether common variables 100 199 are cleared or not after reset is set by bit parameter NO 52 6 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo The common variables can be shared among the main program and the custom macros called by the main program Namely the variable I in a custom macro program is the same as those in other macro programs Therefore the common variable I of operation result of a macro program can be used in other macro programs The usage of common variables is not specified in this system users thus can define it freely Table 4 9 2 1 100 199 They are cleared at power off and all are initialized to null at power on Common 500 999 variable Data is saved in files and it will not be lost even if the power is turned off 4 System variables They are used for reading and writing a varie
184. block of which the number is specified by 100 Logic AND logic OR and logic NOT codes Example G65 H01 P 101 Q3 G65 H01 P 102 Q5 G65 H11 P 100 Q 101 Q 102 The binary expression for 5 is 101 for 3 is 011 and the operation result is 100 7 G65 H12 P 100 Q 101 Q 102 The binary expression for 5 is 101 for 3 is 011 and the operation result is 100 1 5 Macro variable alarm Example G65 H99 P1 Macro variable 3001 alarm G65 H99 P124 Macro variable 3124 alarm Example for custom macro 1 Bolt hole cycle Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code To drill N equal spaced holes on the circumference of the circle whose center is the reference point X0 YO and radius is R with an intial angle A eference point X0 YO D Hole N 1 Fig 4 9 4 2 X0 YO is the coordinates of the reference point in bolt hole cycle R Radius A Initial angle N Number Parameters above use the following variables 500 X coordinate value of the reference point X0 501 Y coordinate value of the reference point Y0 502 Radius R 503 Initial angle A 504 N numbers If N gt 0 the rotation is CCW and the number is N If N lt O the rotation is CW and the number is N The variables below are used for the operation in macro 100 For the counting of the hole machining I 101 The final value of the counting N IE 102 The angle of hole 61 103 X coordinate of hole Xi
185. by MDI during dwell disabled 0 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI during dwell enabled Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0 3 1 G13 G91 G19 G18 G01 G01 1 G01 mode at power on or clearing 0 600 mode at power on or clearing G18 1 G18 plane at power on or clearing 0 Not G01 at power on or clearing G19 1 It depends on parameter No31 1 0 When G19 1 please set G18 to 0 GIT Gis G19 mode p 0 oO G17 mode X Y plane a a G18 mode Z X plane 1 0 G19 mode Y Z plane G91 1 To set for G91 mode at power on or clearing 0 To set for G90 mode at power on or clearing G13 1 To set for G13 mode at power on or clearing 0 To set for G12 mode at power on or clearing Standard setting 0010 0000 System parameter number 0 3 2 AD2 AD2 1 Make alarm if two or more same addresses are specified in a block 0 Do not make alarm if two or more same addresses are specified in a block Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number 013 3 M3B M30 M02 M02 1 To return to block beginning when M02 is to be executed 0 Not to return to block beginning when M02 is to be executed M30 1 To return to block beginning when M30 is to be executed 0 Not to return to block beginning when M30 is to be executed M3B 1 At most three M codes allowable in a section o
186. ceeds its range or is not specified In rigid tapping max S value is specified by the parameter Change the parameter setting or modify the program G84 or G74 is executed after specifying M code M29 rigid tapping signal is not 1 Check ladder diagram to find the reason Plane shifting is specified in rigid tapping 0207 The specified distance in rigid tapping is too long or too short 0208 This instruction can not be executed in G10 mode Please cancel G10 mode first Restart of the program is not supported by scaling revolution polar coordinate modes 0213 and tool compensation dynamically Scaling revolution and polar coordinate do not support modifying coordinate system and tool compensation dynamically gt 3 Z O J CD se Go N 8 Appendix 2 Alarm List Metric inch switching is not supported by scaling revolution and polar coordinate mode Metric inch switching is not supported by tool changing macro program Reference return is not performed before auto run started Parameter format error 1 N or R is not input 0231 2 Parameter number is not defined 3 Address P is not defined in bit parameter input L50 4 N P R exceed the range 3 or more axes are specified as helical interpolation axis Device connected to RS 232 C is being used Specified record end sign Parameter setting of program restart is wrong No decimal point Address repetition error co An illegal G code is spec
187. cel compensation in tool radius compensation 0 To move to the intermediate point by G28 and reserve compensation in tool radius compensation ODI 1 Tool radius compensation value set by diameter 0 Tool radius compensation value set by radius Standard setting 1000 0100 CCN System parameter number _ G39 PUT 1 Distance and speed parameters input are consistent with display unit and ae CNC input unit 0 Distance and speed parameters units and display unit are metric units G39 1 Corner rounding effective in radius compensation 0 Corner rounding ineffective in radius compensation CNI 1 Interference check enabled in radius compensation 0 Interference check disabled in radius compensation Standard setting 0110 0000 system parameter number gt O D 5 Q x 291 Gr MiB F GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0 4 2 RD2 RD1 RD1 1 To set the retraction direction of G76 G87 negative 0 To set the retraction direction of G76 G87 positive RD2 1 To set the retraction axis of G76 G87 Y 0 To set the retraction axis of G76 G87 X Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 4 3 QZA QZA 1 To make alarm if cut in depth is not specified in peck drilling G73 G83 0 Not to make alarm if cut in depth is not specified in peck drilling
188. ch OFF 1 Program switch ON When the program switch is set to 0 it is forbidden to edit any program Il O O D s Q O 5 3 Input unit Set whether the input unit of the program is metric or inch 0 Metric 1 Inch 4 I O channel It is set by users as required e g if using U disk to perform DNC machining set the channel to 2 0 1 RS232 0 for selecting Xon Xoff protocol 1 for selecting Xmodem protocol 2 USB 5 Automatic sequence number 0 The system will not insert the sequence number automatically when the program is input with keyboard in edit mode 200 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 1 When the program is input with keyboard in edit mode the system will automatically insert the sequence number The sequence number increment between blocks is set by data parameter P210 6 Sequence number increment Set the increment when inserting sequence number automatically Range 0 1000 7 Stop sequence number This function can be used to stop the program execution at a specified block but it is not effective unless both the program number and block number are specified E g 00060 program number means program number O00060 00100 sequence number means block number N00100 Note When the stop sequence is set to 1 the single block stop is not executed 8 Date and time Users can set the system date and time here d Press to confirm the input 3 4 2 Workpiece Coordinate
189. ch group are cleared after reset or emergency stop is determined by bit parameter NO 35 0 7 and NO 36 0 7 Note 8 If the rotation scaling Command and the Command of group 01 or that of group 09 share the same block the rotation scaling Command will be taken and the modes of group 01 or group 09 THY TI SIERO PED fl 1 Bulluwesbold 4 o 22 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code are changed If the rotation scaling Command and the Command of group 00 share the same block an alarm occurs 4 2 Simple G Codes 4 2 1 Rapid Positioning G00 Code format G00X Y Z_ Function G00 command The tool moves to the position in the workpiece system specified with the absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse speed The bit parameter NO 12 1 sets to select one of the following two tool paths Fig 4 2 1 1 1 Linear interpolation positioning The tool path is the same as linear interpolation G01 The tool is positioned within the shortest time at a speed not more than the rapid traverse speed of each axis 1 2 Nonlinear interpolation positioning The tool is positioned at the rapid traverse speed of each axis respectively The tool path is usually not straight Non linear interpolation Linear interpolation positioning N positioning Start position End position End position Fig 4 2 1 1 Explanation 1 After G00 is executed the system changes the current tool move mode for G00 mode Whet
190. ck P is a modal code with its min value set by data parameter P281 and max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes effect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect P cannot be stored as modal data if it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle code the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block which contains no X Y Z or other additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S2000 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops Limitation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bi
191. cklash compensation RVCS 1 backlash compensation type ascending or decending 0 backlash compensation type fixed frequency Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 019 ALMS ALM5 ALM4 ALM3 ALM2 ALM1 ALM1 1 an alarm occurs when the 1 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 1 0 an alarm occurs when the 1 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 0 ALM2 1 an alarm occurs when the 2 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 1 2 0 an alarm occurs when the 2 axis drive unit s alarm signal is O E ALM3 1 an alarm occurs when the 3 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 1 2 0 an alarm occurs when the 3 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 0 a ALM4 1 an alarm occurs when the 4 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 1 0 an alarm occurs when the 4 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 0 ALM5 1 an alarm occurs when the 5 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 1 0 an alarm occurs when the 5 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 0 ALMS 1 an alarm occurs when the 5 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 1 0 an alarm occurs when the 5 axis drive unit s alarm signal is 0 Standard setting 0010 0000 System parameter number 01 2 0 UHSM APC MAPC USNO HVR ITL ITL 1 all axes interlock signal effective 0 all axes interlock signal ineffective HVR 1 use HVR function 0 donot use HVR function USNO 1 bus servo s old version 0 us ser
192. codes in group 1 Tool radius compensation in the fixed cycle command the tool radius compensation is ignored the system calls the tool radius compensation specified by the program during the tool infeed 4 6 4 Rectangular Groove Rough Milling G33 G34 Command format G33 G98 G99 X Y Z R L J L W Q V UE D_ F_ K _ G34 Function These codes are used for linear cutting cycle by the specified parameter data from the rectangle center till the programmed rectangular groove is machined Explanation G33 CCW rectangular groove rough milling G34 CW rectangular groove rough milling X Y The start point within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference plane in G91 R R reference plane which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to the start point of this block in G91 l Rectangular groove width in X axis which should be greater than The setting value of data parameter P269 tool radius tool radius 2 and the helical feed radius should be smaller than 1 2 tool radius J Rectangular groove width in Y axis which should be greater than The setting value of data parameter P269 tool radius tool radius 2 and helical feed radius should be smaller than J 2 tool radius L Cutting width increment within a specified plane which should be less than the tool diameter but greater than 0 Its absolute value is used if it is a negative one 91 Or
193. constants of 200 spindle and tapping axis the 4 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0302 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200 retraction the 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0303 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200 retraction the 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0304 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200 retraction the 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0305 Time constant of spindle and tapping axis in 200 retraction the 4 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0320 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping the 1 gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0321 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping the 2 gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0322 Spindle clearance in rigid tapping the 3 gear Setting range 0 99 9999 0323 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 512 the 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 gt O O D 5 Q x 0324 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 512 the 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 0325 Spindle instruction multiplication coefficient CMR 512 the 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 0326 Spindle instruction frequency division coefficient 125 CMD the 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 0327 Spindle instruction frequency division coefficient 125 CMD the 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 0328 Spindle instruction frequency division coefficient 125 CMD the 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 3 ON Appendix 1 GSK990MC
194. ctual values Note Whether MPG Step interruption function is used is set by bit parameter NO 56 3 As the program being executed in Auto MDI or DNC mode is shifted to MPG mode by dwell the control will execute the MPG interruption The coordinate system for MPG interruption is shown in Fig 6 2 1 2 242 Chapter 6 MPG Operation RELATIVE ABSOLUTE MACHINE A T aL TA n A AE mm 47 897 mm 47 897 mm 47 897 mm 5 48 mm 5 48 mm 5 48 mm HANDLE INTR SUBSPEED REM DIST rim rm m mm mm men m mm men DATA 17 22 23 a M JA a a a Fig 6 2 1 2 Steps to clear MPG interruption coordinate system Press key X move the cursor upward and downward till the MPG interruption coordinate X flickers and press key L then the coordinate system is cleared The operations for Y and Z axes are the same as above when the zero return operation is performed the coordinate system is cleared automatically too Il Note When the MPG interruption function is used to adjust the coordinate system if an alarm or resetting occurs the function is cancelled 6 2 2 Relationship between MPG linterruption and Other Functions O D FR Q mp O 5 Table 6 2 2 1 Display Relationship After machine lock is effective the machine movement by using Machine lock E i MPG interruption is ineffective i MPG interruption does not change the absolu
195. d Operation User Manual II D s Q O 3 232 Chapter 4 Manual Operation Chapter 4 Manual Operation x Press key sists to enter Manual mode which includes manual feed spindle control and machine panel control etc 4 1 Coordinate Axis Movement In Manual mode each axis can be moved at MANUAL feedrate or manual rapid traverse speed separately 4 1 1 Manual Feed X axis can be moved in the positive or negative direction by pressing and holding dx or and the feedrate can be changed by feedrate override If the key is released the X axis movement is stopped That of the Y and Z axes are the same as X axis The three axes simultaneous moving is not available in this system but the three axes simultaneous zero return is supported by the system Note The manual feedrate of each axis is set by parameter P98 4 1 2 Manual Rapid Traverse Uv Press key RAPID to enter Rapid Traverse state with its indicator lighting up Then press manual feeding keys to move each axis at the rapid traverse speed Note 1 The manual rapid speeds are set by the parameter P170 P173 Note 2 Whether manual rapid traverse is effective before reference point return is set by the bit parameter NO 12 0 4 1 3 Manual Feedrate and Manual Rapid Traverse Speed Selection The manual feedrate override which can be selected by the band switch is divided into 21 gears O0 200 in MANUAL feed e e VUFO W25 VU5O VvI00
196. d by an code in the program When G44 is specified the offset value specified by H code is subtracted from the coordinates of the end position and the resulting value obtained is taken as the final coordinates of the end position G43 G44 are modal G codes which are effective till another G code belonging to the same group is used 2 Specification of offset value The length offset number is specified by H code The offset value assigned to the offset number is added to or subtracted from the moving code value of Z axis which obtains the new code value of Z axis HOO H255 can be specified as the offset number as required The range of the offset value is as follows Table 4 7 1 1 o Offset value H input in mm 999 999 mm 999 999mm Offset value H input in inch 39 3700 inch 39 3700 inch The offset value assigned to offset number 00 H0O is 0 which cannot be set in the system Note When the offset value is changed due to the change of the offset number the new offset value replaces the old one directly rather than being added to the old compensation value For example FO henin nA Offset value 20 ROZ enna Offset value 30 G90 G43 Z100 H01 Z moves to 120 G90 G43 Z100 H02 naaa Z moves to 130 3 Sequence of the offset number Once the length offset mode is set up the current offset number takes effect at once if the 97 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Or hd Sy GSK990MC Drillin
197. d edit are usually started Those blocks skipped because of the search have no effect on the CNC state This means that the data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates M S T and G codes does not affect the CNC coordinates and modal values If the execution is started from a block searched in a program it is required to check the machine and CNC states The execution can only be performed when both the states are consistent with its corresponding M S T codes and coordinate system setting etc set in MDI mode The word search operation is used to search a specific address word or number and it is usually used for editing a program Steps for the search of sequence number word and line number in a program 1 Select mode lt Edit gt or lt Auto gt 2 Look up the target program in DIR page 3 Press key to enter the target program 3 D 4 Key in the word or sequence number to be searched and press key or to search for it O SEARCH 5 When needing to search a line number in a program press key and input the line number to be searched then press key Note 1 The search function is automatically cancelled when the search for sequence number and word is performed to the end of a program Note 2 The searching for sequence number word and line number can be performed in either AUTO or EDIT mode but in AUTO mode it can only be performed in the background edit page 10 1 1 4 Location Method of the Curs
198. d file directory 4 Press corresponding soft keys to perform operations such as backup recovery output input one key backup one key recovery one key output and one key input Note 1 2 When I O channel is set to U Disk the functions of soft keys Data Output and Data Input are the same When performing data output input operation ensure the setting for the I O channel is correct When using a U disk set the I O channel to 2 when using transmission software via PC set the I O channel to 0 or 1 The contents of One Key Output Input are determined by password authorities See table 3 4 3 1 for the correspondence between data items and password authorities Related parameters Bit parameter NO 54 7 for setting whether one key output input is valid for part programs in debugging level authority or above Bit parameter NO 27 0 for setting whether the editing for subprograms with program numbers from 80000 89999 is forbidden Bit parameter NO 27 4 for setting whether the editing for subprograms with program numbers from 90000 99999 is forbidden There are concerned operation prompts in the system during data processing the contents of which are shown as follows table 3 4 4 2 Table 3 4 4 2 Prompt message Handling 1 Once key operation completed Operation succeeded completed One key operation completed program has been system prompts Copy after performed but the modifying parameters parameters c
199. d mode interpolation multiple is 0 329 gt O O D 5 Q x Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0280 Perform axes zero return before using tool setting function D 0281 Switch to SET Halving interface before using tool setting function O 0282 Please check whether toolsetting gauge is installed or parameter 1 6 is set 0283 Z axis exceeds safety position please check toolsetting gauge or tool length setting 2286 Automatic tooi engin measurement is wong Please measure tagain 0401 Drive unit alam 01 speed of servo motor exceeds setvaue 2202 Drive unit alam 02 power ofspindecreutistoohign 0403 Drive unit alam 03 main creuit power source stow 0404 Drive unit alarm 04 value of postion deviation counter exceeds servate 2405 Drive unit aram 05 motor temperare istor 0406 Drive unit alarm 06 speed eguatoris saturated tora ongtme T0407 Drive unit aem 07 COW CWinputpronbiton or Drive unit alarm 08 absolute value of value of position deviation counter 0408 exceeds 230 0409 Drive unit alarm 09 encoder signal error m 0410 Drive unit alarm 10 control power 15V is too low 0411 Drive unit alarm 11 IPM intelligent module failures Drive unit alarm 12 motor current is too large ons Bena 1 tove a oe TSE SRT overheat Drive taam braker O eo a oazo Drive unt sam 2 ERROR o 0430 Drive unit alam 30 encoder Z pusser T 0
200. data with a bus servo is valid simultaneously outputting pulse data with a bus servo is invalid it is taken as a Signal to input when the skip signal SKIP is 0 it is taken as a Signal to input when the skip signal SKIP is 1 Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0705 DOUS HSRZ Isc 281 gt O D 5 Q x Or Wis E 282 ISC HSRZ DOUS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual the least increment command 0 0001mm amp deg 0 00001inch the least increment command 0 001mm amp deg 0 0001inch high speed zero return is valid high speed zero return is valid double drive device uses a grating position double drive device do not use a grating position Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 0 6 ZRN ZMOD JAX AZR SJZ SIOD ZPLS MAOB 1 MAOB ZPLS SIOD SJZ AZR JAX ZMOD ZRN When the reference point is not specified system alarms if instruction other than G28 is specified during auto running 0 When the reference point is not specified system doesn t alarm if instruction other than G28 is specified during auto running 1 Reference return mode selection in front of the block 0 Reference return mode selection behind the block 1 manually return to the reference point and simultaneously control single axis 0 man
201. de Press lt Feed Hold gt key and the feed hold function is invalid Note 4 When the cycle start is valid Auto MDI DNC is switched each other or it switched into Edit before executing the current block completely press the feed hold key and the feed hold function is invalid 2 5 Overtravel Protection Overtravel protection must be employed to prevent the damage to the machine due to the overtravel of the X Y or Z axis 2 5 1 Hardware Overtravel Protection The overtravel limit switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum stroke of the machine X Y and Z axes respectively If the overtravel occurs the moving axis decelerates and stops after it touches the limit switch Meanwhile the overtravel alarm is issued Deceleration and stop Limit switch Fig 2 5 1 1 167 Il O D 3 Q mp O 5 Il Oo D p Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Explanation Overtravel during auto mode In Auto mode if the tool hits the stroke limit switch during the movement along an axis all the axis movements are decelerated to stop with the overtravel alarm being issued The program execution is stopped at the block where the overtravel occurs Overtravel during Manual mode In MANUAL mode if any axis contacts the stroke limit switch all axes will slow down immediately and stop 2 5 2 Software Overtravel Protection The soft
202. ded by bit parameter No 40 2 Tool radius compensation cancel G40 In GOO G01 mode using the following code G40 X_ Y_ Perform the linear motion from the old vector of the start point to the end point In GOO mode rapid traverse is performed to the end point along each axis By using this code the system switches from tool compensation mode to tool compensation cancel mode If G40 is specified without X__ Y__ no operation is performed by the tool 4 When it is G40 and X__ Y__ does not exist the tool does not move 3 Tool radius compensation left G41 S 3 1 G00 G01 G41X Y D_ Itforms anew vector perpendicular to the direction of X Y at the block end point The tool is moved from the tip of the old vector to the tip of the new vector at the start point Tool center path New yecto X Y gt Programmed path Start point Fig 4 7 2 2 When the old vector is zero the tool is switched to tool radius compensation mode from tool offset cancel mode using this code Here the offset value is specified by D code 2 G02 G03 G02 G03 X__Y_R_ According to the program above the new vector that is located on the line between the circle center and the end point can be created Viewed from the arc advancing direction it points to the left or right The tool center moves along an arc from the old vector tip to the new vector tip on the precondition that the old vector has been created correctly The
203. display key for the help page on the panel in this system which is shown below 160 Chapter 1 Operation Panel rao PROGRAM SYSTEM EJ SETTING ALARM HELP Position Program System Setting Graph Diagnosis Alarm Help page page page nage page page page page page Neme Explanation Remarks Secon this key Subpages for relative coordinates absolute coordinates and all n enter coordinates of the current point and PLC can be displayed by switching pag page corresponding soft keys Subpages for programs MDI current mode current time and program Press this key directory can be displayed by switching corresponding soft keys to enter Program names in different pages can be viewed by pressing page keys program page in directory subpage Press this key Subpages for tool offsets parameters macro variables and screw pitch System sae to enter can be displayed by switching corresponding soft keys pag system page Press this key The version of the PLC ladder and the configuration of system I O can be to enter PLC viewed on this page and the modification for PLC ladder is available in Fe page MDI mode Hi this key Four subpages in total The subpages for setting workpiece coordinate Setting e enter data and password setting can be displayed by switching corresponding pag aie page soft keys Press this key Subpages for graphic parameters and graphic display can be viewed by Graphic oe i i i SE to enter
204. display page There are two ways to delete a program A key in the program name e g for program 00002 key in number press key 2 Select DIR Isubpage in program page and select the program name to be deleted by moving the DELETE cursor then press ke Here Delete the current file is prompted on the system state again then Deletion succeeded is prompted and the program 1 Key in address key Keys i memory will be deleted E the corresponding program in O D FR Q mp O 5 column press key selected is deleted Note If there is only one program file by pressing key Delete its name will be changed to 000001 first and then the contents be deleted in Edit DIR page regardless of whether it is 000001 or not if there are multiple program files the contents of program 000001 as well as its program name are deleted 10 1 3 Deletion of All Programs The steps for deleting all programs in memory are as follows a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the Ta bage c Key in DisS d Key in address keys ei EJ 9 s sequence 261 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual DELETE e Press key to delete all the programs saved in memory 10 1 4 Copy of a Program Il O O D s Q O 5 262 10 Steps for copying the current program and saving it with a new name a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Ente
205. ds and steps are shown below 1 Enter lt MDI gt mode 2 Press UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT to move the cursor to the required items to be changed 3 Modify them according to the following explanations 1 Whether to be bus 0 the driver transmission mode is pulse 1 the driver transmission mode is bus Note it is set to the bus mode by No 050 2 Encoder type 0 incremental 1 absolute Note No 20 6 sets whether to use an absolute encoder 3 Select permissive max deviation Note the system defaults 50 000mm and also the deviation can be set by P445 4 Axis extended card 0 none 1 have Note No 0 6 can set whether to use a bus servo card 5 grating type 0 incremental 1 absolute Note No 1 0 sets whether to use an absolute grating rule 6 Spindle extended card 0 none 1 have Note No 1 1 sets whether the spindle driver uses a bus control mode 7 Multi coil absolute zero setting a Firstly set the system s gear ratio feed axis direction and zero return direction Then the system is turned off and then turned on b In MDI mode BUS or Not is set to 1 in the bus page Encoder type is set to 1 And manually move each axis and set the machine zero s position Il O D FR Q mp O 5 c Move the cursor to aN According to the prompt press lt Input gt key twice and the zero return indicator is ON the current position of each axis motor absolute encoder is recorded into the machine zero After th
206. during the canned cycle positioning O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo 4 4 1 High speed peck drilling cycle G73 Format G73 X_Y Z R_Q F_K_ Function The cycle is specially set for the high speed peck drilling It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole The operation illustration is shown as Fig 4 4 1 1 Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R Cut depth of each cutting feed Cutting feedrate K_ Number of repeats 57 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual G73 G98 G73 G99 Initial level Point Z Fig 4 4 1 1 Z R If either of hole bottom parameter Z and R is missing when the first drilling is being 7 aS O Ca 2 S 3 3 5 vo executed the system only changes the mode with no Z axis action executed Q If parameter Q is specified the intermittent feed shown in the figure above is performed Here the system retracts the tool by the retraction d Fig 4 4 1 1 specified by data parameter p270 and
207. e workpiece Programmed path Workpiece Programmed path Fig 4 7 3 1 Symbol meanings The following symbols are used in subsequent figures S indicates a position at which a single block is executed once SS indicates a position at which a single block is executed twice SSS indicates a position at which a single block is executed three times L indicates that the tool moves along a straight line C indicates that the tool moves along an arc r indicates the tool radius compensation value Ahn intersection is a position at which the programmed paths of two blocks intersect with each other after they are shifted by r O indicates the center of the tool 1 Tool movement in start up When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode the tool moves as illustrated below start up 105 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Or hd Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 Linear Linear Linear Circular Programmed path r A _ Programmed path 5 CN Vv Start position Start position Tool center path b Tool movement around an outer side of a corner at an obtuse angle 180 gt az290 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel A and B which are set by bit parameter No 400 I Linear Linear Linear Circular Start position
208. e it can be set to a modal value by bit parameter NO 48 0 which is only effective in a specified block Parameters X Y and Z represent the coordinates of the end point in absolute programming and the moving distance of the tool in incremental programming In tool offset mode the path of single direction positioning is the one after tool compensation when G60 is used The overrun marked in above figure can be set by system parameters P335 P336 P337 and P338 and the dwell time can be set by parameter P334 The positioning direction can be determined by setting positive or negative overrun Refer to system parameter for details Example 1 G90 G00 X 10 Y10 G60 X20 Y25 1 If the system parameter P334 1 P335 8 P336 5 for statement 1 the tool path is AB dwell for 153 BC 31 I mm aS O Ca 3 S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Y Fig 4 2 6 2 System parameter Table 4 2 6 1 P334 Dwell time of single direction positioning unit s P335 Overrun and single direction positioning direction in X axis Cunit mm P336 Overrun and single direction positioning direction in Y axis Cunit mm P337 Overrun and single direction positioning direction in Z axis Cunit mm P338 Overrun and single direction positioning direction in 4 axis unit mm Note 1 The signs of parameters P335 P338 are for the direction of single direction
209. e the tool moves along X axis and Y axis to position and executes rapid feed to point R perform cutting from point R to the tool infeed depth Q depth every cutting feed then the tool retracts the distance d it is specified by the fixed cycle parameter V and set by P284 without being specified No 44 4 sets whether the override is valid when the rigid tapping retraction is done No 45 3 specifies the retraction speed override No 45 2 sets whether to use the same time constant when the rigid tapping tool infeed retraction is performed No 45 4 sets whether the federate override selection signal and override cancellation signals are valid during the rigid tapping When the tool reaches point Z the spindle stops and retreats reversely Standard deep hole flexible tapping cycle When NO 44 5 1 it is a standard deep hole tapping cycle the tool moves along X axis and Y axis to position and executes rapid feed to point R perform cutting from point R to the tool infeed depth Q depth every cutting feed then the tool returns to point R No 44 4 sets whether the override is valid when the rigid tapping retraction is done No 45 3 specifies the retraction speed override and performs cutting again with the cutting speed F from point to the end point distance d which is far away from the last cutting set by P284 No 45 2 sets whether to use the same time constant when the rigid tapping tool infeed retraction is performed When the tool reaches p
210. e 1 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0047 The 3 axis coordinate of the 1 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0048 The 4 axis coordinate of the 1 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0049 The 5 axis coordinate of the 1 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0050 The 1 axis coordinate of the 2 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0051 The 2 axis coordinate of the 2 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm gt Lej D 5 Q x 0052 The 3 axis coordinate of the 2 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0053 The 4 axis coordinate of the 2 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0054 The 5 axis coordinate of the 2 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system 299 Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0055 The 1 axis coordinate of the 3 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999
211. e 1 axis positive border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 2 The 2 axis negative border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 2 The 2 axis positive border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 2 The 3 axis negative border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0081 Setting ra 0082 The 3 axis positive border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 2 nge 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm The 4 axis negative border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 2 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 301 gt Lej D 5 Q x Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0083 The 4 axis positive border coordinate of the stored 9999 stroke detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0084 The 5 axis negative border coordinate of the stored 9999 stroke detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0085 The 5 axis positive border coordinate of the stored 9999 stroke detection 2 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0086 Dry run speed 5000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0087 Cutting feedrate at power on 300 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0088 GO rapid traverse speed of the 1 axis 5000 Setting range Metric O 30000 mm min Inch O0 30000 25
212. e 168 FAAS MAE ke ER Ge 911 6 nT me ea NE aeRO et a EE nr Er ere eae ee Pee 168 CHAPTER 3 PAGE DISPLAY AND DATA MODIFICATION AND SETTING cccsscccssssccssssscesseees 173 S1 xd 5118 Bo 2 eee re EO nS eS IT a eT a 173 Sta Four Types or FP OSIIOM DiSplay as hs as a ae at ie a eo eee 173 3 1 2 Display of Cut Time Part Count Programming Speed Override and Actual Speed 08 175 3 1 3 Relative Coordinate Clearing And HalViING cccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeessaeeeesaaeeeeeesaaeees 176 3 1 4 Bus Monitor Position Page Display W sssssssseeeeekkt ett E REE E EEK ERE ERE SER E KELLER LEE REELLE EG 177 2 FOIN DISHA y Zeeman et rc rr NT DT sorted 178 3 3 1 Display Modification and Setting for Offset cc ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaaeees 181 g2 We SOMSCE DIS AY EA cassette E a tera eee esha 181 3 3 1 2 Modification and Setting for Offset Value ccsssssccsssscsssssecesseeecssnecsssssecssssecsssssesssnsessesnsessssnees 182 3 3 2 Display Modification and Setting for Parameters ccccecccecseeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeesaaaeees 183 S T Parameter DISH ay octet asda casa erne rener a a een e sd es A so ELSA 183 3 3 2 2 Modification and Setting for Parameter ValUCS cccccsscccssssccesseccssnseecsseeesssseeeseeesseeeesssseseseaees 184 3 3 3 Display Modification and Setting for Macro Variables
213. e acceleration deceleration needs not to be considered during programming Rapid traverse Pre acceleration deceleration 0 lineartype 1 Stype Post acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type Cutting feed Pre acceleration deceleration 0 lineartype 1 Stype Post acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type MANUAL feed Post acceleration deceleration 0 linear type 1 exponential type Set the common time constant for each axis by parameters 153 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Speed Speed after interpolation Speed after acceleration deceleration Time Speed i eae Tr Acceleration deceleration time constant for rapid feed data parameter 105 124 I Rapid feed speed Tc Acceleration deceleration time constant for cutting feed and manual feed data parameter 125 128 7 aS O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Cutting feed manual feed Fig 7 5 1 7 6 Acceleration Deceleration at the Corner in a Block Example If a block containing only Y movement is followed by a block containing only X movement the latter X block accelerates as the former Y block decelerates The tool path is as follows An exact stop instruction is inserted here 2 a Programmed path gt Actual tool path Y X Fig 7 6 1 If an exact stop instruction is inserted the to
214. e by repressing PLC key in PLC page 0 Not switch over page by repressing PLC key in PLC page HELP 1 To switch over page by repressing HELP key in help page 0 Not switch over page by repressing HELP key in help page Standard setting 1100 0001 System parameter number 0 2 7 NE9 NES NE8 1 Editting of subprogram with 80000 89999 unallowed 0 Editting of subprogram with 80000 89999 allowed NE9 1 Editting of subprogram with 90000 99999 unallowed 0 Editting of subprogram with 90000 99999 allowed Standard setting 0001 0001 System parameter number 0 2 8 _ MCL MKP MKP 1 To clear the program edited when M02 M30 or is executed in MDI mode 0 Not clear the program edited when M02 M30 or is executed in MDI mode MCL 1 To delete the program edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode 0 Not delete the program edited when pressing RESET key in MDI mode Standard setting 0001 0000 System parameter number 10 29 IWZ WZO MCV GOF WOF WOF 1 Tool wear offset input by MDI disabled 0 Tool wear offset input by MDI enabled GOF 1 Geometric tool offset input by MDI disabled 0 Geometric tool offset input by MDI enabled MCV 1 Macro variables input by MDI disabled 0 Macro variables input by MDI enabled WZO 1 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI disabled 0 Workpiece origin offset input by MDI enabled IWZ 1 Workpiece origin offset input
215. e command the tool radius compensation is ignored the system calls the tool radius compensation specified by the program during the tool infeed 4 7 Tool Compensation G Code 4 7 1 Tool Length Compensation G43 G44 G49 Function G43 specifies the positive compensation for tool length G44 specifies the negative compensation for tool length G49 is used to cancel tool length compensation Format There are 2 modes A B for tool length offset which are set by bit parameter No 39 0 in this system Mode A G43 G44 JZH Mode B G17 G43 Z H 96 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code G17 G44 Z H G18 G43 Y_H G18 G44 Y_H G19 G43 X_H G19 G44 X_H Tool length offset mode cancel G49 or HO Explanation The above codes are used to shift an offset value for the end point of the specified axis The difference between assumed tool length usually the 1st tool and actual tool length used is saved into the offset memory tools of different length thus can be used to machine the workpiece only by changing the tool length offset values instead of the program G43 and G44 specify the different offset directions and H code specifies the offset number 1 Offset direction G43 Positive offset frequently used G44 Negative offset Either for absolute code or incremental code when G43 is specified the offset value stored in offset memory specified with the H code is added to the coordinates of the moving end point specifie
216. e coordinate system as the origin of the polar coordinate system G81 X100 Y30 Z 20 R 5 F200 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 30 Y150 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 150 Y270 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 270 G15 G80 Cancelling the polar coordinate code Specifying angles with incremental value and a polar radius with absolute value G17 G90 G16 Specifying the polar coordinate code and selecting XY plane setting the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system as the origin of the polar coordinate system G81 X100 Y30 Z 20 R 5 F200 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 30 G91 Y120 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 150 Y120 Specifying a distance of 100mm and an angle of 270 G15 G80 Cancelling the polar coordinate code Moreover when programming by polar coordinate system the current coordinate plane setting should be considered The polar coordinate plane is related to the current coordinate plane E g in 39 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual G91 mode if the current coordinate plane is specified by G17 the components of X axis and Y axis of the current tool position are taken as the origin If the current coordinate plane is specified by G18 the components of Z axis and X axis of the current tool position are taken as the origin If the positioning parameter of the first hole cycle code
217. e executed This function is for checking a program e MACHINE Note The machine position and coordinate position are inconsistent after key LOCK is pressed to execute the program Therefore it is required to perform machine zero return operation after the execution 7 8 MST Lock MST In lt AUTO gt mode press key MST LOCK that the indicator on the panel lights up means MST lock state is entered In this state M S and T codes are not executed This function is used together with Machine Lock to check a program Note M00 M01 M02 M30 M98 M99 are executed even in MST lock state 7 9 Feedrate and Rapid Speed Override in Auto Run In lt AUTO gt mode the feedrate and rapid traverse speed can be overridden by the system In auto run the feedrate override which is divided into 21 gears can be selected by pressing e WA M10096 Wh WM keys F ovennive F OVERRIDE F overo Press key tomme Once the feedrate override increases by one gear 10 till 200 Press key ieee once the feedrate override decreases by one gear 10 If the override is set to Fo whether the axes are stopped is set by bit parameter NO 12 4 and If the axes are not stopped when the override is set to 0 the actual rapid traverse speed is set by data parameter P93 common to all axes In auto run press keys oea JL aoea to Select the rapid traverse speed with gears Fo 25 50 and 100 Note 1 Value specified by F in feedrate overrid
218. e inner cutting turns into outer cutting As the usual programming shown in the following figure the offset value is assumed as positive When a tool path is programmed as A if the offset value is negative the tool center moves as in B when a tool path is programmed as B if the offset value is negative the tool center moves as in A 103 I m O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Or Jd Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Tool center path Programmed path A B Fig 4 7 2 8 It is common to see a figure with acute angles figure with sharp angle arc interpolation However if the offset value is negative the inner side of the workpiece cannot be machined When cutting the inner sharp angle at a point insert an arc with a proper radius there and then perform cutting after the smooth transition The compensation for left or right means the compensation direction is at the left side or right side of the tool moving direction relative to the workpiece workpiece assumed as unmovable By G41or G42 the system enters compensation mode and by G40 the compensation mode is cancelled The example for compensation program is as follows The block 1 in which the compensation cancel mode is changed for compensation mode by G41 code is called start At the end of the block the tool center is compensated by the tool radius that is vertical to the path of the next bl
219. e origin point If G29 is specified in offset mode the offset is cancelled at the intermediate position and automatically restored at the next block If it is specified immediately after G28 G28 Intermediate point G00 G42 G00 Programmed path Tool center path Fig 4 7 3 12 If it is not specified immediately after G28 G29 Intermediate point Fig 4 7 3 13 7 Tool radius compensation G code in offset mode In offset mode if the tool radius compensation G code G41 G42 is specified a vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction in the previous block which is irrelative to the machining inner or outer side If this G code is specified in circular codes the arc will not be correctly generated Refer to 5 when the offset direction is changed using tool radius compensation G G41 642 Linear Linear KS N SG Programmed G42 mode path A block specified by G42 Tool center path ay S l Fig 4 7 3 14 Circular Linear 113 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual A block specified by G42 Programmed path I Tool center path Fig 4 7 3 15 8 A block without tool movement The following blocks have no tool movement In these blocks the tool will not move even if tool radius compensation mode is effective IMOS yuritar a M code output U
220. e point returns and the deceleration signal is 0 Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 0 3 INM 1 DIR5 DIR4 DIR3 DIR2 DIR1 INM Min moving unit of linear axis Inch 0 Min moving unit of linear axis Metric If INM is set to 0 in metric output the basic unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary axis is deg deg min If INM is set to 1 in inch output the basic unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min DIR1 DIR2 DIR3 DIR4 DIRS Standard setting 0000 0000 the 1 axis feed direction reverses the 1 axis feed direction does not reverse the 2 axis feed direction reverses the 2 axis feed direction does not reverse the 3 axis feed direction reverses the 3 axis feed direction does not reverse the 4 axis feed direction reverses the 4 axis feed direction does not reverse the 5 axis feed direction reverses the 5 axis feed direction does not reverse gt O O D 5 Q x System parameter number 0 0 4 TMES TMSN SNMD SKO SKO SNMD TMSN TMES have installed a toolsetting instrument have not installed a toolsetting instrument the toolsetting interface displays the operation step explanations the toolsetting interface does not display the operation step explanations simultaneously outputting pulse
221. e program 0140 Sequence number does not exist MDI presentation module and DNC mode do not support macro instruction skip 0142 Illegal scaling beyond 1 999999 is specified FE me rs es een e ae A oes Sear instruction value a Se Oe ee Sve Tae UE SHORT same one me eo e e or parameter NO 4 3 AZR me eal setting value Modify the program oreo Arc programming ony by Rin polarsysteom Reference point plane selection or direction related instructions can not be executed in polar coordinate mode 0163 Reference point or coordinate system related G instructions can not be executed in revolution mode 0164 Reference point or coordinate system related G instructions can not be a executed in scaling mode 0165 Please specify revolution scaling or G10 instructions in a single block a 0166 No ais specitedinreferenceretum 016g The min dwell time at the hole bottom should be shorter than the max dwell HE time 0179 100 radius compensation is not cancelled while entering or exiting a subprogram orm Pis not an integer or tess than Ova block caling subprogram T0173 Subprogram callshousbelessihan 999 SY T0175 canned cycle can oniy be executesinGi7pine SSC T0176 spinde speed is not specified before gid tepong SSS T0177 Spindle orientation is not supported by 10 control in G76 staden T0176 spinde speeds not specfedincamedeyse SY Tove mamoe S L is too small 1 L is smaller than tool radius
222. e program The actual feedrate Value specified by F X feedrate override Note 2 The rapid traverse speed overridden by data parameter P88 P89 P90 and rapid override is calculated as follows Actual rapid traverse speed along X axis Value specified by P88 X rapid override The calculation methods for Y and Z axes are the same as that of X axis 248 Chapter 7 Auto Operation 7 10 Spindle Speed Override in Auto Run In auto run the spindle speed can be overridden if it is controlled by analog quantity The spindle override which is classified into 8 gears from 50 120 can be adjusted by pressing Th 110 Th spindle override keys eee eee eae in auto mode p The spindle speed override increases by one gear 10 till 120 by pressing key Eis each time h S OVERRIDE once When it decreases The spindle speed decreases by one gear 10 by pressing key to 50 the spindle stops The actual spindle speed speed specified in the program x spindle override The maximum spindle speed is set by data parameter P258 If the spindle speed exceeds it it is taken as the actual speed 7 11 Background Edit in Aauto Run The background edit function during processing is supported in this system During the program execution in Auto mode press key lt PROGRAM gt to enter the program page then press soft key PRG to enter the background edit page as is shown in Fig 7 11 1 G92 X0 YO 20 N1 2 G G90 X74 295
223. e system is turned off and then turned on the zero return indicator is still ON Manually set the negative border and positive border according to the actual machine s max stroke to make the current machine s 187 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual absolute coordinates move forward backward one value and at last No 61 6 is set to 1 the positive negative limit is valid Setting range 99999 9999 99999 9999 and P450 P459 can set each axis positive negative border d Whether to use a grating Each axis separately sets whether to use a grating 0 not to use a grating 1 use a grating No 1 3 1 can separately set whether to ues a grating 4 Press to confirm it Note 1 After the machine zero is set the machine zero must be set again when each axis zero return direction feed axis movement direction the servo system gear ratio is modified because it causes the zero loss Note 2 After the machine zero is set again it will influences other reference points for example the pre reference point the 3 reference point must be set again 3 3 5 1 Servo Parameter Display Press the soft key HIBUS J to enter the servo debugging page then press the soft key SERVO PARA to enter the servo parameter page The page shows the following contents see Fig 3 3 5 1 a a ee ee ee ee AE KON Poor e o a y ws 0 0 2 Pos CCC fone Password DATA SEE a7 GRADE
224. e system rotation Rotation angle is reversed 4 2 15 Coordinate system rotation G68 G69 For the workpiece which consists of many figures with the same shapes users can program 43 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual using the coordinate rotation function i e write a subprogram to the figure unit and then call the subprogram using rotation function Command format G17 G68 X_ Y_R_ Or G18 G68 X_Z_R_ Or G19G68Y ZR G69 Rotation angle I Rotation center X Fig 4 2 15 1 Function G68 rotates the programmed shape in a plane taking a specified center as its origin G69 is used for cancelling the coordinate system rotation 7 aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Explanation 1 G68 has two positioning parameters both of which are optional ones They are used for specifying the rotation center If the rotation center is not specified the system assumes the current tool position as the rotation center The positioning parameters are relative to the current coordinate plane e g X and Y for G17 X and Z for G18 Y and Z for G19 2 When the current positioning mode is the absolute mode the system assumes the specified point as the rotation center When the positioning mode is the relative mode the system specifies the current point as the rotation center G68 can also use an code parameter R of which the value is the rotation angle with degree as
225. e the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block P is a modal code with its min value set by data parameter P281 and max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes effect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect P cannot be stored as modal data if it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle code the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the 74 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching Before the boring axis is changed the canned cycle must be cancelled Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z R or any additional axes boring is not performed Example M3 S100 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G89 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 return to po
226. e tool radius offset I 12 Precautions for offset a Specifying offset value The offset value number is specified by D code Once specified D code keeps effective till another D code is specified or the offset is cancelled D code is not only used for specifying the offset value for the tool radius compensation but also for specifying offset value for tool offset 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo b Changing offset value In general during tool change the offset value must be changed in offset cancel mode If it is changed in offset mode the new offset value is calculated at the end of the block Offset value calculated at block N6 Offset value calculated at A block N7 Programmed path Fig 4 7 3 24 c Positive negative offset value and tool center path If the offset value is negative G41 and G42 are replaced with each other in the program If the tool center is passing around the outer side of the workpiece it will pass around the inner side instead and vice versa As shown in the example below In general the offset value is programmed to be positive When a tool path is programmed as in figure a if the offset value is made for negative the tool center moves as in b and vice versa Therefore the same program permits cutting for male or female shape and the gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of the offset value 117 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Dr
227. ed axes is the specified feedrate I Fig 4 2 3 6 The first two command parameters are positioning parameters The parameter words are the names of two axes X Y or Z in the current plane These two positioning parameters specify the position which the tool is to go to The parameter word of the third command parameter is a linear axis except the circular interpolation axis and its value is the helical height The meanings and restrictions for other command parameters are identical with those of circular interpolation If the circle can not be machined according to the specified command parameter the system will give an error message After the execution the system changes the current tool traversing mode for G02 G03 mode The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolation axes is specified The specification method is to simply add a moving axis which is not a circular interpolation axis The feedrate along a circular arc is specified by F command Thus the feedrate of the linear axis is as 7 O ta S 3 3 5 vo follows Length of liner axis Fo F Length of circular arc Determine the feedrate to make the linear axis feedrate not exceed any limit Restrictions Pay attention to the setting for selecting the coordinate plane when the helical interpolation is being done 4 2 4 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 Command format G90 G91 Function There are 2 commands for axis moving inc
228. ed from point R to point Z As the tool reaches the hole bottom cutting feed is performed to return to point R level Use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle before specifying G85 If G85 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next boring operation Point Z Fig 4 4 7 1 If the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle code the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning 68 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code to point R level If the tool compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching The canned cycle must be cancelled before the drilling axis is changed Boring Boring is not performed in a block which does not contain X Y Z or other axes Example M3 S100 The spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G85 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioni
229. ed with three positioning parameters X Y Z_ all of which are optional parameters These positioning parameters are for specifying the scaling center of G51 If they are not specified the system assumes the tool current position as the scaling center Whether the current positioning mode is in absolute or incremental mode the scaling center is always specified with the 40 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code absolute positioning mode Moreover the parameters of code G51 are also expressed with rectangular coordinate system in polar coordinate G16 mode Example G17 G91 G54 GO X10 Y10 G51 X40 Y40 P2 Though in incremental mode the scaling center is still the absolute coordinates 40 40 in G54 coordinate system G1 Y90 Parameter Y is still in incremental mode 2 Scaling Either in G90 mode or G91 mode the rate of magnification is always expressed with absolute mode The rate of magnification can be set either in parameters or in programs Data parameters P331 P333 correspond to the magnifications of X Y and Z respectively If there is no scaling code specified the setting value of data parameter P330 is used for scaling If the parameter values of parameter P or I J and K are negative the mirror image is applied for the corresponding axis 3 Scaling setting The effectiveness of scaling is set by parameter No 60 45 The effectiveness of the X axis scaling is set by bit parameter NO 47 3 the effectiveness of the Y axis scaling i
230. eed on the R plane and then the spindle is regulated to clockwise rotation 74 counterclockwise G84 when G74 G84 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed while the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block S instruction when the commanded spindle speed exceeds the max spindle speed during tapping 65 I 7 a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual P257 the spindle upper speed in the course of tapping cycle an alarm occurs the gear of the max spindle speed during the rigid tapping is determined by P294 P296 F instruction when the specified F value exceeds the cutting feedrate s upper value P96 sets the upper value the system takes the upper value as the reference P instruction P is a modal code the least value is set by P281 the max value is set by P282 P value is less than the least value and the system runs with the least value when it is more than the max value the system run with the max value Axis switch must cancel the fixed cycle before switching the tapp
231. eeesaaeeeeeeaaaees 145 5 2 5 Program End and Return CM OOo sisien e a a ad a 145 CHAPTER 6 SPINDLE FUNCTION S CODE wissscsccisvcscscisiacseincecssidisticcetaceecstebstansacaivacsedestsceetiave 147 Gc SNE AR ao CONTO ienis E T E E TT ERE ae 147 62 Spindle SwiteM yaus COMMON erreen n r Pte ED a a EAA 147 6 3 Constant Surface Speed Control G96 G97 eeeesssssseerrrrrrsssssssssssrrrrrrrrreessssesssssrrrrrrre 147 CHAPTER ZF FEED FUNCTION CODE csscccceicscsevesss5ccicc2 rected iccteic beuseeitehic teacteesuessteeet Eiaeia 151 Pel Rapid TRAV OVS Cif 55 ea n aa e a e a e eo e e 151 BF C UNECE ire E a a E SS EES OA RT 151 T T Feed per Minute GOA oa ali ars E E E E E 151 Contents 7 22 Feedper Revolution C695 suc EET DE EA AE lee Aker ser 152 7 3 Tangential Speed CORR sians its inesnndesaucdnictaaneidaeiasdnieincandeatundiauradedoasMenauaietoinsaass 153 74 Keys for Feedrate OVeMmide ananas dene a a ao edo lasede ber 153 7 5 Auto Acceleration Deceleration cccccsscccsssscccesssseecessneecessseecessaeecesssaeeceseaeeecesaeeessaaeees 153 7 6 Acceleration Deceleration at the Corner in a Block 0 0 ccc ccccccccccssecceesssceesesseeeeesseeeeesaeees 154 CHAPTERS TOOL FUNCTION 4 eldre deb 155 BT TOOLPUNCHON nesne E lates sec bated tis uate adesseoenaye 155 IE OPERATION 5 eo E 157 CHAPTER 1 OPERATION PANE Lessiccsveccucscs neiii aaa ae iaae raaa aedi enaa aeaea 159 EE Pey U csere A E AEE AA ORA vic a NEE AE 159 ke E
232. eeesseeeeseeeesseeeesanees 96 4 7 2 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 0 ccccccccsececeeeeeceeeceeceseeeeseeeeseucessaeesseeeeseeessasessneeeesaaees 99 4 7 3 Explanation for Tool Radius COMPENSATION ccccceeccceecccceeeeceeeeceeceeeeeeeseeceseecessueeesueeeseeeesseeeeesees 105 4 7 4 Corner offset circular interpolation G39 oo eecccccecccceeecceceeeeeeseeeceeeeeceeseeecesseeecesseeeeseeeeesseeeeeeas 120 4 7 5 Tool Offset Value and Offset Number Input by Program G10 ou eecccceceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeees 120 BRET FRE CE Bren IO RPO ESEA EER EES eR PI A EEE no ee AT TOPE OE OO AANA 121 4 8 1 Feed Mode G64 G61 G63 ce cccccecccccccceseeceeeceeeeeeecaeeeseeesseaeseessaeeeeessseeeeeeseeaseeessseaeseessaaaeeeesagages 121 4 8 2 Automatic Override for Inner Corners G62 ou ieeeeccccccssssseseceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseaaeseeeeeesssaeaseeeeeeessaagaases 122 AO Macro Bk OT Merete ts e eee eRe ee nr E Cem nr ato a eee en ener ae ee 124 AG SUS TORN AGRO A er DE A E A S A 124 49 2 WIACIO NANADICS 52 rs as sea E aE AEE EEE E SENE GADER A 124 AOG ACUSTONM Macr gt PINE SENE SENERE std e ack dented EEN ER ERE ade ea eter 130 4 9 4 Custom Macro Function A wots seine scceaserveheeebeccetend t kk NERE E REESE REESE REESE REESE REESE REE REESE ERE SEERE SEE NERE EEK E EK ERE ERE 131 4 9 5 Custom Macro FUNCION BE SE ae acces a E ED a a aoe ee 136 CHAPTER 5 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M CODE cccsccsssssscsssssccsssssccsssssccsss
233. eing programmed In general point Z is located above point R otherwise an alarm occurs Example M3 S500 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G87 X300 Y 250 Z 120 R 150 Q5 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 orient at the initial level then shift by 5mm and dwell at point Z for 1s Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops Limitation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G87 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G87 is replaced by other G codes in group 1 Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation Note In the instruction the tool infeed axis and the tool infeed direction are fixed and the tool infeed direction is not influenced by G68 coordinate system rotation 4 4 10 Boring Cycle G88 Format G88 X_Y ZR_P F_ Function This cycle is use for boring a hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z in incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in
234. el operator in descending sequence The system default level is the lowest one at power on See Fig 3 4 4 1 The 1st and the 2nd level The modifications for state parameters data parameters tool offset data and PLC ladder transfer etc are allowed in these levels The 3rd level The modifications for CNC state parameters data parameters tool offset data etc are allowed in this level The 4th level The modifications for CNC state parameters data parameters tool offset data are allowed in this level The 5th level No password Modifications for offset data macro variables and operations using the machine operator panel are available but the modifications for CNC state parameters and data parameters are unavailable SYSTEM PSW MACHINE Pw NEW O NEW AGAIN AGAIN DEBUG Psw USERPSW lt df NEW TTT n o AGAIN AAN id iz Logout END Sj PATH 1 SETTING FWORK HDATA Fig 3 4 5 1 1 After entering this page in MDI mode move the cursor to the item to be altered INPUT 2 Key in the password under the corresponding level then press key r If the password is correct the message Password is correct is issued by the system 3 Input a new password of 0 6 digits or letters to modify the system password then press INPUT 4 After modification move the cursor to the END button by pressing key END then the I
235. eleasing the Emergency Stop button Note 2 Perform Reference Point Return again after releasing the Emergency Stop button to ensure the coordinate position is correct In general the emergency stop signal is a normal closed signal When the contact point is open the system immediately enters into the emergency stop state and emergently stops the machine The connection for the emergency stop signal is as follows 166 24V D Emergency stop switch ESP Fig 2 3 2 1 Chapter 2 System Power ON OFF and Safety Operations 2 3 3 Feed Hold Users can suspend the execution pressing key during the machine running Please note that the execution is not suspended in rigid tapping instructions and cycle instructions until the current instruction is executed 2 4 Cycle Start and Feed Hold The keys RESEN and are used for the program start and dwell operations in Auto mode MDI mode and DNC modes Whether the external start and dwell is used is set by PLC address K 5 1 Note 1 Switch among Auto MDI and DNC Before completing the current block the cycle start is valid Press lt Feed Hold gt key and the feed hold function is invalid Note2 Auto MDI DNC mode is switched into Edit mode Before the current block is performed completely the cycle start is invalid Press lt Feed Hold gt key and the feed hold function is invalid Note 3 Auto MDI DNC mode is switched into Machine Zero Return Step Manual MPG mo
236. em Programming and Operation User Manual When 3 FUP 2 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 2 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 9 The abbreviations of the arithmetic and logic instructions When a function is specified in a program the first two characters of the function name can be used to specify the function See table 4 9 5 1 Example ROUND RO FIX FI 10 Operation sequence OD Function 2 Multiplication and division operation AND 3 Addition and subtraction operation OR XOR I Example 1 2 3 SIN 4 SER lt A N 7 O Ca s S 3 3 5 Q TR T 1 12 a nd 3 indicate the operation sequence 11 Restrictions Brackets are used to enclose an expression When a divisor of 0 is specified in a division or TAN 90 an alarm occurs 2 Transfer and loop 1 Transfer and loop In the program GOTO statement and IF statement are used to change the control flow There are three types of transfer and loop operations Transfer and cycle GOTO statement unconditional transfer IF statement conditional transfer IF THEN WHILE statement When loop is performed 2 Unconditional transfer gt GOTO statement Transfer to the block with sequence number n The sequence number can be specified by an expression GOTOn n Sequence number 1 to 99999 Example GOTO 1 GOTO
237. en key in the last word of the multiple blocks to be deleted e g S02 as Fig 10 1 1 7 1 above finally DELETE press key ate to delete the blocks from the current cursor location to the address specified Note 1 100 000 lines of blocks can be deleted at most Note 2 If the last word to be deleted occurs many times in a program the system will delete the blocks till the word nearest to the cursor location Note 3 When using N sequence number can delete many blocks initial position of the deleted target N sequence number must be at the line head of the block 10 1 1 8 Deleting Words Starting from the currently displayed word delete the specified words X100 0 M03 S2000 G01 X50 0 Y100 0 N2233 S02 Cursor current position Area to be deleted Fig 10 1 1 8 1 260 Chapter 10 Eidt Operation PROGRAM Select lt Edit gt mode press key to enter the program display page and the cursor position to the target initial position to be deleted as the above figure be located at the character N100 input the last full character of the words to be deleted such as Y100 0 see the above Fig DELETE 10 1 1 81 Press to delete programs between the cursor and the signed addresses Note When N sequence numbe is in the middle of blocks the system takes them as words to be executed 10 1 2 Deletion of a Single Program The steps for deleting a program in memory are as follows a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter program
238. en press HISERVO PARA to enter the parameter display page 5 Select the key BACKUP to backup the current selected axis parameter to the file DrvParxXX txt XX axis number For example backup X and the file name DrvPar01 txt 6 After all parameters are set the parameter switches are closed 3 3 5 1 4 Servo Parameter Recover 1 Select lt MDI gt mode SETTING 2 Press to enter lt SET gt page set the parameter switch to 1 SETTING 3 Press to enter lt SET gt page input the final user password and the level password 4 Press press the soft key EBUS to enter the servo debugging page then press HISERVO PARA to enter the parameter display page 5 Select the key RECOVER to recover the backuped parameter file DrvParXX txt of the current selected axis parameter to the servo drive XX axis number For example backup X Il and the file name DrvPar01 txt SAVE 6 Press Ej to make the servo save the refreshed parameters and the status bar displays the driver s parameter is successfully saved 7 After all parameters are set the parameter switches are closed O O D s Q O 5 3 3 5 1 5 Servo Grade Zero During debugging the parameter the servo parameter s rigid is too big to cause the machine vibriation To avoid the danger using the servo grade zero function rapidly recovers the servo parameters into the grade 0 initial state parameters 1 Select lt MDI gt mode
239. equence d Previewing the program where the cursor is located Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 15 400 15947 58368 K 070g 9587B 11 7 5 16 5 07700 344B 11 07 05 16 82 07704 12665B 11 7 5 16 R 7999 581364B 11 7 6 11 14 91000 111B T JET SEJ 5 007998 5I2XAYAZA Nige G Goa X74 235 Y 50 N1106 Z3 M351500M8 N1 8Z8 33 N126X75 425Y 48 551Z 28 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N130 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 ee PRG WOE ORMOD CURT Fig 3 2 6 II Press soft key DIR again to enter PROGRAM USB DIR display page the contents of which are displayed as follows See Fig 3 2 7 16 51 46 PATH 1 a ee I 000017 txt 256B 8 8 14 12 18 z Il OG BE txt 12665B56B 11 08 8 16 A2 18 000027 txt 256B 08 08 14 12 18 091001 G65H81PS5 G L SRA 5669650615680640 M50 G65H81P4 Q 1001R1 GE5H81P20Q 1000R1 M19691649630Z0 M21 Er PATH 1 Fig 3 2 7 Explanation The program numbers in memory can be displayed by the page keys The program names with more than 6 digits or irregular formats cannot be previewed O D Q 3 3 1 Display Modification and Setting for Offset 3 3 1 1 Offset Display Press soft key HJOFFSET to enter OFFSET page which is shown as follows fig 3 3 1 1 1 181 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual o ooo ooo oom
240. eratio y g Explanation Fini benene a LIGHT Machine working Machine working light switch light ON OFF Lubricant oil Machine lubricant switch ON OFF Wf Coolant switch Coolant ON OFF Any mode COOUNG es i Chip removal Chip removal Spindle CCW MPG a i mode step sp FO F Spindle control Spindle stop mode manual mode cow sTOP CW keys Spindle CW Spindle speed adjustment spindle Any mode speed analog control valid Spindle JOG Spindle JOG Manual mode Step switch ON OFF mode MPG mode O D s Q mp O 5 Spindle exact Spindle exact stop Manual mode Step stop key ON OFF mode MPG mode An alarm occurs if Overtravel the hard limit is reached release key Press this key with its MANUAL mode indicator lighting up to MGP mode move the machine reversely till the indicato goes off Auto mode the distance to go is the straight line distance from the current point to the break point For exiting the running Program restart program or restoring to key the last machining state before a sudden power loss i Whether the operation Optional stop ig stopped after a block Auto mode MDI ON OFF key containing M01 is mode DNC mode executed 163 Il Oo D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Remarks and operation override selection key Keys Designation Explana
241. eration 3 Operation 5 Spindle stop Spindle CCW Spindle stop Spindle CCW DE P i i Operation 4 Point Z Operation 4 Pele Fig 4 5 2 1 After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R level along Z axis The spindle is rotated CCW for tapping from point R level to Z level by G84 instruction When tapping is completed the spindle is stopped and a dwell is performed The spindle is then rotated in the reverse direction the tool is retracted to point R level then the spindle is stopped Rapid traverse to initial level is then performed When taping is being performed the feedrate override and spindle override are assumed to be 100 Rigid mode in position mode NO 46 1 is set to 1 K parameter NO 7 7 to 1 before the tapping code specifying M29 S can specify the rigid mode Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified 80 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Thread lead In feed per minute relationship between the thread lead and feedrate spindle spindle Feedrate speed F screw taper pitchxspindle speed S Example machining the thread hole M12
242. eration and the shorter the machining time The smaller the parameter the higher the optimization and the longer the machining time 0403 Fitting segments of small lines Setting range 0 0020 999 0000 The parameter 403 determines the number of tool location points of the fitting spline curve The parameter should be controlled in a certain range 403 1 10 The bigger the parameter the bigger the calculation amount and the smaller the shape error 0404 Spline coefficient n1 Setting range 1 0000 199 0000 oS DO Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0405 Spline coefficient n2 Setting range 1 0000 199 0000 0406 Spline coefficient n3 Setting range 1 0000 199 0000 Q9 OO An original cubic spline curve is fitted based on spline parameters n1 n2 n3 404 405 4 406 The bigger the spline coefficient n1 n2 404 405 the bigger the curve error while speed is more smooth and the machine tool is more stable The smaller the coefficient the smaller the curve error while the speed is not smooth and machine tool vibration occurs The spline coefficient n3 406 is opposite 0407 CNC internal parameter 1 0 6000 Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 0408 CNC internal parameter 2 0 6000 Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 0409 Prereading smooth control 2 0000 Setting range 0 0000 30 0000 Prereading smooth control 409 is used to reduce machining slash caused by CAM program errors through prere
243. eration deceleration of rapid the 4 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0114 S type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of rapid the 5 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0115 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 1 axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0116 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 2 axis Setting range 0 400 ms gt O O D 5 Q x 0117 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 3 axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0118 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 4 axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0119 L type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 5 axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0120 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 1 axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0121 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 2 axis 304 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List Setting range 0 400 ms 0122 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 3 axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0123 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 4 axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0124 E type time constant of post acceleration deceleration of rapid the 5 axis Setting range 0 400 ms 0125 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 100 of cutting feed
244. eration type of rapid traverse linear ALS 1 Auto corner feed effective 0 Auto corner feed ineffective Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 0 11 7 CPCT CALT WLOE HLOE CLLE CBLS CBOL CBOL 1 cutting feed type post acceleration deceleration 0 cutting feed type pre acceleration deceleration CBLS 1 pre acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed S 0 pre acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed lineat CLLE 1 post acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed exponential 0 post acceleration deceleration type of cutting feed linear HLOE 1 JOG running type exponential 0 JOG running type linear 285 Gr 44157 GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual WLOE 1 MPG running type exponential 0 MPG running type linear CALT 1 cutting feed acceleration clamping 0 cutting feed acceleration not clamping CPCT 1 control the in position precision in cutting feed 0 donot control the in position precision in cutting feed Standard setting 1010 0001 System parameter number 0 1 8 RVCS RBK RVIT RVIT 1 execute next block after compensation as backlash is over value allowable 0 execute next block during compensation as backlash is over value allowable RBK 1 cutting rapid traverse separately executes backlash compensation 0 cutting rapid traverse separately does not execute ba
245. erence point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0101 The 2 axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0102 The 3 axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0103 The 4 axis reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0104 The 5 is reference point return speed 4000 Setting range 0 9999 mm min 0105 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of rapid the 1 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0106 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of rapid the 2 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0107 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of rapid the 3 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 303 gt Lej D 5 Q x Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0108 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration 60 of rapid the 4 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0109 L type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of rapid the 5 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0110 S type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of rapid the 1 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0111 S type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of rapid the 2 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0112 S type time constant of pre acceleration deceleration of rapid the 3 axis Setting range 3 400 ms 0113 S type time constant of pre accel
246. etails 240 Chapter 6 MPG Operation Chapter 6 MPG Operation 6 1 MPG Feed e MPG Press key to enter the MPG mode In this mode the machine movement is controlled by a handwheel 6 1 1 Moving Amount Selection Wu e A OVERRIDE A100 rx WW The moving increment will be displayed on the position page if any of keys vA is pressed the MPG increment 0 100 See Fig 6 1 1 1 is displayed in lt POSITION gt page FEED F mm min MPG INC 100 FEED OVRD 100 e mm 40 860 120 160 200 Fa 25 50 100 _ Ty SP amp Orpm Y O e OOl som m 100 S G 7 88 98 100118 120 ES Z O OOl jim COMMAND T NO T 880 OFFSET H DAOA G G17 G9 G94 Gel G46 G49 G54 PART CNT 8000 0000 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 00O 00 00 DATA 12 22 92 Fig 6 1 1 1 6 1 2 Selection of Moving Axis and Direction In MPG mode select the moving axis to be controlled by the handwheel and press the corresponding key then you can move the axis by the handwheel In MPG mode if X axis is to be controlled by the handwheel press key ex then you can move the X axis by rotating the handwheel The feed direction is controlled by handwheel rotation direction See the manual provided by the machine tool builder for details In general handwheel CW rotation indicates the positive feed while CCW rotation indicates the negative feed 241 O D FR Q ang O 5 Il O O
247. ewntaeiien Blacteocatoicosteielanentetides Aicetbaeuseia dee 245 TA Selection of the Auto RUN Programs oserei ea niae RAEE RERE EA 245 Ta ANT RUT t g Rate Re ne RE RER SEE Ree Ee ene oe Poe ee re eee Re Cone ee cee ee ee eee 245 Fd ANO RUIN SOD Sans it athe a Nix lass Obstet rebel Mosler tase a bias 246 T Aut RUAMING From Any BOCK sce citi sceaters herbie vein le cetta diss E AN E ORAA EA 247 Togs MEN TM a ose tecicte bocca ae Race T ee estas tase T eck tases Betst aes tasers at he tansese 247 7 0 Ingle BOCK EXGCUUO Moca ieicissias kbps eN NS ss MS Sa ed as aie aoe ee 247 Fe VLE 21 no Les ER ere em arse ween TS nC Np re SP eC RE COT UE Cee Mr Reena ee ere pee ry 248 T8 NIST LOCK oire os ctaccncncsaneciestentorteechiaslatualakaastiaeeeuaitandSiiieh mavalanad near ital acumen aliens 248 7 9 Feedrate and Rapid Speed Override in Auto RUN Qu ccc cccccccceeessssssseeesseeeeeseeseeeeeeees 248 XII Contents 7 10 Spindle Speed Override in Auto RUN M X u u un dseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerneen ennen ener neg eee see eee 249 Tali Background Edit N AUTO RUN sa eders addere eres een eee here e ES 249 CHAPTER 8 MDI OPERATION 3 sas sseissslessnrsnsdssesleeds tek veseeuisuceenrensaet acteadetnnlesabsatdeacueeseverseics 251 8 1 MDI COde INPUt oe DE Da E E EEE E a E E AA E Elsa 251 95 2 MDICode Execution and Sko ps saae tesen 292 8 3 Word Value Modification and Deletion of MDI Code ssssnsssssnssssnnssssnssseesssrressreessssessse
248. ey is pressed directly the part count will be cleared 3 Shift to CUT TIME by keys Up and Down to clear the CUT TIME 4 Press key Note 1 To display the actual spindle speed an encoder must be applied to the spindle Note 2 The actual speed the programming speed F x override The speed of each axis is set by data parameters P88 P92 in G00 mode and it can be overridden by rapid override the dry run speed is set by data parameter P86 Note 3 The programming speed for feed per revolution is displayed when the block involving feed per revolution is being executed Note 4 The total number of machined workpieces can be set by data parameter P356 and the total number of workpieces to be machined is set by number parameter P357 3 1 3 Relative Coordinate Clearing and Halving The steps for clearing relative coordinate position are as follows 1 Enter any page that displays the relative coordinates Fig 3 1 3 1 FEED mm min PRG SPEED NER FEED OVRD 100 amp mm g 46 66 126 166 2H a Fa 25 50 100 _ SPORS rpm A f R 89 fm lso 100 S 66 78 88 98 100118 120 E lt ABU m Tool T COMMAND T NO T0000 OFFSET H0 0 DAGAA Il O O D s Q O 5 G G17 G9 G94 Gel G4 G49 G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 00O 00 0A DATA 09 07 52 PATH 1 O Ee u o Fig 3 1 3 1 2 Clearing operation Press and hold key X til
249. ey mou to enter the DIR page move the cursor to find the target program c Press key for confirmation 2 Program loading in Edit mode D EDIT a Press key to enter the Edit mode PROGRAM b Press key rou to enter the DIR page move the cursor to find the target program O D INPUT c Press key for confirmation gt amp AUTO d Press key to enter the Auto mode 7 2 Auto Run Start After selecting the program using the two methods in section 7 1 above press key z to execute the program automatically The execution of the program can be viewed by switching to lt POSITION gt lt MONI gt lt GRAPH gt etc pages The program execution is started from the line where the cursor is located so it is recommended to check whether the cursor is located at the program to be executed and whether the modal values are correct before pressing key EER If the cursor is not located at the start line from which the program is started press key Ea and then key CYCLE ST from the start line to run the program automatically 245 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Note The workpiece coordinate system and reference offset values cannot be modified during program execution in Auto mode 7 3 Auto Run Stop In Auto run to stop the program being automatically executed the system provides five methods 1 Program stop MOO After the bl
250. f 1 axis 17004 G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 7006 G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 7009 G54 P2 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 1246 G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 7249 G54 P50 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 4 Local variables 7 O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo The correspondence between address and local variable Table 4 9 2 5 Argument Local variable Argument address Local variable No address No 2 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 O 0 A MIN oO i Cc 0 a BEER ee ee a ee ee Note 1 The assignment is done by an English letter followed by a numerical value Except letters G L O N H and P all the other 20 letters can assign values for arguments Each letter from A B C D to X Y Z can assign a value once and the assignment needs not to be performed in alphabetical order The addresses that assign no values can be omitted Note 2 G65 must be specified before any argument is used 128 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code 5 Precautions for custom macro body 1 Input by keys Press key behind the parameter words G X Y Z R I J K F H M S T P Q for inputting F Either operation or transfer instruction can be specified in MDI mode H P Q R of the operation and transfer instructions preceding or behind G65 are all used as parameters for G65 H02 G65 P 100 Q 101 R 102 Correct N100 G6
251. f program 0 Only one M code allowable in a section of program Standard setting 1001 0000 System parameter number 034 CFH DWL DWL 1 G04 for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode 0 G04 not for dwell per revolution in per revolution feed mode CFH 1 Toclear F H D codes at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve F H D codes at reset or emergency stop Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 013 5 C07 C05 C04 C03 C02 C01 289 gt O D 5 Q x Gr 44157 GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual c01 1 To clear G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 01 group at reset or emergency stop c02 1 To clear G codes of 02 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 02 group at reset or emergency stop C03 1 To clear G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop 0 Toreserve G codes of 03 group at reset or emergency stop C04 1 To clear G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop 0 Toreserve G codes of 04 group at reset or emergency stop C05 1 To clear G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 05 group at reset or emergency stop C06 1 To clear G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 06 group at reset or emergency stop C07 1 To clear G codes of 07 group at reset or emergency stop 0 T
252. f the 2 axis 0 0000 Setting range Metric 0 5 0 5 mm Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch Rotary axis 0 5 0 5 deg 0192 Backlash compensation amount of the 3 axis 0 0000 Setting range Metric 0 5 0 5 mm Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch Rotary axis 0 5 0 5 deg 0193 Backlash compensation amount of the 4 axis 0 0000 Setting range Metric 0 5 0 5 mm Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch Rotary axis 0 5 0 5 deg 0194 Backlash compensation amount of the 5 axis 0 0000 Setting range Metric 0 5 0 5 mm Inch 0 5 0 5 25 4 inch Rotary axis 0 5 0 5 deg 0195 Compensation step of the 1 axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0196 Compensation step of the 2 axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0197 Compensation step of the 3 axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency setting range 0 0 5 mm 0198 Compensation step of the 4 axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0199 Compensation step of the 5 axis clearance by fixed 0 0030 frequency setting range O 0 5 mm gt O O D 5 Q x 0200 Time constant of backlash compensation by 20 ascending and descending Setting range 0 400 ms 0201 Backlash compensation mode Setting range 0 2 3 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0 mode A 1 mode B 2 mode C 0202 Width acceptable for M S T completion signal Setting range 0 9999 ms 0203 Outp
253. f the current statement block S instruction F instruction P instruction Axis switch Override when the commanded spindle speed exceeds the max spindle speed during tapping P257 the spindle upper speed in the course of tapping cycle an alarm occurs the gear of the max spindle speed during the rigid tapping is determined by P294 P296 when the specified F value exceeds the cutting feedrate s upper value P96 sets the upper value the system takes the upper value as the reference P is a modal code the least value is set by P281 the max value is set by P282 P value is less than the least value and the system runs with the least value when it is more than the max value the system run with the max value must cancel the fixed cycle before switching the tapping axis No 206 alarm occurs when the tapping axis is changed in the rigid tapping mode during tapping the feedrate and spindle speed override are defaulted into 100 and the machine does not stop during the feed hold key being pressed till the return operation is completed Tool radius compensation in the fixed cycle command the command function does not need executing the tool radius compensation so the tool radius 79 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo I 7 aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual compensation is ignored Program restart
254. for setting tool offset in Offset page are as follows 1 Press soft key HIOFFSET to enter offset display page 2 Move the cursor to the target offset number Step 1 Press page keys to display the page where the offset value is to be modified move the cursor by pressing cursor keys to the offset number to be modified Step 2 Press key to search after inputting the offset number 182 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 3 Input offset value in any mode and press key or soft key INPUT for confirmation 4 In any mode input offset amount and then press soft key INPUT or OUTPUT After that the system computes the offset amount automatically and displays it on the screen Note 1 During the tool offset modification the new offset value is ineffective till the T code which specifies its offset number is specified Note 2 The offset value can be modified anytime during the program execution If the value is required to take effect in time during the program execution the modification must be completed before the tool offset number is executed Note 3 If the length offset value needs to be added to the relative coordinate value of Z axis the offset value should be specified behind Z code then they will be automatically added up in the system For example if Z 10 is input the offset value is the one obtained by adding 10 to the current relative coordinate value of Z axis 3 3 2 Display Modifica
255. fore manual reference return after power on BFA 1 make an alarm after overtravel when overtravel instruction is given 0 make an alarm before overtravel when overtravel instruction is given system alarm range is 5MM in front of borders of forbidding area Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 0 1 2 RDR FDR TDR RFO LRP RPD RPD 1 manual rapid effective before reference point return after power on 0 manual rapid ineffective before reference point return after power on 2 LRP 1 the positioning GOO interpolation type is linear E 0 the positioning GOO interpolation type is non linear 2 RFO 1 rapid feed stop when override is FO 0 rapid feed not stop when override is FO TDR 1 dry run effective during tapping 0 dry run ineffective during tapping FDR 1 dry run effective during cutting feeding 0 dry run ineffective during cutting feeding RDR 1 dry run effective during rapid positioning 0 dry run ineffective during rapid positioning Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0 113 HPC NPC NPC 1 feed per revolution effective with no position encoder 0 feed per revolution ineffective with no position encoder HPC 1 position encoder installed 0 position encoder not installed Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 284 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List o 1 4
256. formed along Z axis It is defined that a canned cycle operation is determined by 3 types which are specified by G codes respectively 1 Data type G90 absolute mode G91 incremental mode 2 Return point plane G98 initial level G99 point R level 3 Hole machining type G73 G74 G76 G81 G89 Initial point Z level and point R level 7 a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Initial point Z level It is the absolute position where the tool is located in Z axis before the canned cycle Point R level It is also called safety level It is the position in Z axis which is generally located a certain distance above the workpiece surface to prevent the tool from colliding with the workpiece and ensure an enough distance for deceleration when the rapid traverse is switched to cutting feed in canned cycle G73 G74 G76 G81 G89 specifies all the data of canned cycle hole position data hole machining data and number of repeats into a single block Z R If either of hole bottom parameter Z and R is missing when the first hole drilling is executed the system only changes the mode with no Z axis action executed The format of hole machining is as follows 53 I 7 a O Ca 2 S 3 3 5 vo Or S G17 G GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual X Y ry Sy Z R Q P F K Hole machining data Hole position data Hole machining type The meanings of hole position data a
257. g 4 6 1 3 G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 600 Rapid positioning G99 G22 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 150 L10 W20 Q10 V10 D1 F800 Groove rough milling within a circle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Canned cycle cancel and return from R level M30 I Limitation when G22 G23 is used G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal code NO 48 0 is set to 1 otherwise G22 G23 is replaced by other codes in group 1 7 aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Tool radius compensation in the fixed cycle command the tool radius compensation is ignored the system calls the tool radius compensation specified by the program during the tool infeed 4 6 2 Fine Milling Cycle within a Full Circle G24 G25 Command format G24 G98 G99 x Y Z Rt J D F K G25 Function The tool fine mills a full circle within a circle by the specified radius and the specified direction and it returns after finishing the fine milling Explanation G24 CCW fine milling inside a circle G25 CW fine milling inside a circle X Y The start point position within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference level in G91 R R reference level which is the absolute position in G90 and the position relative to start point of this block in G91 l Fine milling circle radius ranging from 0 0001mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative J Distance from fine milling start point to circle center ranging from 0 99999 9999mm Its
258. g and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual offset number is changed the old offset value will be immediately replaced by the new one For example Oxxxxx H01 G43 Z10 1 Offset number H01 takes effect G44 Z20 H02 2 Offset number H02 takes effect H03 3 Offset number H03 takes effect G49 4 Offset is cancelled at the end of the block M30 4 Tool length compensation cancel Specify G49 or HOO to cancel tool length compensation The tool length compensation is cancelled immediately after they are specified Note 1 After B mode of tool length offset is executed along two or more axes all the axis offsets are cancelled by specifying G49 however only the axis offset perpendicular to a specified plane is cancelled by specifying HOO 2 It is suggested that a moving code of Z axis be added for the set up and cancel of the tool length offset otherwise the length offset will be set up or cancelled at the current point Therefore please ensure a safe height in the Z axis when using G49 to prevent tool collision and workpiece damage 5 Example for tool length compensation I mm aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo A Tool length compensation boring hole 1 2 3 B HO1 offset value 4 Y Unit MM 3 120 NZ Actual position Offset value E 4MM Programmed position A 0 X Z Unit MM Fig 4 7 1 1 N1 G91 GOO X120 Y80
259. gnaleexternal power supply ON OFF eGSK 990MC using resolution 800x600 s color 8 4 inch display eChinese English Russian Spainish and Turkish display selected by parameter ePosition message euser program esystem setting ePLC e diagnotic message esystem parameter egraph ealarm message ehelp eActual feedrate spindle speed ereal time wave diagnosis esystem run time and other NC commands and status message Program edit Program capacity 57M store up to 400 programs Operation function Display Chapter 1 Overview P eProgram preview eprogram edit ebackground edit PLC processing speed 3us step up to 4700 steps 10 basic command 35 functional commands PLC ladder diagram on line edit function I O input output 48 48 extensible Communication RS 232 serial port USB communication interface to realize file transfer serial port DNC machining function function and USB on line machining function GSK GE series bus AC servo drive unit DA98 series GS series digital AC servo drive unit and SJT Adaptive drive servo motor 1 3 Product Model Definition GSK 990MC L Assembly omit the standard panel B box assembly 990MC Drilling Milling CNC System Logo for GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd 7 a O Ca 2 S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 7 a O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo Chapter 2 Programming Fundamentals Chapte
260. gram sssssssseeeeeee kk tk kk ERE RENEE ERE EEK E REE R ERE NERE REESE REE ERE E REE rtre rnern 261 101 3 Deletion ot Al Progress RE EN ne a ae cde Ane Si Sachets 261 TO COV Ola Froga wre een ie tee eee eet ceases ee 262 10 1 5 gt COBY ald Paste OM BDIOCKS cixercat tee die ioc sage cds alate a e a a a a 262 10 16 C tand Paste of BIOCKS sc cect acest sd eden tee eae ha dealer s en sauce bod Bee led e hak dear SEER 263 TOSSET UBIOCK IRODIAC SING ING sites sede ne A E EEE 263 102128 Rename ora Progra eoi eae n E a EE a a E E ex GA senda ae 263 109 Froga RESTAN narsasi aa a A 263 19 2 Program Manager Es sa nerne nasal sansen a A 265 102 1 Program Director Sear CM AE strech tk eee A a ce A a A UR sea Nes a 265 10 2 2 Numberof Stored Progra MS ar ech ewes ER ENE 265 1023 Storage GADaGIhy arera a ae re ES Es pel ears adele e aie aner re aad dale a 266 10 24 Viewing of Programi Liste issoria aon aa aaa reoler 266 1023 Froga LOCK aasa a a E E E AE ERE REESE ER 266 CHAPTER 11 SYSTEM COMMUNICATION seesssoccssoccesoocessoceesoccesoocesoocessocessoccesoccessosessoesesosee 267 tek SNC OMNU AUO Na a R tea tein eeaitarsta ag hen tad uslarnteetceadaeds 267 I T dl 26 02 ig gt en a a oe a a O E ER 267 Tk FUNCIONS uian a aa a e a aaa a a 267 Serial POR Data Transmissions E A a s a E E E GE 268 T1 1 4 Senal Porm On Line Na NINE LEE EEG EET Ea EEEE eee 271 USB Communicatoru E a a a 273 11 2 1 Overview and Pecauti
261. h over page by repressing PARAMETER key in program page SET 1 To switch over page by repressing SET key in set page 0 Not switch over page by repressing SET key in set page GRA 1 To switch over page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page 0 Not switch over page by repressing GRAPHIC key in graphic page DGN 1 To switch over page by repressing DIAGNOSE key in diagnosis page 0 Not switchover page by repressing DIAGNOSE key in diagnosis page ALM 1 To switch over page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page 0 Not switch over page by repressing ALARM key in alarm page Standard setting 1111 0111 System parameter number 026 HELP PLC SMDT SMDI SPET PETP PETP 1 To switch to program page by pressing panel Edit key 0 Not to switch to program page by pressing panel Edit key SPET 1 Turn to program page automatically by pressing PROGRAM in edit mode 287 gt O O D 5 Q x 288 Gr 44153 GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0 Not turn to program page automatically by pressing PROGRAM in edit mode SMDI 1 Turn to MDI page automatically by pressing PROGRAM in MDI mode 0 Not turn to MDI page automatically by pressing PROGRAM in MDI mode 1 Turn to current mode page selection automatically by pressing eee PROGRAM in MDI mode 0 Turn to MDI page selection automatically by pressing PROGRAM in MDI mode PLC 1 To switch over pag
262. he coordinate values of the intermediate point are stored in the CNC system Only the axis coordinate values specified by G28 are stored each time for the other axes not specified by G28 the coordinate values specified by G28 before are used If the current default intermediate point of the system is unknown when G28 is used it is recommended that each axis be specified with one Please take a consideration according to block N5 in the following example 3 R reference point Fig 4 3 1 1 1 The action of block G28 can be divided as follows refer to Fig 4 3 1 1 1 Positioning to the intermediate point of the specified axis from the current position point A point B at a traverse speed 2 Positioning to the reference point from the intermediate point point B point R at a traverse speed 2 G28 is a non modal code which is effective only in the current block 3 Single axis reference point return and multi axis reference point return are available The 50 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code intermediate point coordinates are saved by the system when the workpiece coordinate system is changed Example N1 G90 G54 XO Y10 N2 G28 X40 Set the intermediate point of X axis to X40 in G54 workpiece coordinate system and return to reference point via point 40 10 i e X axis returns to the reference point alone N3 G29 X30 Return to point 30 10 via point 40 10 from reference point i e X axis returns to
263. he lower the spindle speed is the more frequently the feedrate fluctuation occurs Note 2 In G95 mode the max feedrate per revolution is F500 which is executed by the system an alarm occurs when the max feedrate exceeds F500 Chapter 7 Feed Function F Code 7 3 Tangential Speed Control The cutting feed usually controls the speed in the tangential direction of the contour path to make it reach the specified speed value Start point End point End point Linear interpolation Circular mterpolation I Fig 7 3 1 F The speed along the tangent F3 Fx F F Fx The speed along X axis Fy The speed along Y axis Fz The speed along Z axis mm a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo 7 4 Keys for Feedrate Override The feedrate in MANUAL mode and AUTO mode can be overridden by the override keys on the operator panel The override ranges from 0 200 21 gears with 10 per gear In AUTO mode if the feedrate override is adjusted to zero the feeding is stopped by the system with O cutting override displayed The execution is continued if the override is readjusted 7 5 Auto Acceleration Deceleration The system enables the motor to perform acceleration deceleration control at the beginning and the end of the movement which thus obtains a stable start and stop In addition the automatic acceleration deceleration can also be applied when the moving speed is changed the speed thus can be changed steadily Therefore th
264. her the default mode is GOO parameter value is 0 or G01 parameter value is 1 after power on is set by bit parameter No 031 0 2 With no positioning parameter specified the tool does not move and the system only changes the mode of the current tool movement for GOO 3 G00 is the same as GO 4 The GO speed of axes X Y Z and 4th is set by data parameters P88 P91 Limitations The rapid traverse speed is set by parameter The speed F specified in the GO Command is the cutting speed of the following machining blocks Example GO X0 Y10 F800 Feeding at the speed set by system parameter G1 X20 Y50 Using the feedrate of F800 The rapid positioning speed is adjusted by the keys FO 25 50 100 on the operation panel see fig 4 2 1 2 The speed to which FO corresponds is set by data parameter P93 and it is common to all axes 23 I O Ca 3 Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual AW W0 apo R OVERRIDE J LX1 R OVERRIDE Fig 4 2 1 2 Keys for rapid feedrate override Note Note the position of the worktable and workpiece to prevent tool collision 4 2 2 Linear Interpolation 01 Code format G01 X_Y Z F_ Function The tool moves to the specified position along a straight line at the feedrate mm min specified by parameter I Explanation 1 X Y Z are the coordinates of the end point Since they are related to the
265. hine zero the machine traverses rapidly traverse speed set by data parameter No 100 No 103 before the deceleration point is reached After the deceleration switch is touched each axis returns to the zero at the speed set by P342 P345 After it is away from the block it moves to the machine zero point i e reference point at a speed of FL set by data parameter P099 As the machine zero is reached the coordinate axis movement stops and the Machine Zero indicator lights up 253 SGT HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual II D s Q O 3 254 Chapter 10 Eidt Operation Chapter 10 Eidt Operation 10 1 Program Edit 2 The edit for part programs should be operated in Edit mode Press key EDIT to enter Edit PROGRAM mode Press key to enter program page and press soft key E PROGRAM to enter the program editting and modification page see Fig 10 1 1 G92 X0 YO ZO N102 G G90 X74 295 Y S N106 230 M3 51508 M8 N108 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 028 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 931 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 033 N132 Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 876 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 N138 X75 354 Y 47 719 Z 023 N140 X75 26 Y 47 712 Z 917 N142 X75 142 Y 47 764 Z 009 N144 X75 Y 47 882 Z N146 X74 608 Y 48 274 Z 026 DATA td 48 43 PATH 1 E B EDT B END CHECK SAVE RETURN gt Press P to enter the
266. hs of two sides separated by a slash 7 O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo Ranging from 0 to 360 Example When 1 ATAN 1 1 is executed 1 225 The constant can replace the variable j Natural logarithm i LN j When antilog j is O or smaller an alarm occurs The constant can replace the variable fj Exponential function i EXP j When the operation result exceeds 99997 453535 j is about 11 5129 an overflow occurs and an alarm is issued The constant can replace the variable fj ROUND Crounding off function The round function rounds off at the first decimal place Example When 1 ROUND 2 is executed where 2 holds 1 2345 the value of variable 1 is 1 0 Rounding up and down to a integer When the value operation is processed by CNC if the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer If the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is smaller than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer Please be careful when handling negative numbers Example Suppose that 1 1 2 2 1 2 When 3 FUP 1 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 1 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 137 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC Syst
267. ide are defaulted into 100 and the machine does not stop during the feed hold key being pressed till the return operation is completed Tool radius compensation in the fixed cycle command the command function does not need executing the tool radius compensation so the tool radius compensation is ignored Program restart It is invalid during the rigid taping Note when the flexible tapping rigid tapping or deep hole rigid tapping is executed using G97 cancels the constant surface cutting feedrate otherwise teeth disorder or broken screw taper exists 4 5 3 Peck Rigid Taping Chip Removal Cycle Command format G84 or G74 XYZRPQFK Function In peck rigid taping cutting is performed several times until the bottom of the hole is reached X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P_ Minimum dwell time at the bottom of the hole or at point R when a return is made Its absolute value is used if it is negative Q Cut depth for each cutting feed F_ Cutting feedrate V_ Retraction distance d when it is not specified it is set by P284 K Number of repeats specify it if necessary 82
268. ified in pre reading control mode In pre reading 0239 control mode dividing spindle is specified max cutting feeding parameter is set to 0 and interpolation pro acceleration deceleration parameter is set to 0 MPG pulse is abnormal Bus connection error 0250 Axis name repeated please modify parameter NO 175 179 Emergency stop alarm perform zero return again after canceling the alarm Program ends illegally CNC transmission speed is low please reduce feedrate Pulse instruction of DSP interpolation axis is too big Perform zero return again after reset 0262 DSP alarm DSP is not started Please power on again 0263 DSP parameter setting error xipueddy DSP alarm Data is too big 0265 DSP alarm The bus can not be connected or bus initialization failure Speed of DSP interpolation axis exceeds 200M MIN Perform zero return again after reset 0267 DSP initial sign 5555 is abnormal Perform zero return again after reset 0268 DSP pulse output volume per revolution is too big Perform zero return again after reset DSP internal alarm Perform zero return again after reset 0270 Length of DSP equally distributed interpolation point is too small 0271 DSP received interpolation data is too small Perform zero return again after reset 0272 DSP received undistinguishable G code 0273 DSP hardware data interchange is abnormal instructions 0274 DSP hardware data interchange is abnormal data 0275 In high spee
269. illing and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual I m a O Ca x S 3 3 5 vo 118 Tool center path Programmed path a b Fig 4 7 3 25 d Overcutting by tool radius compensation 1 Machining an inner side of the corner at a radius smaller than the tool radius When the radius of a corner is smaller than the tool radius because the inner offsetting of the tool will result in overcutting an alarm for interference occurs and the CNC stops before the execution of the program An alarm occurs and the operation stops before the execution Tool center path SS ee Programmed path No interference check for overcutting path is performed in theory gt An overcutting occurs if the CNC does not stop Fig 4 7 3 26 2 When machining a groove smaller than the tool radius When a groove smaller than the tool radius is machined since the tool radius offset forces the path of the tool center to move in the reverse direction of the programmed path the overcutting will occur Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Tool center path gt FX An alarm occurs and the operation stops Programmed path An overcutting occurs if the CNC does not stop Fig 4 7 3 27 I 3 Machining a step smaller than the tool radius When the machining of the step is instructed by circular machining in the case of a program contain
270. in rectangular groove fine milling 2 L is smaller than 0 in groove rough milling L is too big 1 L is bigger than tool diameter in inner circular groove rough milling 0186 2 L is bigger than tool diameter in rectangular groove rough milling 3 L is bigger than I in rectangular groove rough milling 4 L is bigger than J in inner circular groove rough milling Tool diameter is too big 1 Tool diameter is bigger than I in inner circular groove rough milling 0187 327 gt O O D 5 Q x gt O D 5 Q x Gr MiB F GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 2 Tool radius is bigger than I J in inner circular groove rough milling 3 Tool radius is bigger than J in outer circular groove fine milling 4 Tool diameter is bigger than in rectangular groove fine rough milling 5 6 Tool diameter is bigger than J in rectangular groove fine rough milling Tool radius is bigger than U in rectangular groove fine rough milling 7 Radius coefficient of helical infeed is too big or D is too big Modify parameter No 269 or radius compensation value U is too big 0188 1 Twice of U in rectangular groove cycle is bigger than 2 Twice of U in rectangular groove cycle is bigger than J 0198 In constant surface cutting speed control specified axis error see parameter No 254 Modify the program Macro instruction modification program is not defined In rigid tapping S value ex
271. ing Il na Receive File 2 Click button I on GSK Com serial communication software then Receive File dialog pops up as is shown in Fig 11 1 3 1 O O D s Q O 5 4 GSEKComm Communicator C New popen gySave raste EBPrint Q About System GSK218M_ v nm n fl q oR a gs Sf Port COM1 GSK D Dec Communi c EH end File eceive File J et Por v Rawr ceive File Fig 11 1 3 1 3 Click button in Receive File dialog to obtain the CNC file list as is shown in Fig 11 1 3 2 268 Chapter 11 System Communication Eeceive File File List 000001 Rec 000002 Hot Rec 000003 Hot Rec 000004 Hot Rec 000008 Hot Rec 000011 Hot Rec 000055 Hot Rec 000132 Hot Rec 000214 Hot Rec 000251 Hot Rec 000333 Hot Rec 0006800 Hot Rec Receive Cancel Fig 11 1 3 2 3 Select the file or multiple files to be received then press button Receive to start the file receiving as is shown is Fig 11 1 3 3 Receiving File Hame Save Fath Receive Packs Error Il Fig 11 1 3 3 5 After the file receiving the status bar of the dialog displays Received as is shown in Fig 11 1 3 4 5 CD Q Receive File File List o00001 Received Oooo Hot Ree 000003 Hot Rec ooo004 Hot Ree 00008 Hot Ree 000011 Hot Rec 000055 Hot Rec 000132 Hot Rec 00214 Hot Rec 000251 Hot Rec 000333 Hot Rec apoeni
272. ing a step smaller than the tool radius the tool center path with the common offset becomes reverse to the programmed direction In this case the first vector is ignored and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position This single block operation is stopped at this point If the machining is not in the single block mode the auto run continues If the step is linear no alarm will be issued and the tool cuts correctly However the uncut part will exist 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo The end point of a single block Linear movement Tool center path gt Programmed path An overcutting occurs if the first vector is not ignored Fig 4 7 3 28 Starting tool radius compensation and cutting along Z axis It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z axis after the tool radius compensation is effected at some distance from the workpiece at the start of the machining In the case above if it is desired to divide the motion along the Z axis into rapid feed and cutting feed follow the procedure below If block N3 is divided as follows N1 G91 G00 X500 Y500 H01 N3 Z 250 N5 G01 Z 50 F1 N6 Y100 F2 The first vector is ignored 119 I 7 aS O Ca 3 S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual A N1 G91 GO X500 Y500 H01 N6 Offset mode N3 G01 Z 300 F1 N6 Y100
273. ing axis No 206 alarm occurs when the tapping axis is changed in the rigid tapping mode Override during tapping the feedrate and spindle speed override are defaulted into 100 and the machine does not stop during the feed hold key being pressed till the return operation is completed Tool radius compensation in the fixed cycle command the command function does not need executing the tool radius compensation so the tool radius compensation is ignored Program restart the program restart function is invalid in tapping cycle Tool radius offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation 4 4 6 Fine boring cycle G76 Format G76X Y ZQRPFK Function This cycle is used for boring a hole precisely When the tool reaches the hole bottom the spindle stops and the tool is moved away from the machined surface of the workpiece and retracted Prevent the retraction trail from affecting the machined surface smoothness and avoid the tool damage in the operation Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolu
274. ing range 0 99999 r min 0261 Spindle encoder lines 1024 Setting range 0 9999 0262 Spindle override lower limit 0 5000 Setting range 0 5 1 0266 Limit with vector ignored when moving along outside corner in tool radius compensation C Setting range 0 9999 9999 0267 Maximum value of tool wear compensation 400 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0268 Maximum error value of tool radius compensation C 0 0010 Setting range 0 0001 0 0100 0269 Helical infeed radius coefficient in groove cycle 1 5000 Setting range 0 0100 3 0000 0270 Retraction amount of high speed peck drilling cycle 2 0000 G73 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0271 Reserved space amount of canned cycle G83 2 0000 Setting range 0 999 9999 mm 0281 Minimum dwell time at the hole bottom 250 Setting range 0 1000 ms 0282 Maximum dwell time at the hole bottom 9999 Setting range 1000 9999 ms 0283 Override for retraction in rigid tapping 100 Setting range 0 100 Note when NO 44 4 1 override value is valid N0 45 3 1 the set data unit is 10 the override value can be set up to 1000 0284 Retraction or spacing amount in peck tapping cycle Setting range 0 100 mm 0286 Tooth number of spindle side gear the 1 gear Setting range 1 999 gt O O D 5 Q x 3 AK Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0287 Tooth number of spindle side gear the 2 gear Setting range 1 999 0288 Tooth number of
275. inish milling G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 Limitation when G24 G25 is used G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal code NO 48 0 is set to 1 otherwise G24 G25 is replaced by other codes in group 1 Tool radius compensation in the fixed cycle command the tool radius compensation is ignored the system calls the tool radius compensation specified by the program during the tool infeed 89 Or hd Sy GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 4 6 3 Outer Circle Finish Milling Cycle G26 G32 Command format G26 G98 G99 x Y Z R J D F K G32 Explanation G26 CCW outer circle fine milling cycle G32 CW outer circle fine milling cycle X Y The start point within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference level in G91 R R reference level which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to the start point of this block in G91 Fine milling circle radius ranging from 0 0001mm 99999 9999mm mm Its absolute value is used if it is a negative one J Distance from the milling start point to the milling circle center ranging from 0 0001mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is a negative one D Tool radius number ranging from 0 256 DO is defaulted for 0 The current tool radius value is obtained by the given number K Number of repeats Cycle process I
276. int R level then stop at the hole bottom for 1s Y 550 Y 750 X1000 Y 550 G98 Y 750 G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 M5 M30 Limitation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G89 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G89 is replaced by other G codes in group 1 Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation 4 4 12 Canned cycle cancel G80 Format G80 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R level Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R level Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R level Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R level Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level Return to the reference point Spindle stops I 7 O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo Function It is used for cancelling the canned cycle Explanation All the canned cycles are cancelled to perform normal operation Point R point Z are also cancelled and the other drilling and boring data is cleared as well Example M3 S100 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G88 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 120 F120 Y 550 Y 750 X1000 Y 550 G98 Y 750 G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 M5 Example Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Positioning bore hole 3 then ret
277. is T3 N30 T4 Spindle tool number is T3 N40 M6 Spindle tool number is T4 N50 T5 Spindle tool number is T4 N60 M30 After the tool change the spindle tool number is T4 155 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 7 a O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo 156 Il OPERATION O CD Q O gt 157 SGT HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual II D s Q O 3 158 Chapter 1 Operation Panel Chapter 1 Operation Panel 1 1 Panel Layout An integrated operator panel is applied to GSK990MC CNC system which consists of LCD area editing keyboard area soft key function area and machine control area which is shown below LCD display area editing keyboard area Cr HSZ x 20 26 Tm FR Y OSU AGE EN Z 37 833 mm GOO Gi GW G94 G21 Gee G49 G2 Gee C98 G15 Ge Ceo Ges G97 G13 I O CD Q soft key function area machine control area Fig 1 1 1 GSK990MC panel 1 2 Explanation for Panel Functions 1 2 1 LCD Display Area GSK 990MC system is employed with 8 4 inch color displays with resolution of 800x600 159 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 1 2 2 Editing Keyboard Area x lt gt N b z
278. is recommended to cancel the constant surface speed by G97 before threading 2 In a rapid traverse block specified by GOO the constant surface speed control is not made by calculating the surface speed by a transient change of the tool position but is made by calculating the surface speed based on the position at the end point of the rapid traverse block on the condition that cutting is not performed during rapid traverse Therefore the constant surface cutting speed is not used 3 When the flexible tapping rigid tapping or deep hole rigid tapping is executed using G97 cancels the constant surface cutting feedrate otherwise teeth disorder or broken screw taper exists I 7 a O ta s S 3 3 5 vo 150 Chapter 7 Feed Function F Code Chapter 7 Feed Function F Code The feed functions are used to control the feedrate of the tool The functions and control modes are as follows 7 4 Rapid Traverse G00 is used for rapid positioning The traverse speed is set by data parameters P88 P91 An override can be applied to the traverse speed by the OVERRIDE adjusting keys on the operator panel which are shown as follows WW A OVERRIDE Av100 my Wo A OVERAIDE Fig 7 1 1 Keys for rapid traverse override FO is set by data parameter P93 The acceleration of rapid positioning G0 can be set by data parameters P105 123 It can be properly set depending on the machine and the motor response characteristics Note
279. itial state of program switch Close 1 Debugging and above authorithies one key input output is effective for workpiece program 0 Debugging and above authorities one key input output is ineffective for workpiece program Standard setting 0000 0000 OPRG System parameter number 015 5 CANT CANT 1 Automatic clearing for single piece 0 Not automatic clearing for single piece Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 015 6 HNGD HISR HPF HPF 1 To select full running for MPG moving 0 Not select full running for MPG moving HISR 1 Use MPG step pause function 0 Not use MPG step pause function HNGD 1 Axes moving direction are identical with MPG rotation direction 0 Axes moving direction are not identical with MPG rotation direction Standard setting 1000 0001 System parameter number 0 517 PLW5 PLW4 PLW3 PLW2 PLW1 PLW1 1 The 1 axis pulse width is changeable along with speed 0 The 1 axis pulse width is fixed to 1 microsecond PLW2 1 The 2 axis pulse width is changeable along with speed 0 The 2 axis pulse width is fixed to 1 microsecond Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List PLW3 1 The 3 axis pulse width is changeable along with speed 0 The 3 axis pulse width is fixed to 1 microsecond PLW4 1 The 4 axis pulse width is changeable along with speed 0 The 4 axis pulse width is fixed to 1
280. ition Resend times of BUS external workpiece origin point X offset external workpiece origin point Y offset INPUT 16 56 23 PATH 1 BITPAR KI RETURN Fig 3 3 2 1 2 Refer to APPENDIX 1 PARAMETERS for details 3 3 2 2 Modification and Setting for Parameter Values 1 Select MDI mode SETTING 2 Press key to enter lt SETTING gt page turn on the parameter switch set the parameter switch to 1 SYSTEM 3 Press key sere then the soft key EMPARA to enter parameter display page 4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be modified Method 1 Press page keys to display the parameter to be set then move the cursor to the place to be modified SEARCH Method 2 Press key to search after inputting the parameter number 5 Input a new parameter value using number keys corresponding passwords are required for modifying parameters of different levels 6 Press key for confirmation then the parameter value is input and displayed 7 Turn off the parameter switch after setting all the parameters 3 3 3 Display Modification and Setting for Macro Variables 3 3 3 1 Macro Variable Display Press soft key EEMACRO to enter macro variable page which consists of two subpages CUSTOM and SYSTEM Both of them are available to be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys as is shown below 1 User variable page Press soft key CUSTOMER to enter this page 184 Chapter 3
281. itive border coordinate of the stored 9999 stroke detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0068 The 2 axis negative border coordinate of the stored 9999 stroke detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 300 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0069 The 2 axis positive border coordinate of the stored 9999 stroke detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0070 The 3 axis negative border coordinate of the stored 9999 stroke detection 1 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0071 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0072 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0073 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0074 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0075 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0076 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0077 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0078 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0079 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0080 The 3 axis positive border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 1 The 4 axis negative border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 1 The 4 axis positive border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 1 The 5 axis negative border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 1 The 5 axis positive border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 1 The 1 axis negative border coordinate of the stored stroke detection 2 Th
282. ive tool to tner the double drive debugging page The display contents in the page are shown in Fig 3 3 5 4 2 1 198 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 323211 657 w CUR ERROR ERROR 0 000 000 Ee con PULSE 528362 DATA 14 35 6 PATH 1 GV PARA ESP PARA HSTT Dou DRIVE RETURN Fig 3 3 5 4 2 1 3 3 5 4 3 Operation Explanations Execute the following steps by the double drive tool to perform the parallel alignment 1 Switch to the MPG mode 2 Adjust the MPG s step to 0 001 3 Set Align switch to 1 at the moment the synchronous axis cannot be synchronous and the MPG movement adjusts each axis 4 Execute the MPG movement according to Current Offset When the MPG movement exceeds Alignment legnth 1mm an alarm occurs The MPG moves again after resetting to Il O D FR Q ang O 5 cancel the alarm 5 Set Alignment switch to 0 At the moment the double drive synchronization is valid using the MPG double drive can view whether the motor s current feedback open the parallel degree is parallel Repeat the above step 1 4 till the alignment is successfully performed 3 4 Setting Display 3 4 1 Setting Page 1 Entering the page SETTING Press key to enter the SETTING page There are four subpages including SETTING EWORK EDATA and PASSWORD1 All of them can be viewed or modified by corresponding soft keys
283. l Delete unnecessary programs 0073 Program number already in use Change the program number or delete unneeded program 0074 Illegal program number beyond the range 1 99999 Change the program Ls number 0075 To register a protected program number SS 0076 Address P program name is not specified in block M98 Modify the program a 0077 Program nesting exceed 5 layers In blocks M98 G65 program name specified by address P is not found or 0078 macro program called by MO6 does not exist 0079 CNC expires the using date Please contact the supplier Input data is wrong Max speed is smaller than Min speed or Min speed is 0080 bigger than Max speed 0081 Subprogram can not be called 0084 Overtime or short circuit occurs in key HE 0085 Overflow occurs when data is transmitted to memory by series port Baud a rate setting or I O equipment is wrong 0086 Planes can not be shifted in canned cycle mode Alarm NO 0087 0091 are for reference point return unfinished starting point 0087 of reference return is too close to the reference point or the speed is too slow G27 check for reference return instruction can not return to the reference a point 0093 Motor type error of After power on or emergency stop when the program with G28 program 0098 restarts without executing reference return On parameter setting screen PWE parameter input is active is set to 1 Restart CNC after setting it to 0 0101 Memory dat
284. l X in the page flickers then press key to clear the relative coordinate in X axis 176 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting FEED UF mm min PRG SPEED FAN FEED OVRD 100 mm g 46 66 126 168 cH a Fa 25 50 100 _ SP 5 Orpm Y A e 89 nim S 00000 100 S 66 78 88 98 100118 120 SSS 4 5 480m Tool T COMMAND T NO T0000 OFFSET H DOGA G G17 G9 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0001 0000 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 00O 00 00 DATA 09 07 52 PATH 1 Fl ee Fig 3 1 3 2 3 Halving operation Press and hold key XxX till X in the page flickers then press key to halve the relative coordinate in X axis The relative coordinate of the axis is divided by 2 4 Coordinate setting Press and hold key X till X in the page flickers input the data to be set and press key for confirmation then the data will be input into the coordinate system 5 Steps for clearing Y and Z values are the same as the above O D FR Q ang O 5 3 1 4 Bus Monitor Position Page Display When the system selects the Ethernet bus communication mode pressing rs enters the position page display Press PMONI soft key to enter PMONI page In the page the system displays the current position s machine coordinates multi coil position encoder value grating position motor speed and motor load is a rated load s percentage
285. le E FEE FEE am BEEN EE ou aw Fig 5 1 1 1 By press moving key each time the corresponding axis on the machine is moved 0 1 mm O D FR Q ang O 5 5 1 2 Selection of Moving Axis and Direction X axis may be moved in the positive or negative direction by pressing axis and direction key x or Press the key once the corresponding axis will be moved for a step distance defined by system The operation for Y or Z axis is identical with that of X axis Simultaneous manual moving for 3 axes is unavailable in this system but simultaneous zero return for 3 axes is available 239 II D s Q O 3 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 5 1 3 Step Feed Explanation The step feed max clamp speed is set by data parameter P155 The step feedrate is beyond the control of the feedrate and rapid override 5 2 Step Interruption While the program running in Auto MDI or DNC mode is shifted to Step mode after a dwell operation the control will execute the step interruption The coordinate system of step interruption is consistent with that of MPG and its operation is also the same as that of MPG MPG for manual pulse generator i e handwheel similarly hereinafter See Section 6 2 Control in MPG Interruption for details 5 3 Auxiliary Control in Step Mode It is the same as that of Manual mode See Sections 4 2 and 4 3 in this manual for d
286. le dwell when rigid tapping starts Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 292 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0147 XSC SCL3 SCL2 SCL1 RIN RIN 1 Rotational angle of coordinate rotation by G90 G911 instruction 0 Rotational angle of coordinate rotation by absolute instruction SCL1 1 The 1 axis scaling effective 0 The 1 axis scaling ineffective SCL2 1 The 2 axis scaling effective 0 The 2 axis scaling ineffective SCL3 1 The 3 axis scaling effective 0 The 3 axis scaling ineffective XSC 1 Axes scaling override specified by J K 0 Axes scaling override specified by P instruction Standard setting 0111 1001 System parameter number 0 4 8 MDL MDL 1 G codes of unidirectional positioning set for modal 0 Gcodes of unidirectional positioning not set for modal Standard setting 0000 0000 system parameter number 0 14 9 RPST RPST 1 Z axis moving by G01 mode at reset 0 Zaxis moving by GOO mode at reset Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 015 0 SIM G90 REL REL 1 Relative position display setting of indexing table within 360 0 Relative position display setting of indexing table beyond 360 G90 1 Indexing instruction absolute instruction 0 Indexing instruction specified by G90 G91 1 Make alarm if indexing instruction and other axes in
287. lead 1 0mm So Z axis feedrate 1000 1 1000mm min So Z axis feedrate thread lead1 1mm r G94 feed per minute mode G95 feed per rev mode G00 X120 Y100 position G00 X120 Y100 position M29 1000 specify rigid mode M29 1000 specify rigid mode G74 Z 100 R 20 F1000 left hand rigid tapping G74 Z 100 R 20 F1 left hand rigid tapping G80 cancel tapping cycle G80 cancel tapping cycle G28 G91 X0 YO ZO return to the reference point G28 G91 X0 YO ZO return to the reference point M30 end of program M30 end of program Limitation G code G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G74 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G74 is replaced by other codes in group 01 M code Before G74 is specified using the miscellaneous function M code makes the spindle rotate When the spindle rotation is not specified the system automatically count the current spindle command speed on the R plane and then the spindle is regulated to clockwise rotation When G74 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed while the 1st hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution o
288. lling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual to display the alarm page There are 4 subpages ALARM USER HISTORY and OPERATE all of which can be viewed by the corresponding soft keys See Fig 3 7 1 to Fig 3 7 4 Whether the page is switched to alarm page when an alarm occurs can also be set by bit parameter No 24 6 1 Alarm page In lt ALARM gt page press soft key ALARM to enter this page as is shown in Fig 3 7 1 NO ALARM al Free EAT O EJ sow ewe O Fig 3 7 1 In alarm page the message of current P S alarm number is displayed See details about the alarm in Appendix 2 II O CD Q O 2 User page In lt ALARM gt page press soft key USER to enter external alarm page as is shown in Fig 3 7 2 NOTHING Fig 3 7 2 See GSKIIOMC CNC System PLC Installation and Connection manual for the details about the user alarm Note The external alarm number can be set and edited by users according to the site conditions The edited 222 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting contents of the alarm are input into the system via a transmission software The external alarm is the A of edit file LadChi txt and the two digits behind it are set by bit parameters 53 0 53 3 The default is 01 i e the file name is LadChi01 txt 3 History page In lt ALARM gt page press soft key HISTORY to enter this page See fig 3 7 3 P 01 01 p pS PATH
289. luding the absolute command and the incremental command The absolute command is a method of programming by the axis moving end point coordinates The end position involves the concept of coordinate system please refer to sections 2 4 1 2 4 4 The incremental command is a method of programming by the axis relative moving amount 29 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual The incremental value is irrelevant with the coordinate system concerned It only requires the moving direction and distance of the end point relative to the start point The absolute command and the incremental command are G90 and G91 respectively Y Start point I 40 100 Fig 4 2 4 1 For the movement from start point to end point in Fig 4 2 4 1 the programming by using absolute command G90 and incremental command G91 is as follows G90 GO X40 Y70 Or G91 GO X 60 Y40 The same action can be performed with the two methods users thus can choose either one of them 7 aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo as required Explanation gt With no command parameter It can be written into the block with other commands gt 690 and G91 are the modal values in the same group i e if G90 is specified the mode is always G90 default till G91 is specified If G91 specified the mode is always G91 till G90 specified System parameters Whether the default positioning parameter is G90 mode parameter is 0
290. lue beyond the one specified by parameter 214 In circular interpolation illegal axis is specified Modify the program In circular interpolation R radius I J and k distance from the start point to the center are not be specified 0023 In circular interpolation I J K and R are specified together Helical interpolation rotation angle is 0 G12 and other G code can t be in a same block Unsupported file format It is too large or with above 1024 bytes Tool length compensation instruction can not be in the same block with G92 0027 Modify the program In plane selection instructions two or more axes are specified at the same 0028 ne ate direction Modify the program The compensation value specified by D H is too big Modify the program 3 DO Go gt O D 5 Q x Gr 44153 GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Tool length compensation number or tool radius compensation number specified by D H code is too big Workpiece coordinate number specified by 0030 P is too big Modify the program When G10 sets the offset amount workpiece coordinate system additional workpiece coordinate system P value is too big or is not never specified Compensation value is too big or it is not specified when G10 sets the offset 0032 amount or the system variable writes an offset amount Modify the program 0033 The intersecting point of offset C or chamfer is not confirmed Modify
291. ly as required However when a program includes crossing repetition loop overlapped DO ranges an alarm occurs 140 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code 1 The identification numbers 1 to 3 3 DO loops can be nested to 3 levels can be used as many times as required oe nm WHILE DO 1 a geek Program WHILE DO 2 WHILE DO 3 END1 WHILE DO 1 END3 Processing I END 2 END 1 END 1 4 The control can be transferred 2 The ranges of DO cannot overlap to the outside of a loop 7 O ta S 3 3 5 vo WHILE DO 1 WHILE DO 1 Bios IF GOTO n WHILE DO 2 END1 END 1 Nn 5 Transfer cannot enter the loop area END 2 IF GOTO n WHILE DO 1 Nn END 1 Explanation gt Infinite loop When DO is specified without specifying WHILE statement an infinite loop from DO to END is produced gt Processing time When a transfer to a sequence number in GOTO statement occurs the sequence number is searched for Processing in the reverse direction is longer than the one in the forward direction The processing time can be reduced by using WHILE statement for repetition 141 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual gt Undefined varia
292. mmed tool path 50 50 Rotation center Fig 4 2 15 2 Example 2 Scaling and rotation G51 X300 Y150 P0 5 G68 X200 Y100 R45 G01 G90 X400 Y100 G91 Y100 X 200 Y 100 X200 G69 G50 M30 Y When only coordinate system When both scaling and rotation function is applied coordinate system ae rotation are applied When only scaling function 200 is applied lt Cutting program ie 100 0 100 200 300 400 Fig 4 2 15 3 I 7 a O Ca Q 3 3 5 vo Or S Example 3 Repetitive use of G68 GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual By program main program G92 X0 YO Z20 G69 G17 M3 S1000 GO 22 G42 D01 M98 P2100 P02100 M98 P2200L 7 tool offset setting subprogram call call 7 times G40 GO G90 220 XOYO M30 subprogram 2200 O2200 G91 G68 X0 YO R45 0 G90 M98 P2100 M99 subprogram 2100 02100 G90 GO X0 Y 20 right hand tool compensation setup G01Z 2 F200 X8 284 X14 142 Y 14 142 M99 I relative rotation angle 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo subprogram 02200 calls subprogram O2100 X Soo 8284 40 Subprogram Fig 4 2 15 4 4 2 16 Skip function G31 Command format G31 X_Y Z_ Function Linear interpolation can be specified after G31 in the same way as after G01 During the execution of this code if an external skip signal is input the execution of the
293. mmunication State File Hame Sent Bytes Sent time Sent Lines Bytes Sec Fig 11 1 4 2 System I O channel set to 0 Chapter 11 System Communication sending File Hame Partition Sent Pach Fig 11 1 4 3 System I O channel set to 1 on the CNC panel to receive data and then press button FEET on the panel to start the machining 5 Press key Note 1 Do not operate the serial communication software during DNC transmission except for ending the transmission Note 2 M99 is processed as M30 in DNC mode Note 3 Press key to cancel the operation after the machining is completed 11 2 USB Communication 11 2 1 Overview and Pecautions Precautions 1 Set I O channel to 2 in lt SETTING gt page 2 The CNC programs should be stored in the root directory of the U disk with file extension txt nc or CNC or they cannot be read by the system 3 After the USB communication is finished pull out the U disk when its indicator does not flicker or after a moment is waited for to ensure the completion of the data transmission 11 2 2 Operations Steps for USB Part Programs In lt MDI gt mode enter the SETTING DATA DEAL page press direction key or to move the cursor to PART PRGR Press soft key OUTPUT or INPUT to enter the page shown as follows Fig 11 2 2 1 273 O D FR Q ang O 5 Il O CD Q O Or ISG GSK990MC Drilling
294. n in the fixed cycle command the command function does not need executing the tool radius compensation so the tool radius compensation is ignored Note when the flexible tapping rigid tapping or deep hole rigid tapping is executed using G97 cancels the constant surface cutting feedrate otherwise teeth disorder or broken screw taper exists I 4 6 Compound Cycle G Code 7 O ta S 3 3 5 vo Comparative table of compound cycle G22 G38 Table 4 6 1 Drilling and Hole bottom Tool retraction cutting Z operation operation Z direction direction Rapidfeed Inner circular groove rough milling CCW Cutting feed Cutting feed Rapidfeed Outer circle finish milling cycle CCW Rapidfeed Outer circle finish milling cycle CW Limitation During the compound cycle positioning the tool radius offset D will be ignored Rapidfeed finner rectangular groove fine milling cycle CW Rapidfeed Rectangle outside fine milling cycle CCW Rapidfeed Rectangle outside fine milling cycle CW Rapidfeed Rectangular groove rough milling CW Rapidfeed Inner rectangular groove fine milling cycle ccw _ HEE SENE mm esa Cates e errorea Ferate Rectangular groove rough mlinggSOW M a St HEER SEN 4 6 1 Inner circular groove rough milling G22 G23 Command format G22 G98 G99 X Y ZRILLW Q VOD F_K K 85 I 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ S
295. n User Manual The radius offset number is specified by D code The offset value corresponding to the offset number is added to or subtracted from the moving code value in the program thus obtains the new moving code value The offset number can be specified by DOO D255 as required Whether the radius offset value is set by parameter value or radius value is selected by bit parameter NO 40 7 The offset value assigned to the offset number can be saved into the offset memory in advance using LCD MDI panel The range of the offset value is as follows Table 4 7 2 1 O e o Offset value D input in mm a Offset value D input in inch 39 3700 inch 39 3700 inch Note The default offset value of D00 is 0 that cannot be set or modified by the user The change of the offset plane can only be performed after the offset mode is cancelled If the offset plane is changed without cancelling the offset mode an alarm will be issued I 3 Plane selection and vector Compensation calculation is carried out in the plane selected by G17 G18 or G19 This plane is called the offset plane For example if XY plane is selected the compensation and vector calculation are carried out by X Y in the program The coordinates of the axes not in the offset 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo plane are not affected by compensation In simultaneous 3 axis control only the tool path projected on the offset plane is compensated The change of the
296. n XY plane of a square workpiece Operation steps are as follows 1 Start the spindle at a certain speed 2 Shift the system to relative coordinate display page First perform alignment in X direction Operate each moving axis and position them to X positive direction side of the workpiece in Manual mode move down Z axis to make the tool nose position lower than the workpiece surface and then move the tool towards the negative direction of the workpiece at a low speed usually using MPG feed mode stop the tool when it just cuts to the workpiece Here press 235 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual CANCEL key onthe edit panel area and then press key to set the X coordinate to 0 Use the same method to set X coordinate to other values e g input x20 and press key INPUT xX 3 Similarly move the tool to the negative direction side of the workpiece and press key after positioning then press key to complete halving operation Note that halving setting does not change the absolute coordinates and machine coordinates 4 Move the tool to the position where the relative coordinate of the axis is 0 The position is the center in X direction x 5 In the SETTING page select WORKPIECE COORDINATE subpage press key and then key to finish the zero point setting for X axis 6 At the center i e the positioned point where the relative coordinates of X
297. n at both ends of the corner There are 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo four types of inner corners as shown in Fig 4 6 2 1 In the figure 2 lt lt p lt 1 78 Op is set by data parameter P144 Tool programmed path 2 Lin ear Circular 1 Linear Linear Pooliennierpalh 3 Circular Linear 4 Circular Circular Fig 4 8 2 1 4 When a corner is determined to be an inner corner the feedrate is overridden before and after the inner corner The Ls and Le where the feedrate is overridden are distances from points on the tool center path to the corner As shown in Fig 4 8 2 2 Ls Les2mm 122 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Programmed path DA Tool center path ad The feedrate is overridden from point a to point b Fig 4 8 2 2 Straight line to straight line 5 When a programmed path consists of two arcs the feedrate is overridden if the start and end points are in the same quadrant or in adjacent quadrants and P145 controls the lowest feedrate of the automatic corner deceleration Fig 4 8 2 3 I Programmed path Tool center path FS 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Feedrate is overridden from point a to point b Fig 4 8 2 3 Arc to arc 6 Regarding a program from straight line to arc or from arc to straight line the feedrate is overridden from point a to point b and from point c to point d Fig 4 8 2 4 Programmed path Tool center path
298. n code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Limitation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G73 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G73 will be cancelled Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored during the canned cycle positioning Example M3 S1500 The spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G73 X0 YO Z 15 R 10 Q5 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R level Y 50 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R level 58 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Y 80 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R level X10 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R level Y10 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R level G98 Y75 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO ZO Return to reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Note In the example above the chip removal operation is still performed though Q is omitted during the machining for the holes 2 to 4 4 2 Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle G81 Format G81 X_Y_Z R F_K_ Function This cycle is used for normal drilling Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole and then the tool is retracted from the bottom in rapid traverse Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point
299. n position check in exact stop mode is to check whether the servo motor has reached within a specified position range 4 In exact stop mode the tool movement paths in cutting mode and tapping mode are different See Fig 4 8 1 1 Position check lt Tool path in exact stop mode 1 Tool path in cutting mode or taping mode Fig 4 8 1 1 Tool path from block 1 to block 2 121 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 4 8 2 Automatic Override for Inner Corners G62 Format G62 Function Once specified this function keeps effective till G63 G61 or G64 is specified When the tool moves along an inner corner during tool radius compensation override is applied to the cutting feedrate to suppress the amount of cutting per unit time In this way a smooth machined surface is produced Explanation 1 When the tool moves along an inner corner and inner arc area during tool radius compensation it is decelerated automatically to reduce the load on the tool and produce a smooth machined surface 2 Whether automatic corner override function is valid or not is set by bit parameter NO 16 7 I Automatic corner deceleration function is controlled by bit parameter NO 15 2 0 angle control 1 speed difference control 3 When G62 is specified and the tool path with tool radius compensation applied forms an inner corner the feedrate is automatically overridde
300. n value specified in the peck drilling G73 G83 At this moment if the code parameter Q is not specified or it is 0 the system performs the hole positioning in XY plane but it does not perform the drilling operation When the bit parameter NO 43 1 1 an alarm will be issued if no cut in value is specified in the peck drilling G73 G83 i e an alarm 0045 Address Q not found or set to 0 G73 G83 occurs when the code parameter Q is not specified or it is 0 If the Q value is negative the system uses its absolute value to perform intermittent feeding Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle code the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level when the tool compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time L Example R M3 S2000 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G83 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 Q15 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 then return to point R Q Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point M5 Spindle s
301. nal workpiece zero offset value reference offset amount P 1 to 6 Workpiece zero offset values of workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 X Y Z For absolute code G90 it is workpiece zero offset of each axis For incremental code G91 itis the offset to be added to the set workpiece zero of each axis the result of addition is the new workpiece zero Offset Using G10 each workpiece coordinate can be changed respectively I 7 O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Workpiece system 1 G54 Workpiece system 2 G55 Workpiece system 3 G56 Workpiece system 4 G57 Workpiece system 5 G58 Machine zero Workpiece coordinate system offset Workpiece system 6 G59 war Machine reference point Fig 4 2 8 1 As shown in Fig 4 2 8 1 after power on the machine returns to machine zero by manual zero return The machine coordinate system is set up by the machine zero which thus generates the machine reference point and determines the workpiece coordinate system The corresponding values of offset data parameter P10 13 in workpiece coordinate system are the integral offset of the 6 workpiece coordinate systems The origins of these workpiece coordinate systems can be specified by inputting the coordinate offset in MDI mode or by setting data parameters P15 P43 These 6 workpiece coordinate systems are set up by the distances from machine zero to their respective
302. nate of Y s center point is counted by P3 and P4 Y coordinates Operation steps Step 1 manually move the tool or press lt Measure gt after the halving rod moves to the 1 measured point Step 2 repeat Step 1 s operations till all measured points are measured 3 points for a circle and 4 points for a rectangle 204 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting Step 3 press lt Start gt to set coordinates of the center point to the selected coordinate system 2 Automatic halving Page display and parameter item explanation A Common use parameter item 1 co measure mode O manual 1 automatic workpiece type 1 hole amp outer circle 2 convex worktable amp groove 3 vector hole amp outer circle 4 vector convex worktable amp groove Note 1 hole 1 outer circle 2 groove 2 convex worktable 3 vector hole 3 vector outer circle 4 vector groove 4 vector convex worktable coordinate system selection S G54 G59 G54 P1 P50 tool offset number T Tool offset number The tool radius compensation value during interpolation machining is stored in the tool offset number experienced value s tool offset number E Have stored an experienced value s tool offset number E and T cannot assigned to the same value during programming rough center coordinate Cx X absolute coordinate value of the workpiece s rough center When the current point is set to the rough center lt Input
303. ncrement unit Z K gt Least instruction increment unit Fig 2 6 3 Creating or changing forbidden area using programs If it is set by a G12 instruction specify the data by the distance from the machine coordinate system in the least input increment Input increment The programmed data is then converted 169 Il O D Q O 5 SGT HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Into the numerical values in the least command increment and the values are set as the parameters Example 1 The inside is the forbidden area bit parameter NO 11 0 0 N1 G12 X50 Y40 Z30 120 J10 K15 Setting point A 50 40 30 and point B 20 10 15 forthe tool forbidden area N2 G01 X30 Y30 220 Linear interpolation to 30 30 20 N3 G13 Cancelling stored stroke check N4 G01 X50 Example 2 The outside is the forbidden area bit parameter NO 11 0 1 N1 G12 X50 Y40 Z30 120 J10 K15 Setting point A 50 40 30 and point B 20 10 15 for the tool forbidden area N2 G01 X10 Y 10 Z 10 Linear interpolation to 10 10 10 N3 G13 Cancelling the stored stroke check N4 G01 X50 3 Check point for the forbidden area Before programming for the forbidden area please confirm the check point the top of the tool nose or tool holder As is shown in Fig 2 6 4 if the check point is A tool nose the distance a should be set as the data for stored function check if the check
304. nd frequency multiplying 1 65536 Command frequency division 1 65536 Rapid traverse speed max 60m min Rapid override FO 25 50 100 to real time adjustment Cutting feedrate max 15m min G94 or 500 00mm r G95 Feedrate override 0 200 divided into 21 to realize real time adjustment MPG feed 0 001 0 01 0 1mm single step feed 0 001 0 01 0 1 1mm Front post acceleration deceleration linear or S acceleration deceleration Time constant of acceleration deceleration can be set Acceleration d Post acceleration deceleration linear or exponential acceleration deceleration Time constant of eceleration acceleration deceleration can be set Jog MPG Single step mode using post acceleration deceleration Rapidly positioning cutting feed can select front post acceleration deceleration Specify with M and 2 digit M function can be customized Motion control System s interior M commands they cannot be defined again end of program M02 M30 program stop MOO optional stop M01 subprogram call M98 end of subprogram M99 M commands defined by the standard PLC M03 M04 MO5 M08 MO9 M10 M11 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M26 M27 M28 M29 M35 M36 M44 M45 M50 M51 Miscellaneous function 7 a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Taal hunchon eT and 4 digit selection toole256 groups of tool offset valueelength compensationewear compensationeC radius tool compensation eS2 digit I O gears con
305. nd hole machining data are shown in Table 4 4 1 i Parameter Designation al Refer to table 4 4 3 and note the restrictions above machining Hole position data Hole machining Restrictions X Y Table 4 4 1 Explanation The hole position is specified by either absolute value or incremental value and the control is identical to that of G00 positioning As Fig 4 4 2 shows the distance from point R level to the hole bottom is specified by incremental values or the hole bottom coordinates are specified by absolute values As shown in fig 4 4 1 the feedrate is the speed specified by F in operation 3 while it is the rapid traverse speed or the speed specified F code in operation 5 depending on different hole machining types In Fig 4 4 2 the distance from the initial level to point R level is specified by incremental value or point R level coordinates are specified by absolute values The feedrates shown in fig 4 4 1 are both rapid traverse in operations 2 and 6 It is used to specify the cut in value each time in G73 or G83 or the parallel movement value incremental value in G76 or G87 It is used to specify the dwell time at the hole bottom The canned cycle code can be followed by a parameter P_ which specifies the dwell time after the tool reaches the Z plane with unit of ms The min value of the parameter can be set by number parameter P281 and the max value by data parameter P282 It is used for
306. ng bore hole 2 then return to point R R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 Limitation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G85 cannot be specified in a same block otherwise G85 is replaced by other G codes in group 1 7 O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation 4 4 8 Boring cycle G86 Format G86 X_Y_ Z RFK Function This cycle code is used to perform a boring cycle the dwell operation is not required when the tool is at the bottom of hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R F Cutting feedrate K_ Repetitive number 69 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System
307. nge 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0012 External workpiece origin offset amount along the 3 0 0000 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0013 External workpiece origin offset amount along the 4 0 0000 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 296 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0014 External workpiece origin offset amount along the 5 0 0000 axis Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0015 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 1 axis in 0 0000 G54 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0016 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 2 axis in G54 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0017 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 3 axis in G54 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0018 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 4 axis in G54 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0019 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 5 axis in G54 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0020 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 1 axis in G55 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0021 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 2 axis in G55 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0022 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 3 axis in G55 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0023 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 4 axis in G55 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0024
308. nput 0 metric input If INI is set to 0 in metric input the basic unit for linear axis is mm mm min that for rotary 279 gt O D 5 Q x Gr 44157 GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual axis is deg deg min If INI is set to 1 in inch input the basic unit for linear axis is inch inch min that for rotary axis is deg deg min MSP 1 Double spindle control is used 0 Double spindle control is not used SEQ 1 Automatic sequence number insertion 0 Not automatic sequence number insertion SVCD Use a bus servo card 0 Do not use a bus servo card 1 High speed and high precision mode 15 0 and 17 0 can not be modified and only 4 axis and 3 link can be used 0 Common mode When the high speed and high precision mode is changed into common mode default setting for 15 0 is 1 Standard setting 0000 000 MODE System parameter number 0 0 1 RASS RAS4 RAS3 RAS2 RAS1 SPT SBUS RASA RASA 1 use an absolute grating ruler 0 donot use an absolute grating ruler SBUS 1 the spindle driver uses the bus control mode Q the spindle driver does not use the bus control mode SPT 1 1 0 control 0 frequency conversion or others RAS 1 set the 1 axis to use a grating ruler 0 set the 1 axis not to use a grating ruler RAS2 1 set the 2 axis to use a grating ruler gt 0 set the 2 axis not
309. nt 13 3 1 2 Sequence number and program DIOCKs 24 02 net le el ee n kk r nen 14 SOMO WO asena a E A SETE SEERE a E E I 14 3 2 General Structure Of a Program scsesscsensccessssesscceescceusssssssceescceessessuecessceessosenseueases 16 3 2 1 Subprogram Writing eee 17 B22 MUDPlOOraln Call aaan tae eh a eh at sl NSA NE BEES ASERNE FR ei el eh ENNA n a es 17 32 9 Program EA oa e eee 18 CHAPTER 4 PREPARATORY FUNCTION G CODE sssessssoccssoccesoocesoocessoccesoocesoocessocessoesessoseoo 19 Al Ypes Ol G C Odena A 19 A2 Me GOC HESS ara ne re Pn ETOR 23 AZ Ar Rapid Fostionino GOO cise ae a ec eee aed nee Fe ES ee 23 A22 dinear interpolation OA onenei Oe hearin Ceti e ada hac SENERE EET diaries ed e densely 24 4 2 3 Circular Helical Interpolation G02 G03 u u u u nscds scsssnsnnenke tsk kk RER ERR SENERE ER ERE ERE RER E REE REE SEEREN ERR RER R REE E LEE E ERE EEE 25 4 2 4 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 u u u dsdss sssneeneneen kst k kk RER E RE ERE RER E RER E RE ER ERE E REESE REESE REE REE REE E EG 29 A 2 DWG OA ss stares ES EEN cde seo nk aoe edd Macleod he mses ere ge oner oe 30 4 2 6 Single direction positioning G60 oo eeeccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeesaeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeas 31 4 2 7 On line modification for system parameters G10 ccceccccceeeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeessaeeesaaeeeeeeeeaees 32 4 2 8 Workpiece coordinate system G54 Gd9 oo eecccccseeeee ce eeeeeaeeeees
310. number increases by 1 M98 Subprogram calling M99 Subprogram ends and returns execution is repeated MOO Program dwell mn Program optional wel MO SpindeCW_ o M04 Spinde CCW _ __ S O M05 Spindlestop o M08 Cooling ON o O M09 Cooling OFF S O M0 Aaxsrelease o SSC CY M Aaxisclamp o M18 Spindle orientation cancel S M codes M19 Spindle orientation O OC SOSS controlled gt i py PLC M20 Spindle neutral gear instruction _ __ _ M26 Chip flushing water valve ON O o M238 Rigid taping cancel o M29 _ Rigidtaping o When a move instruction and miscellaneous function are specified in the same block they are simultaneously executed When a numerical value is specified behind address M code signal and strobe signal are sent to the machine The machine uses these signals to turn on off these functions Usually only one M code can be specified in a block In some cases up to three M codes can be specified in a block by setting bit parameter No 33 7 Some M codes cannot be specified simultaneously because of the restrictions of the mechanical operation See the machine manual provided by the tool builder for the mechanical operation restrictions on simultaneous specification for M codes in one block 5 1 M codes Controlled by PLC If an M code controlled by PLC is in the same block with a move instruction they are executed simultaneously 143 I O Ca 2 Q 3 3
311. nused TMR address 1020 No parameters in functional instruction Input tne legal parameters 1021 PLC stops automaticaly by CNC when PLC execution overtime 1022 Please input the name offuncionalcode Ooo 1023 Address or constant of functional instruction parameter is out of range 1024 Unnecessary relay or coil exists Delete the unnecessary connection Functional instruction output wrongly NET link linage beyond the supported range Change the ladder Z d A vr no oon nt output address CO T E A FE I I C l 1039 Instruction or network beyond executable area Please clear it Functional instruction CALL or SP is wrongly used Correspondence between CALL and SP or between SP and SPE is wrong SP functional instruction is used again between SP and SPE or SP is set before using END2 Level conducting line in parallel with node network PLC system parameter file is not loaded 332
312. o ows ___ _ o o o 2005 0011 l 49 37 PUT PATH 1 E pee OFFSET HEPARA MACRO Fig 3 3 4 1 1 3 3 4 2 Modification and Setting for Pitch Offset Il O O D s Q O 5 1 The pitch error offset point for each axis is set by data parameters P221 P224 the pitch error offset interval by data parameters P226 P229 and the pitch error offset multiplier by data parameters P231 P234 2 In lt MDI gt mode input the offset value for each point in turn Note Refer to VOLUME 4 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION in GSK990MC CNC System Installation and Connection Manual for the setting of pitch offset 3 3 5 Bus Servo Parameter Display Modification and Setting SYSTEM fre ot enter the system parameter switch the display EBUS page by pressing the corresponding key See Fig 3 3 5 1 186 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting BUS OR NOT 1 AXIS EX CARD ENCODER TYPE GRATING TYPE MAX ERROR SP EX CARD AXIS SET ZERO Ne LIMIT Po LIMIT GRATING 1 SETTING 00A 00O 2 SETTING 00A BBB 3 SETTING 888 00O NOTE NO 1 YES 14 27 29 DATA o E PATH 1 OFFSET EIPARA MACRO PITCH Bus cone Fig 3 3 5 1 BUS page operation explanation Press the soft key HH BUS to enter the bus page to view some parameters or modify corresponding parameters which is shown in Fig 3 3 5 1 The concrete operation metho
313. o reserve G codes of 07 group at reset or emergency stop Standard setting 1000 0000 System parameter number 0 3 6 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 c09 C08 C08 1 To clear G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 08 group at reset or emergency stop c09 1 To clear G codes of 09 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 09 group at reset or emergency stop C10 1 To clear G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 10 group at reset or emergency stop C11 1 To clear G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 11 group at reset or emergency stop gt C12 1 To clear G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop 5 0 To reserve G codes of 12 group at reset or emergency stop C13 1 Toclear G codes of 13 group at reset or emergency stop lt 0 To reserve G codes of 13 group at reset or emergency stop C14 1 To clear G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 14 group at reset or emergency stop C15 1 Toclear G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop 0 To reserve G codes of 15 group at reset or emergency stop Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 01317 soc RSC BDP SCRW SCRW 1 To perform pitch compensation 0 Not perform pitch compensation 1 To calculate G96 spindle speed according to current c
314. ock from P1 to P2 The offset value is specified by DO7 i e the offset number is set to 7 and G41 specifies the tool path compensation left After the offset starts when the workpiece figure is programmed as P1 gt P2 P9 P10 P11 the tool path compensation is performed automatically Example for tool path compensation program G92 X0 YO Z0 N1 G90 G17 GO G41 D7 X250 Y550 Offset value must be preset using offset number N10 X250 Y550 N11 GO G40 X0 YO 1 1 2 N2 G1 Y900 F150 3 N3 X450 4 N4 G3 X500 Y1150 R650 5 N5 G2 X900 R 250 6 N6 G3 X950 Y900 R650 7 N7 G1 X1150 8 N8 Y550 9 N9 X700 Y650 0 1 104 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code n r O N 1 250 4 l i C1 700 1300 l i P5 900 1 150 i 650R bs 650R Se P4 500 1150 r l C2 1150 1550 qs gt ane P6 950 900 gree aaes A P2 250 900 P3 450 900 P7 1150 900 I Or re l P9 700 650 1150 550 i 250 550 Se P i Pee DE gore eee l yo ST j y O Y axis BR 7 X axis Q Start point programmed origin Fig 4 7 2 9 4 7 3 Explanation for Tool Radius Compensation Conception Inner side and outer side when an angle of intersection created by tool paths specified with move codes for two blocks is over 180 it is called inner side when the angle is between 0 and 180 it is called outer side Inner side Outer sid
315. ock containing MOO is executed the auto running pauses and the modal message is saved After key is pressed the program execution continues 2 Program optional stop M01 J OPTIONAL If key SIOP is pressed before the program execution the automatic running pauses and the modal message is saved when the block containing M01 is executed in the program After key 2 is pressed the program execution is continued 3 Pressing key 2 If key 2 is pressed during the auto running the machine states are as follows 1 Machine feeding slows down and stops 2 Dwell continues if Dwell G04 instruction is executed 3 The other modal message is saved 4 The program execution continues after key 2 is pressed 4 Pressing key Ea See Section 2 3 1 in this manual 5 Pressing Emergency Stop button See Section 2 3 2 in this manual Il O D s Q O 5 In addition if the control is switched to other mode from Auto mode DNC mode or MDI page of MDI mode in which the program is being executed the machine can also be stopped The steps are as follows 1 If the control is switched to Edit MDI DNC mode the machine stops after the current block is executed 2 If the control is switched to MANUAL MPG Step mode the machine interruption stops immediately 3 If the control is switched to Machine zero interface the machine slows down to stop 246 Chapter 7 Auto Operation 7 4 Auto Running from Any
316. ode the code is not executed 5 1 4 AAxis Release Clamping M10 M11 Code M10 Aaxis releases M11 Aaxis clamps 5 1 5 Spindle Orientation Cancellation M18 M19 Code M18 cancel the spindle orientation M19 orient the spindle 5 1 6 Rigid Taping M28 M29 Code M28 cancel the rigid taping M29 specify the rigid taping 5 1 7 Helical Chip Remover ON OFF M35 M36 Code M35 the helical chip remover ON M36 the helical chip remover OFF 5 1 8 Chip Flushing Water Valve ON OFF M26 M27 Code M26 the valve ON M27 the valve OFF 5 1 9 Spindle Blowing ON OFF M44 M45 Code M44 control the spindle blow ON M45 control the spindle blow OFF 144 Chapter 5 Miscellaneous Function M Code 5 2 M Codes for Controlling Programs M codes used by a program are divided into main program type and macro type If an M code used by a program and a move instruction are in a same block the move instruction is executed prior to the M code Note 1 Codes M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 cannot be specified together with other M codes or an alarm is issued When these codes are in the same block with other non M instructions the non M instructions are executed prior to the M codes Note 2 This kind of M codes include the codes that direct the CNC to perform the internal operation in addition to sending the M codes themselves to the machine e g the M code to disable the block prereading function Moreover the codes to send
317. odes in the same group Example G01 and G00 are modal in the same group 3 GO1X _ Z 601 valid S X G01 valid 3 2 G00 Z__ G00 valid It is the normal machining mode when the system bit parameter NO 0 7 is set to 0 and the high speed and high precision machining mode when NO 0 7 set to 1 Note 1 F indicates the normal machining mode T indicates high speed and high precision machining mode Note 2 Refer to System Parameter List for details Table 4 1 2 G codes and their functions Whether high speed tn Function precision mode is valid GOOX YZ Positioning rapid traverse GO1X Y ZF Linear interpolation cutting feed Circular interpolation CW clockwise Circular interpolation CCW counter clockwise G04 P_ G04 X_ Dwell exact stop GIOL NP R_ Programmable data input Programmable data input cancel Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Whether high speed en Group Format eit Function precision mode is valid amp G12X YZ IJK Stored stroke detection G12 ON F Stored stroke detection OFF 615 5 Polar coordinate Command cancel Command I pl Written in blocks used for circular AN Plane es ES On G18 02 i i F ZX plane selection interpolation and tool radius compensation i G19 YZ plane selection petini in inch Must be specified in a single block Tmputin metrics m metric PORO G23 G23X YZRILWQVD
318. offset plane can only be performed after the compensation is cancelled Table 4 7 2 2 G17 X Y plane G18 Z X plane G19 Y Z plane 4 G40 G41 G42 The cancellation and execution of the tool radius compensation vector are specified by G40 G41 G42 They are used in combination with G00 G01 G02 G03 to define a mode to determine the value and the direction of the offset vector Table 4 7 2 3 G40 Tool radius compensation cancel G41 Tool radius compensation left G42 Tool radius compensation right 5 G53 G28 or G30 code in tool radius compensation mode If G53 G28 or G30 code is specified in tool radius compensation the offset vector of tool radius offset axis is cancelled after the specified position is reached cancelled at the specified 100 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code position in G53 cancelled at the reference point in G28 G30 and the other axes except tool radius offset axes are not cancelled When G53 is in the same block with G41 G42 all the axes cancel their radius compensation when the specified position is reached when G28 or G30 is in the same block with G41 G42 all the axes cancel their radius compensation after the reference point is reached The cancelled tool radius compensation vector will be restored in the next buffered block containing a compensation plane Note In offset mode whether the compensation is temporarily cancelled when G28 or G30 moves to the intermittent point is deci
319. oint Z the spindle stops and retreats reversely I 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Standard deep hole rigid tapping cycle In position mode NO 46 1 is set to 1 K parameter NO 7 7 is set to 1 specify M29 S to be a deep hole rigid tapping cycle before tapping code use a standard deep hole tapping cycle mode and its setting method is the same that of the flexible standard deep hole tapping Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle instruction the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation instruction G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Limitation G code when G 4 G84 is used G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal code NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G84 Cor G74 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G84 Cor G74 is replaced by other codes in group 1 M codes before G 4 G84 is specified using the miscellaneous function M code makes the spindle rotate When the spindle rotation is not specified the system automatically count the current spindle command speed on the R plane and then the spindle is regulated to clockwise rotation 74 counterclockwise G84 when G74 G84 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed while the 1st hole positioning
320. ol is moved along the real line as in the above figure by the program otherwise the bigger the cutting feedrate is or the longer the time constant of the acceleration deceleration is the bigger the arc at the corner is For circular instruction the actual arc radius of the tool path is smaller than the arc radius specified by the program The mechanical system permitting reduce the acceleration deceleration time constant as far as possible to minimize the error at the corner 154 Chapter 8 Tool Function Chapter 8 Tool Function 8 1 Tool Function By specifying a numerical value up to 8 digits following address T the tools on the machine can be selected Only one T code can be specified in a block by principle However if no alarm occurs when a block contains two or more instructions of the same group via setting the last T code takes effect Refer to the manual provided by the tool machine builder for the digits after address T and the corresponding machine operation of T code When a movement instruction and a T code are specified in the same block the instructions are executed simultaneously When the T code and tool change instruction are in the same block the T code is executed before tool change instruction If they are not in the same block M06 executes the T code specified y by the last program amp Such as the program below 3 000010 2 N10 T2M6 Spindle tool number is T2 N20 M6T3 Spindle tool number
321. on The spindle is rotated in the reverse direction when the bottom of the hole is reached in this tapping cycle Explanation 77 I 7 aS O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual X Y Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P_ Minimum dwell time at the hole bottom The absolute value is used if it is a negative one F_ Cutting feedrate K Repetitive number specify it if neccessary G74 G98 G74 G99 Spindle stop Spindle stop Sper tion 7 PO Q Initial level TE Operation 2 Operation 6 Operation 2 Point R level i Spindle stop Spindle CCW X Spindle stop Spindle CCW p Point R P Point R P Operation 3 Operation 5 Operation 3 Operation 5 Spindle stop Spindle CW Spindle stop Spindle CW lt Point Z P Operation 4 Point Z P Operation 4 Fig 4 5 1 1 After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed along Z axis to point R level The spindle is rotated CW for tapping from point R level to Z level by G74 instruction When tapping is completed the spindle
322. oncerned One key operation completed system alarm Parameters taking effect after power off are modified The input output operation of the macro Skip the input output operation of this file in the system have not been set The update for the ladder and ladder Transmission is parameters has been completed please executed which turn on the power requires power on again again 4 File reading failed File error Interrupt the input output operation 5 File writing failed File error ERUPTIE input output operation i Interrupt the File copy failed File error input output operation The part program is Interrupt the arge ne PRAE UEN greater than 4M input output operation is The storage capacity is Interrupt the Insufficient storage capacity not enough input output operation 6 File LADCHI TXT is invalid after it is transmitted to the system until the power is turned off and on again 213 II O D s Q mp O 5 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 3 4 5 Setting and Modification for Password Authority To prevent the part programs and CNC parameters from malicious modification the password authority setting is available in this GSK218MC system It is classified into 5 levels which are the 1st level system manufacturer the 2nd level machine builder the 3rd level system debugging the 4th level end user and the 5th lev
323. only executed for the 1st hole for the other holes the M code is not executed Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle code the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level If the tool compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time Axis switching The canned cycle must be canceled before the drilling axis is changed Boring In a block that does not contain X Y Z or other axes boring is not performed Example M3 S500 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G76 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 Q5 P1000 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to point R Orient at the bottom of the hole then shift by 5mm Stop at the bottom of the hole for 1s Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops 67 I 7 O ta s
324. ons cccccccccsecccceececeeeeceeeeceececeneeceucesseeeeseeeeseusessacessueeeseueeseueesseeeeesneessaees 273 11 2 2 Operations Steps for USB Part Programs cccccsscccsseeceeeeeceeeecaececeeeeceeeeecaeeesaueeseuaescseeeesnees 273 APPEND A irn 277 APPENDIX 1 GSK990MC PARAMETER LIST cccssssccsssssccsssssccsssssccssssscssssccssssscsssssssees 279 Parameter A AU OY cs xt Sets Sica ste sacs ns des tale ss vena r ses nd tens Set x es Sit seca ents Aa DNA ER 279 K RE 11080 0721 C2 g ic G cement eam ent E a aca er eee oe me eee Ae oie eet eee nT eee ore ee ee RENE SE eee 279 2 192 k ES CI TE ee ne eee en nt a eee Pen mR oe a ee er ene ere 296 APPENDIX 2 ALARM LIST aa eee tdeudssisatlonsuaceveteaeauzaatiateuleveeuss 323 XIII PROGRAMMING U a 3 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 7 a O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 Product Introduction 8 4 inch color high resolution LCD display GSK990MC universal type drill milling CNC system is a new upgraded product of GSK99O0MA a brand new human machine interface with friend characteristics of beauty and easily use The system adopts B type macro programs statement which make programming concise Its open PLC supports an on line edit compiling to get more convenient and flexible logic control function and it
325. ons are shown in the table below Table 3 4 4 1 Table 3 4 4 1 It is available to backup the data saved in the system disk such as ladder PLC parameters PLC system parameter values tool offset values pitch offset values and system macro variables separately After the backup the system will create a backup file with file extension bak Data backup It is available to restore the data saved in the system disk such as ladder PLC parameters PLC system parameter values tool offset values pitch offset values or system macro variables separately The operation reads the backup file saved in the system firstly and then recovers the data This operation can output the data saved in the system disk to the Data output i external storage devices This operation can input the data saved in the external storage Data input devices to the system disk One key It can backup a variety of data items to the system disk backup OTB simultaneously One key restoration It can restore the backup files of multiple data items simultaneously Ghost One key It can copy multiple data items saved in the system disk to a U disk output simultaneously It can copy multiple data items to the system disk from a U disk One key input PY p y simultaneously Data restoration 212 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting 3 Press and to select the target file press and to switch between data item directory an
326. oordinate during GO rapid positioning 0 To calculate G96 spindle speed according to end point coordinate during GO rapid positioning SOC 1 G96 spindle speed clamped behind spindle override 0 G96 spindle speed clamped before spindle override Standard setting 0000 0000 RSC 290 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List System parameter number 03 8 PG2 PG1 GTT IFLRE FLR SAR SAR 1 To detect the spindle speed in position signal 0 Not detect the spindle speed in position signal 1 Unit of permissive rate q and change rate set in the spindle speed FLR wave check is 0 1 0 Unit of permissive rate q and change rate set in the spindle speed wave check is 1 FLRE 1 The spindle speed wave check is valid 0 The spindle speed wave check is invalid GTT 1 The spindle gear selection mode T type 0 The spindle gear selection mode M type PG2 PG1 gear ratio between the spindle and position encoder 00 is 1 1 01 is 2 1 10 is 4 1 11 is 8 1 Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 01319 TLC TLC 1 Tool length compensation type B 0 Tool length compensation type A Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 01410 ODI CCN SUP SUP 1 Start up type in tool radius compensation B 0 Start up type in tool radius compensation A 1 To move to the intermediate point by G28 and can
327. operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the 1st hole Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block S instruction when the commanded spindle speed exceeds the max spindle speed during tapping P257 the spindle upper speed in the course of tapping cycle an alarm occurs the 84 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code gear of the max spindle speed during the rigid tapping is determined by P294 P296 F instruction when the specified F value exceeds the cutting feedrate s upper value P96 sets the upper value the system takes the upper value as the reference P instruction P is a modal code the least value is set by P281 the max value is set by P282 P value is less than the least value and the system runs with the least value when it is more than the max value the system run with the max value Axis switch must cancel the fixed cycle before switching the tapping axis No 206 alarm occurs when the tapping axis is changed in the rigid tapping mode Override during tapping the feedrate and spindle speed override are defaulted into 100 and the machine does not stop during the feed hold key being pressed till the return operation is completed Tool radius compensatio
328. or PROGRAM Select Edit mode then press key to display the program a Press key to move the cursor upward a line if the column where the cursor is located exceeds the end column of the last line the cursor moves to the end of the last line b Press key to move the cursor downward a line If the column where the cursor is 258 Chapter 10 Eidt Operation located exceeds the end column of the next line the cursor moves to the end of the next line c Press key to move the cursor one column to the right If it is located at the end of the line the cursor moves to the beginning of the next line t d Press key to move the cursor one column to the left If the cursor is at the beginning of the line it moves to the end of the last line m e Press ke to scroll screen upward to move the cursor to the last screen f Press key to move the screen downward to move the cursor to the next screen to move the cursor to the beginning of the line where it is located to return the cursor to the beginning of the program g Press key IE I z m lt TI m a h Press keys m Z U i Press key to move the cursor to the end of the line where it is located SHIFT END T to move the cursor to the end of the program O D FR Q mp O 5 j Press keys 10 1 1 5 Insertion Deletion and Modification of a Word PROGRAM Select lt EDIT gt mode press key pow to display the program
329. ordinate mode and thus return the coordinate value to the rectangular coordinate mode Specifying polar coordinate origin 1 In G90 absolute mode when G16 is specified the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system mm aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Instruction position Radius Instruction position Actual position Actual position When the angle is specified with When the angle is specified with an absolute instruction an incremental instruction Fig 4 2 13 1 38 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Instruction position Radius Instruction position ead O Actual position Angle Actual position When the angle is specified with When the angle is specified with an absolute instruction an incremental instruction Fig 4 2 13 1 2 In G91 absolute mode when G16 is specified the current point is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system Example bole hole circle the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system and X Y plane is selected I The zero point in the workpiece system is set as the origin of the coordinate system 7 a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo The XY plane is selected Fig 4 2 13 2 Specifying angles and a radius with absolute value G17 G90 G16 Specifying the polar coordinate code and selecting XY plane setting the zero point of the workpiec
330. ottom Q_ Shift amount at the bottom of the hole P Minimum dwell time at the hole bottom F Cutting feedrate G87 G98 G99 Initial level Spindle exact her i tal stop G gt 0 Spindle CW I 7 a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Spindle exact stop Tool Point Z Spindle exact P 2 stop Spindle CCW gt lt Shift amount q Fig 4 4 9 1 After positioning along X and Y axes the tool is stopped after spindle orientation Then the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool nose and positioning rapid traverse is performed to the hole bottom point R The tool is then shifted in the direction of the tool nose and the spindle is rotated counterclockwise Boring is performed in the positive direction along Z axis until point Z is reached At point Z the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position after it is oriented again and the tool is retracted in the direction opposite to the tool nose then it is returned to the initial level The tool is then shifted in the direction of the tool nose and the spindle is rotated counterclockwise to proceed to the next block operation The parameter Q specifies the retraction distance The retraction direct on and retraction axis are set by system parameter NO 42 4 and NO 42 5 respectively Q must be a positive value if it is 71 I mm a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J G
331. peration User Manual Skip signal is input here 300 100 Actual motion Motion without skip signal Fig 4 2 16 3 The next block is two axis movement specified by absolute value I Note The setting can be done by bit parameter NO 02 6 skip signal SKIP 0 1 1 0 4 2 17 Inch metric conversion G20 G21 Format G20 inch input G21 metric input Function They are used for the inch metric input conversion in a program Explanation After inch metric conversion the units of the following values are changed Inch Metric Feedrate specified by F code position code workpiece zero offset value tool compensation value scale unit of MPG and movement distance in incremental feeding The G code status at power on is the same as that held before power off a 7 O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo Note 1 When the inch input is converted to metric input or vice versa the tool compensation value must be preset according to the least input incremental unit 2 After inch input is converted to metric input or vice versa for the first G28 the operation from the intermediate point is the same as that of manual reference point return 3 When the least input incremental unit is different from the least code incremental unit the maximum error is half of the least code unit and this error is not accumulated 4 Program inch metric input can be set by bit parameter NO 00 2 5 Program inch metric output can be set by
332. point is B tool holder the distance b should be set as the data for stored function check When the check point is A tool nose and the tool lengths vary with the tools the forbidden area should be created according to the longest tool thus ensuring the safe operation II D s Q O 3 Tool position after reference point return Forbidden area for tool Fig 2 6 4 Setting forbidden area 4 Tool forbidden area overlap The forbidden area can be created by overlap as is shown in the following figure 170 Chapter 2 System Power ON OFF and Safety Operations Forbidden area for tool Fig 2 6 5 Setting overlapping forbidden area Unnecessary limits should be set beyond the machine stroke When bit parameter NO 11 6 0 effective time for a forbidden area after power is switched on and manual reference point return or automatic reference point return by G28 is executed the forbidden area becomes effective When bit parameter NO 11 6 1 after the power is turned on if the reference position is in the forbidden area an alarm occurs only effective in G12 of stored stroke limit 2 Alarm release If the tool enters the forbidden area with an alarm being issued it can only be moved reversely To release the alarm move the tool reversely till it is beyond the forbidden area and resets the system After the alarm is released the tool can be moved forward or backward freely See section 2 5
333. position of the tool in absolute coordinate system by pressing soft key ABS see Fig 3 1 1 2 PRG SPEER FEED OVRD 100 40 80 120 160 200 Xx 1 2 lm Y 4 f e Bfm Z F b 480 m FA 25 50 100 m 5 80000 100 S 68 70 88 98 190116120 o COMMAND T NO T 0 00 OFFSET H DOGOA PART CNT 0001 0000 CUT TIME 00O 00 0 G G17 G9 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 G11 G98 G15 G5S G69 G64 G97 G13 09 06 15 DATA Po o oo PATH 1 Oooo _ mt RER ro Fig 3 1 1 2 3 ALL It enters ALL page by pressing soft key ALL displaying the following items 173 Or Wisi GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual A The position in relative coordinate system B The position in absolute coordinate system C The position in machine coordinate system D The offset amount displacement in MPG interruption E Speed component F Remaining distance only displayed in Auto MDI and DNC mode The display is as follows Fig 3 1 1 3 i mm i mm i mm DATA Rd w PATH 1 ts BER ee Fig 3 1 1 3 Il 4 Monitor mode It enters PMONI page by pressing soft key PMONI In this mode the absolute coordinates relative coordinates of the current position as well as the modal message and blocks of the program being executed can be displayed See Fig 3 1 1 4 O CD Q
334. products of Guangzhou CNC Equipment Co Ltd VIII I Contents Contents PROGRAM MIN GE Erlend 1 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW stesceccesescscastucayestesescstascuastenseesdscustoiavs aaia aeea a iaai 3 VA Product IMTFOCUCTION 55 ao uradel EAE 3 G REN Te ly 225 IESTers 61 id ore Hi fo 9 k ga emer em ESSENS BEROR en ERE SENE SER SEE reve eV nO coe en Ee oe 4 Vo Product MOCO DG TAT OM 5 aa ene E EE EA 5 CHAPTER 2 PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTALS cccssccsssssccsssssccsssscccssssccsssssccssssscsssssscssssssssees 7 2A Controllable do ner PCO ee 7 Zale RIS INR G eeen a a E E E ta se cassia E reen 7 PRES B R AE BITS 81 aa a ER Er ERE SEERE ALENE 7 24 Coordinate SYSE sals heale een aa tia sie testers ae SEERE 8 24 1 Machine Coordinate SYSte Na ra Ae ir eh a a i A a hl ad as as a 8 DAD IREICTENCS PON i EN oe ees ce cee ee ee eee 8 24 3 NVOFKPIGCE Coordinate Syste ar En ande ne a a nad se re elutes Sus a 8 2 4 4 Absolute Coordinate Programming and Relative Coordinate ProgrammMing cc scccccssseeeeeeeeeeseeeees 9 2 5 Modal and Non Modal Simple 0 cece cccccessssccceccccesesssseeecceceesesssseeecceceeesssseeeeeeceeeseneees 10 CHAPTER 3 STRUCTURE OF AN PART PROGRAM ccssssscsssssccsssssccssssscssscscccsssscssssssccessessees 13 2AN DL UKE OI a Progi an sessetiechisvercdaniolnecdasunedsicntncdasarbiaetiantinmtarcetidaaantliedialetlewd ies 13 SA te KOGAN NaMe seste a ta snas eng e a waa ale eee rer a er Ene Tate der a
335. pth W downward at the cutting speed by helical mode feed to the circle center Mill the circle surface with a radius of I helically outward from the center by an increment of L each time Return to R reference level along Z axis Axes X and Y rapidly position to the start point Down to the position at which the distance to the end surface to be machined is V along Z axis Cut a depth Q V downward along Z axis Repeat the operations 4 8 till the total depth of circle surface is finished 10 Return to initial level or point R level depending on G98 or G99 Command path 86 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code e 1 Initial level weeaeeeeeeeceeeaeeneeceeoan 5 Fig 4 6 1 1 Y Note Dis the tool diameter value Y Note D is the tool diameter value Ais the helical radius coefficient Ais the helical radius coefficient e a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Tool center path Circle groove border Circle groove border Fig 4 6 1 2 Note 1 Itis suggested that the NO 12 1 be set to 1 when this code is used 2 The helical radius coefficient in the groove cycle must be greater than 0 The coefficient is set by data parameter P269 Example Rough milling an inner circle groove using the canned cycle code G22 as shown in the figure below 87 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Initial level Z 50 Point R level Z Fi
336. r 2 Programming Fundamentals 2 1 Controllable Axis Table 2 1 1 Item GSK990MC Basic controllable axes 3 X Y Z Total extended controllable axes Up to 4 On account of some machines structure design requirement an additional axis is required to use for the maneuver workbench and rotary workbench The axis can be linear or rotary For GSKY990MC its each axis is set to the linear or rotary by bit parameter No 8 4 No 8 7 2 2 Axis Name Name of 3 basic axes is defaulted to X Y Z P005 sets the controllable axis quantity and P175 P178 sets each additional axis name such as A B C s axis name Note when the input axis name is repetitive the system automatically initializes it to X Y Z A 2 3 Axis Display When the additional axis is set to the rotary the rotary axis unit is displayed to deg When it is set to the linear the system display it is the same that of X Y Z and its unit is mm The following is an example when the 4 is rotary axis FEED mm min MPG INC 001 FEED OVRD 188 40 90 120 160 200 Da e U m F 25 50 100 T SP rpm Y B UUW J s cco ma 1004 S G 7 8 98 188118 120 FEE 4 O OOOO mn Fm COMMAND T NO T G OFFSET H 0A DAAA G G17 G9 G94 Gel G40 649 G54 PART CNT 0014 0014 G11 G98 G15 GS G69 G64 G97 G13 CUT TIME 000 0O DATA f 10 50 5 PATH 1 RE ABS ALL PMONI MONI Fig 2 3 1 I
337. r surface with the total depth machined 11 Return to the initial level or R level according to code G98 or G99 Command path I En 7 aS O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo G33 CCW rectangular groove rough milling Note A is the coefficient of 234 CW rectangular groove rough milling L L helical feed radius Tool center path _ Tool center path Rectangle groove Rectangle border groove border Fig 4 6 4 1 Note The NO 12 1 should be set to 1 when this code is used Example Rough milling an inner rectangular groove by the canned cycle code G33 as shown in the following figure 92 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Fig 4 6 4 2 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 600 rapid positioning G99 G33 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 170 J50 L10 W20 Q10 V10 U5 D1 F800 To perform inner rectangular grove rough milling cycle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 To cancel canned cycle and return from R level M30 I Limitation when G23 G34 is used G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal code NO 48 0 is set to 1 otherwise G33 G34 is replaced by other codes in group 1 e a O Ca s Q 3 3 5 vo Tool radius compensation in the fixed cycle command the tool radius compensation is ignored the system calls the tool radius compensation specified by the program during the tool infeed 4 6 5 Inner Rectangular Groove Fine Milling Cycle G35 G36 Command format G35 G98 G99 x Y ZR L J L U D F K G36
338. r the program page select the program to be copied using the cursor in DIR subpage and press key to enter the program display page c Press address key 2 and input the new program name d Press soft key COPY to finish the file copying and enter the edit page for the new program e Return to DIR can view the new copied program name The copy of a program can also be done in the program edit page shown in fig 10 1 1 1 Press address key and key in the new program number 2 Press soft key COPY to finish the file copying and enter the edit page for the new program 3 Returnto DIR page to view the new copied program name 1 5 Copy and Paste of Blocks Steps for copying and pasting blocks a Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied b Key in the last character of the blocks to be copied c Press keys ik the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in will be copied INSERT d Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted press keys E J or soft key PASTE to complete the paste The copy and paste of the blocks can also be done in the program edit page see fig 10 1 1 1 Locate the cursor to the beginning of the blocks to be copied 2 Key inthe last character of the blocks to be copied 3 Press soft key COPY to finish copying the blocks from the cursor to the character keyed in 4 Locate the cursor to the position to be pasted press soft key PASTE to complete the
339. rate and Manual Rapid Traverse Speed Selection cccccecccceecccaeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeesauees 233 AA M nuallhterveR to REEL oh ee ee 234 Alo 4 0 g 6 5707 EEN Te MIMIC IAL sorriso ene a a ivcehonadcebncseanieds 235 Zs SOU NCS Go ONO Mast ch ear a ah aes ah ea ha Nt hen here 237 ALA SpHdeEe Roan CEW chee neared pees e deen ated talon ea ad ade ot oes ete 237 AZ SPINNER Otto MEAN raten ass sete a cabenee nen dem ane E melerede a sulted lh ntedaceecaesest 237 AES SPIKE OD ee e eee nen eee ne eer eee ee eee eee eee ee ee 237 4 2 4 Spindle Automatic Gear Shift 0 0 ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseecesseeesseeeeseeeesseessueeesseeeesaeeeeees 237 4 3 Other Manual Operation as sise 8 eich satin Detach a ie ieee eek ee ds 238 Oe Coon CONTO li che oi hed 5 til aa EEN an ae bane st eee ae eed sd ade a 238 20 2 MESUN AEN Contool issir fata loss etna datas Paateed race lesb esac SENE Ses foe deren deta ae ecu Pune calecesaies 238 A 3 3 Chip Removal Controlar e acca aes caum a a Peau aen reed sda E eaaa E a OERS 238 ADA NVOFKING LONT CONMO letter otk a oi aka io i Sala oad ee a ok eine ote ae 238 CHAPTER 9 STEP OPERATION wiccestescvesesntscvsteustvascdvivesstesavase cedevuctiustuatieiscucsdieseretecatevesdeezine 239 SE FEDERER Un NE tities dada ren wane apa nea aca ee aan OEN 239 5 1 1 Selection Of Moving AMOUNL cccccccccsseeeccssececceeseecseeeecseuseeceueceeseeeesseseeessuueeeseeeessesseeeesseeesseaes 239 5 1 2
340. recasting control Setting range 0 400 ms 0139 Contour control precision in forecasting control 0 01 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0140 Blocks merged in forecasting control Setting range 0 10 0141 In position precision in forecasting control 0 05 Setting range 0 0 5 mm 0142 Length condition of spline formation in forecasting Setting range 0 30 0143 Angular condition of spline formation in forecasting 10 Setting range 0 30 0144 Critical angle of two blocks during automatic corner deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 2 178 degree 0145 Minimum federate of automatic corner deceleration 120 in forecasting control Setting range 10 1000 mm min gt O O D 5 Q x 0146 Axis error allowable for speed difference deceleration in forecasting control Setting range 60 1000 0147 Cutting precision grade in forecasting control Setting range 0 8 0148 External acceleration limit of circular interpolation 1000 Setting range 100 5000 mm s 0149 Lower limit of external acceleration clamp for circular 200 interpolation Setting range 0 2000 mm min 306 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0150 Acceleration clamp time constant of cutting feed 50 Setting range 0 1000 ms 0151 Maximum clamp speed of handwheel incomplete 2000 running Setting range O 3000 mm min 0152 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant of 120 handwheel Setting range 0 400 ms 0153
341. rectly by address S and a numerical value behind it Unit r min e g For M3 S300 it means the spindle is rotated at a speed of 300 r min 3 If a move instruction and an S code are specified in the same block they are executed simultaneously 4 The spindle speed is controlled by an S code followed by a numerical value 6 2 Spindle Switch Value Control When the bit parameter NO 1 2 SPT 1 the spindle speed is controlled by the switch value which consists of an address S and a two digit number behind it Three mechanical gears for the spindle are provided when the spindle speed is controlled by the switch value For the correspondence between S codes and spindle speed as well as the number of spindle gears please see the manual provided by the machine tool builder Command format S01 S1 S02 S2 S03 S3 Explanation 1 There are 8 gears in the software at present and 3 gears in the ladder diagram When S codes beyond the codes above are specified the system displays Miscellaneous function being executed 2 If a four digit number is specified behind S the latter two digits are effective 6 3 Constant Surface Speed Control G96 G97 Command format Constant surface speed control G96 S_ surface speed mm min or inch min Constant surface speed control cancel G97 S spindle speed r min Constant surface speed controlled axis G96 P_ P1 X axis P2 Y axis P3 Z axis P4 4th axis Max spindle speed clamped G92 S_ S
342. ress key Cal for confirmation then the values in the current machine coordinate system will be set as the origin of the G coordinate system e g by INPUT pressing X and then key or pressing X0 and then key men the X machine coordinate of this point is input automatically by the system In addition e g if X10 or X 10 is input and then key is pressed the X machine coordinate is 10 or 10 2 After entering this page in any mode move the cursor to the coordinate axis to be altered input the machine coordinates of the origin of the workpiece coordinate system directly then press key INPUT for confirmation 3 Method to search a coordinate system 1 In any mode press key to search after inputting a coordinate system e g inputting G50 2 In any mode by inputting P6 or P06 and then pressing key ss the cursor will be located in the additional workpiece coordinate system G54 P00 3 4 3 Halving and Toolsetting Function Press the soft key HHalving Toolsetting to enter the halving and toolsetting function the displayed content in the page is shown in Fig 3 4 3 1 202 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting MEASURE MODE WORKPIECE TYPE COORDINATE SEL 5 B mm GOB mm GOB mm 808 S PN lt x O S B mm GOB mm GOB mm 000 OPERATER STEP MANUAL MODE 1 WHEN MOVE TO P1 3 PRESS lt MEASURE gt
343. rm circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 1 from the start point 5 Perform linear and circular interpolation by the path 2 3 4 5 6 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 7 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 Command path 95 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual G37 CCW fine milling cycle outside a rectangle G38 CW fine milling cycle outside a rectangle Tool center path L Tool center path Rectangular groove border Rectangular groove border Fig 4 6 6 1 Explanation For the rectangle outside fine milling if the interpolation directions of the transition arc and fine milling arc are inconsistent the interpolation direction in the code is the one of the fine milling arc Example Performing fine milling outside a rectangle by the canned cycle code G37 4 g R G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 600 rapid positioning E G99 G37 X25 Y25 Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 D1 F800 Performing fine milling outside a 2 rectangle at the hole bottom in the canned cycle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Cancelling the canned cycle returning from the Point R level M30 Limitation when G37 G38 is used G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal code NO 48 0 is set to 1 otherwise G37 G38 is replaced by other codes in group 1 Tool radius compensation in the fixed cycl
344. rogram calls a subprogram Note 1 An alarm is given when no subprogram number specified with address P is detected Note 2 Subprograms with number 90000 99999 are the system reserved programs When users call such kind of subprograms the system can execute them but not display them Note 3 A subprogram can nest a quadruple 3 2 3 Program End The program begins with a program name and ends with M02 M30 or M99 see Fig 3 2 2 2 For the end code M02 M30 or M99 detected in program execution If M02 or MO3 is executed in a program the program is terminated and the reset state is entered M30 can be set by bit parameter N0 33 4 to return to the program beginning and MO2 can be set by bit parameter N0 33 2 to return to the program beginning If M99 is executed in a program the control returns to the beginning of the program and then executes the program repeatedly if M99 MO2 or M30 is at the end of the subprogram the control returns to the program that calls the subprogram and goes on executing the following blocks Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code 4 1 Types of G Code Preparatory function represented by a G code with a number behind it defines the meaning of the block where it is located G codes are divided into the following two types Table 4 1 1 Type Meaning Non modal G Valid only in the commanded block code I Modal G code Still remain valid effective before other G c
345. rom the reference point all of which can be expressed by absolute or incremental code The code specifies the incremental value departed from the intermediate point in incremental programming If the value is not specified for an axis it means the axis has no movement relative to the intermediate point The G29 code followed by only one axis means the single axis return with no action performed to other axes Example G90 GO X10 Y10 G91 G28 X20 Y20 Reference point return via the intermediate point 30 30 G29 X30 Return to 60 30 from the reference point via the intermediate point 30 30 Note that the component in X axis should be 60 in incremental programming The values of the intermediate point specified by G29 are assigned by G28 or G30 See the explanation of code G28 for the definition specification and system default of the intermediate point 4 3 4 Reference Point Return Check G27 Format G27 X_Y_Z_ Function G27 performs the reference point return check with the reference point specified by X_Y_ Z Explanation 1 G27 code the tool at the rapid traverse speed If the tool reaches the reference point the indicator for reference point return lights up However if the position the tool reaches is not the reference point an alarm is issued 2 In machine lock mode even if G27 is specified and the tool has automatically returned to the reference point the indicator for return completion does not light up 3 In
346. rrect and reliable The current position relative coordinates is displayed after system self check and initialization mm min PRG SPEED FEED OVRD 100 40 88 120 160 200 E x il 6 T Cm Y 4 7 89 fm aa A800 m F 25 5 100 a SP 5 rpm S 180 S 68 70 80 S 188 118 129 O Tool T COMMAND T NO T OFFSET H DAOA PART CNT 0001 0000 CUT TIME 00O 00 20 9 05 55 G G17 G90 G94 Gel G40 G49 G54 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 G13 O D FR Q mp O 5 2 2 System Power off Before turning off the system make sure that 1 The axes X Y Z of the CNC are at halt 2 Miscellaneous functions spindle pump etc are off 3 The CNC power is cut off prior to cutting off the machine power When cutting off the power check that 1 The LED which indicates the cycle start on the operator panel is off 2 All the movable parts of the CNC machine tool are at halt Press POWER OFF button to turn off the power Cutting off the power in an emergency The power should be cut off immediately to prevent accidents in an emergency situation during the machine running However the zero return tool setting etc must be performed again because an error between system coordinates and actual coordinates may occur after power off Note See the manual provided by the machine tool builder for the machine power cut off 165 II O D
347. rrent tool must perform the automatic tool measure otherwise which causes mistaken machining the tool and devices to be managed and even persons to be injured 210 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting A A coordinate system selection 1 Setting range G54 G59 G54 P1 P50 2 Data input when the automatic tool measure is not started the cursor is moved to the coordinate system option the data in the following format is input a 54 59 s integer b Gd4 G59 c P1 P50 press lt Input gt key B Workpiece origin setting 1 Setting range 9999 999 9999 999 2 Data input when the automatic tool length measure is not started the cursor is moved to the option in any modes Measure is directly pressed to set the current Z machine coordinate value to the Z of the currently selected workpiece coordinate system or input to the data in the following format a Input format Z b Z data press Measure to set the current Z machine coordinate value input data to the Z of the currently selected workpiece coordinate system 3 4 4 Backup Restoration and Transmission for Data Press soft key HIDATA to enter SETTING DATA DEAL page The user data such as ladder ladder parameters system parameter values tool offset values pitch offset values system macro variables custom macro programs and CNC part programs can be backup saved and restored Q read and the data input and output via PC or U disk are
348. rsection Tool center path Tool center path 7 O Ca S 3 3 5 vo Fig 4 7 3 3 3 Special cases I Without an intersection In the left figure if the tool radius is small the offset value of the arc Alarm occurs and tool is stopped has an intersection if the radius ee mene F gets larger the intersection may not en ofiset value 1s big MAn exist and an alarm Interference When offset value is small gt exist in tool offset C will be issued in the system II Arc center coincides with the start point or end point Stop a Tool center path ss N5 G01 X100 N6 G02 X100 IO JO Programmed path N7 G03 Y 100 J 100 In the left figure an alarm Radius tolerance exceeded will be issued EEEE G41 Fig 4 7 3 4 108 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code 4 Tool movement in offset cancel mode In the offset mode when a block that satisfies any of the following conditions is performed the system enters into offset cancel mode The operation of this block is called the offset cancel a G40 b When the tool radius compensation number is 0 Arc code G03 or G02 cannot be used for cancellation in offset cancel mode An alarm is issued and tool is stopped if an arc is specified a Tool movement around an inner side of a corner a2180 Linear Linear Circular Linear Programmed path Tool center path Programmed path Tool center path b Tool movemen
349. s are closed 3 3 5 1 2 Parameter Setting for Servo matched with Motor Type Select lt MDI gt mode 1 SETTING 2 Press to enter lt SET gt page set the parameter switch to 1 3 SYSTEM Press or press the soft key EBUS to enter the servo debugging page then press HISERVO PARA to enter the parameter display page 4 Move the cursor to the current selection axis parameter 0 input the password 385 press the input key to download the driver parameter into the system and modify the servo parameters in SERVO PARA page 5 Move the cursor to the parameter 1 and input the number matched with the motor type O D FR Q mp O 5 6 Press for information The parameter value is downloaded into the driver and the status bar displays the driver s parameter is successfully downloaded SAVE 7 Press to make the servo save the refreshed parameters and the status bar displays the driver s parameter is successfully saved 8 After all parameters are set the parameter switches are closed 3 3 5 1 3 Servo Parameter Backup 1 Select lt MDI gt mode to enter lt SET gt page set the parameter switch to 1 to enter lt SET gt page input the final user password and the level password 3 Press L 189 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual SYSTEM 4 Press sere press the soft key EBUS to enter the servo debugging page th
350. s set by bit parameter NO 47 4 the effectiveness of the Z axis scaling is set by bit parameter NO 47 5 and the scaling rate of each axis is set by bit parameter NO 47 6 0 instructed with P 1 instructed with I J K 4 Scaling cancel After the scaling followed by a movement code is cancelled by G50 the current tool position is regarded as the start point of this movement code by default 5 In scaling mode G codes for reference point return G27 G30 etc and coordinate system specification G52 G59 G92 etc can not be specified They should be specified after the scaling is cancelled 6 Even if different magnifications are specified for circular interpolation and each axis the tool will not trace an ellipse When the magnification for each axis is different and the circular interpolation is programmed with radius R the interpolation figure is shown in fig 4 2 14 2 in the example below the magnification for X axis is 2 for Y axis is 1 41 I 7 O ta 2 S 3 3 5 vo Or Jd Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual G90 GO X0 Y100 G51 X0 YO Z0 I2 J1 G02 X100 YO R100 F500 Above instructions are equivalent to the following ones G90 GO X0 Y100 G02 X200 YO R200 F500 The magnification of radius R depends on or J whichever is larger Y Scaled figure I 0 0 100 0 200 0 Fig 4 2 14 2 Scaling for circular interpolation 1 When the
351. sation axis block buffered I 4 2 11 Floating coordinate system G92 Format G92 X_Y_Z_ Function for setting the floating workpiece coordinate system The current tool absolute coordinate values in the new floating workpiece coordinate system are specified by 3 code parameters This code does not cause the movement axis to move mm a O Ca S 3 3 5 vo Explanation A G92 floating coordinate system Machine zer F achine zero Origin of the machine coordinate system Fig 4 2 11 1 1 As shown in Fig 4 2 11 1 the corresponding origin of the G92 floating coordinate system is the value in machine coordinate system which is not related to the workpiece coordinate system G92 setting is effective in the following conditions 1 Before the workpiece coordinate system is called 2 Before the machine zero return The G92 floating coordinate system is often used for the alignment for temporary workpiece machining It is usually specified at the beginning of the program or in MDI mode before the program auto run 2 There are two methods to determine the floating coordinate system 36 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code 1 Determining the coordinate system with tool nose Z Fig 4 2 11 2 As shown in Fig 4 2 11 2 G92 X25 Z23 the tool nose position is taken as point X25 Z23 in the floating coordinate system 2 Taking a fixed point on the tool holder as the reference point of the coordina
352. sition offset of Y axis 5028 Servo position offset of Z axis 5029 Servo position offset of 4 axis Note 1 ABSIO The end point coordinates of the last block in workpiece coordinate system Note 2 ABSMT The current machine coordinate system position in machine coordinate system Note 3 ABSOT The current coordinate position in workpiece coordinate system Note 4 ABSKP The effective position of the skip signal of block G31 in workpiece coordinate system 3 Workpiece zero offset value and additional zero offset value I O Ca 2 Q 3 3 5 vo 127 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Table 4 9 2 4 Function number 5201 External workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5204 External workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5206 G54 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5209 G54 workpiece zero offset value of 47 axis 5211 G55 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5214 G55 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5216 G56 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 521 9 G56 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5221 G57 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5224 G57 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5226 G58 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis 5229 G58 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 5231 G59 workpiece zero offset value of 1 axis I 5234 G59 workpiece zero offset value of 4 axis 7001 G54 P1 workpiece zero offset value o
353. sitioning drill hole 5 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R G98 Y 750 Positioning drill hole 6 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to initial level G80 Cancel the canned cycle G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point 61 I 7 a O Ca Q 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual M5 Spindle stops M30 Limitation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G82 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G82 is replaced by other G codes in group 1 Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation 4 4 4 Drilling Cycle with Chip Removal G83 Format G83 X_Y_Z R Q F_K_ Function It is used for peck drilling It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of the hole while removing the chips from the hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R Q Cut depth for each cutting feed F Cutting feedra
354. spindle side gear the 3 gear Setting range 1 999 0289 Tooth number of spindle side gear the 4 gear Setting range 1 999 0290 Tooth number of position encoder side gear the 1 gear Setting range 1 999 0291 Tooth number of position encoder side gear the 2 gear Setting range 1 999 0292 Tooth number of position encoder side gear the 3 gear Setting range 1 999 0293 Tooth number of position encoder side gear the 4 gear Setting range 1 999 0294 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping the 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 r min 0295 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping the 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 r min 0296 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping the 3 gear Setting range 0 9999 r min 0297 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping the 4 gear Setting range 0 9999 r min 0298 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of spindle and tapping axis the 1 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0299 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of spindle and tapping axis the 2 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 0300 Linear acceleration deceleration time constants of spindle and tapping axis the 37 gear Setting range 0 9999 ms 6000 6000 6000 ss Mall male re 6000 200 200 200 315 gt Lej D 5 Q x Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0301 Linear acceleration deceleration time
355. ssscssssscssees 143 ST Wheedes Controlled DY PEC ao aarin ae N A ENN T N 143 5 1 1 CW CCW Rotation Instructions M03 M04 M W W ssssseseneeeke kk kk k kk ER REE ERR ERR E ERE RER R REE RENE R ERE E ERE ERE RES 144 sr MOSS PI TE Stp MOS unaia Set ane ne Soc bared aca eget aaa eee ccimen tens ele a E 144 5 13 Cooling ON OFR GMOS MOO eea ae E EA ennen eder SERENE NE 144 5 1 4 AAxis Release Clamping M10 M11 oc ccccecccceecsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeseeessaaeeeeeeaaaees 144 5 1 5 Spindle Orientation Cancellation M18 M19 oo cecccecccesscceceeeceneeteeeetaeeceeeececeneeseneetageeeneneenens 144 5 1 6 Rigid Taping CIVIZS 5 M29 cats cts aol Sn Sats a a a a a a ra a ere eder 144 5 1 7 Helical Chip Remover ON OFF M35 M36 sarirekin tii anadai aiaiai aa 144 5 1 8 Chip Flushing Water Valve ON OFF M26 M27 u cccccccccccccseecccceeceeeeecesseeceeseeecessueeesaeeeeesaaeees 144 5 1 9 Spindle Blowing ON OFF M44 M45 sGmsssssseeeeeeeee ekte kk kk ERE NERE ERNE REE ERE R ERE E ERR ERR REE ERE E ERR REE ner 144 5 2 M Codes for Controlling Programs W W W uu u n nssssesevevveereeeeeeeeeeen ennen esserne nere enes eeerrneee 145 5 2 1 Program End and Return M30 M02 SEE E Ea des 145 o2 2 Program Dwell EMOODE case ahs ERE ENE SE SAS ie 145 5 23 Program Optional Stop GMOT ssena ea E A E E 145 5 2 4 Subprogram Call M98 oo eecccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseaese
356. stem Programming and Operation User Manual Explanation I 7 O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo 1 After G94 is specified in feed per minute mode the feed amount of the tool per minute is directly specified by a number after F 2 G94 is a modal code Once specified it remains effective till G95 is specified The default at power on is feed per minute mode and the defaulted feedrate is set by P87 3 An override from 0 to 200 can be applied to feed per minute with the override keys or band switch on the operator panel Feed amount per minute mm min or inch min Workpiece Worktable Fig 7 2 1 1 Feed per minute 7 2 2 Feed per Revolution G95 Command format G95 F_ Function Feed amount per revolution Unit mm r or inch r Explanation 152 1 This function is unavailable until a spindle encoder is installed on the machine 2 After specifying G95 feed per revolution mode the feed amount of the tool per revolution is directly specified by a number after F 3 G95 is a modal code Once specified it keeps effective till G94 is specified The default feedrate per revolution during initialization is O 4 An override from 0 to 200 can be applied to feed per revolution with the override keys or band switch on the operator panel F a X Feed amount per spindle revolution mm rev or inch rev Fig 7 2 2 1 Feed per revolution Note 1 When the spindle speed is low feedrate fluctuation may occur T
357. stem Programming and Operation User Manual G65 H83 Conditional transfer 3 IF j gt k GOTO N Conditional transfer 6 IF lt k GOTO N Aam o o Fig 4 9 4 1 2 Operation code 1 Variable assignment J G65 H01 P l Q J Ce g G65 H01 P 101 Q1005 101 1005 G65 H01 P 101 Q 110 101 110 G65 H01 P 101 Q 102 101 102 2 Addition l J K G65 H02 P l Q J R K e g G65 H02 P 101 Q 102 R15 101 102 15 3 Subtraction 1 J K G65 H03 P l Q J R K Ce g G65 H03 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo 4 Multiplication 1 Jx K G65 H04 P I Q J R K Ce g G65 H04 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102x 103 5 Division J K G65 H05 P I Q J R K Ce g G65 H05 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 6 Logic addition OR 1 J OR K G65 H11 P l Q J R K Ce g G65 H11 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 OR 103 7 Logic multiplication AND 1 J AND K G65 H12 P l Q J R K Ce g G65 H12 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 AND 103 8 Exclusive OR 1 J XOR K G65 H13 Pl Q J R K Ce g G65 H13 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 XOR 103 9 Square root 1 fj G65 H21 P I Q J e g G65 H21 P 101 Q 102 101 102 10 Absolute value 1 J G65 H22 P l Q J 132 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code e g G65 H22 P 101 Q 102 101 102 11 Complement 1 J TRUNC J K x K TRUN
358. stem made by GSK lt cannot be applied for other purposes or else it may Cause serious danger MI OHIE SI AIG a MN ONG syslen Programming and Sbelalon set Manual safety Notes E Transportation and storage Do not pile up the packing boxes over 6 layers Never climb the packing box neither stand on it nor place heavy objects on it Do not move or drag the product by the cables connected to it Avoid impact or scratch to the panel and screen Packing box should be protected from dampness insolation and drench E Open package inspection Confirm the product is the one you purchased after opening the package Check whether the product is damaged during transportation Confirm all the elements are complete without damage by referring to the list If there is incorrect product type incomplete accessories or damage please contact us in time E Connection Only qualified personnel can connect and inspect the system The system must be earthed The earth resistance should not be greater than 0 10 and a neutral wire zero wire cannot be used as an earth wire The connection must be correct and secured Otherwise the product may be damaged or unexpected results may occur Connect the surge absorbing diode to the product in the specified direction otherwise the product may be damaged Turn off the power before inserting or unplugging a plug or opening the electric cabinet E Troubleshooting IV Turn off the power
359. stem will execute deceleration and stop 252 Chapter 9 Zero Return Operation Chapter 9 Zero Return Operation 9 1 Concept of Mechanical Zero Machine Zero The machine coordinate system is the inherent coordinate system of the machine The origin of the machine coordinate system is called mechanical zero or machine zero which is also called reference point in this manual It is usually fixed at the maximum stroke point of X axis Y axis Z axis and the 4 axis This origin is determined as a fixed point after the design manufacture and adjustment of the machine As the machine zero is unknown at power on the auto or manual machine zero return is usually performed 9 2 Steps for Machine Zero Return eu om 1 Press 280 to enter Machine Zero Return mode then machine zero return will be displayed at the lower right corner of the LCD screen FEED mm min MPG INC 001 FEED OYRD 100 O D mm 40 980 12 160 200 5 Fa 29 50 100 S SP 5 rpm Y D OOla so m 100 S G 7 8 98 188110 128 E Z 0 0000 jm COMMAND T NO T 800 OFFSET H 808 D G G G17 G90 G94 G21 G40 G49 G54 PART CNT 0014 0014 G11 G98 G15 G5 G69 G64 G97 613 CUT TIME 000 00 00 paTA ds 50 50 PATH 1 ABS ALL PMONI MONI Fig 9 2 1 2 Select axis X Y Z or the 4th for machine zero return the direction of which is set by bit parameter No 7 3 N0 7 6 When it moves towards the mac
360. structions are in the same block 0 Do not make alarm if indexing instruction and other axes instructions are in the same block Standard setting 0100 0000 SIM System parameter number 0 5 1 MDLY SBM SBM 1 Single block allowed in macro statement 0 Single block unallowed in macro statement MDLY 1 Delay is allowed in macro statement 0 Delay is unallowed in macro statement Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 01512 CLV CCV 293 gt O D 5 Q x gt O O D 5 Q x 294 Gr 44153 E GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual CCV 1 Macro common variables 100 199 clearing after reset 0 Macro common variables 100 199 not clearing after reset CLV 1 Macro local variables 1 50 clearing after reset 0 Macro local variables 1 50 not clearing after reset Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 0153 PLCV LAD3 LDA2 LAD 1 LADO LADO LAD3 They are binary combination parameters If they are 0 it uses No 0 ladder if they are 1 15 it uses 0 15 ladder diagram PLCV 1 Read and display PLC software version number 0 Do not read and display PLC software version number Standard setting 1000 0001 system parameter number 0 54 OPRG PRGS PRGS 1 Initial state of program switch Open 0 In
361. supply before troubleshooting or replacing components Overhaul the system when there is a short circuit or overload and do not restart it until the trouble is removed Do not turn ON OFF the product frequently and the ON OFF interval should be 1 minute at least Warnings and Precautions Declaration We try to describe all the various matters as much as possible in this manual However it is impossible to give detailed descriptions to all the unnecessary or unallowable operations because there are too many possibilities Therefore the matters not specially described herein should be considered as impossible or unallowable Warning Before installing connecting programming and operating the product please read this manual and the manual provided by the machine tool builder carefully and operate the product according to these manuals Otherwise the operation may cause damage to the product and machine tool or even cause personal injury Caution The functions and specifications e g precision and speed described in this manual are only for this product itself For those CNC machine tools installing this product the actual function configuration and specifications depend on the designs of the machine tool builders Moreover the function configuration and specifications of the CNC machine tool are subject to the manual provided by the machine tool builder All specifications and designs in this manual
362. switching corresponding soft keys The center size and ratio for the pag graphic page graph are set using graphic parameters Press this key Diagnosis to enter The states of I O signals on the system side can be viewed in this page diagnosis by switching corresponding soft keys Alarm IE Miles he Subpages for a variety of alarm message can be viewed by switching to enter alarm page corresponding soft keys page E Wiehe Help message about the system can be viewed in this page by switching to enter help corresponding soft keys Note The page switch above can also be done by pressing corresponding function keys repeatedly after bit parameters NO 25 0 25 7 NO 26 6 26 7 are set Refer to CHAPTER 3 in this manual for the explanation for each page Pgrogra m page uoneJadO 1 2 4 Machine Control Area TELLS one A OVERRIDE F DVERRIDE S VERADE OC B a p s B a DE a gt EDIT AUTO MDI oo weg l mamma E step ONE cooo E uost ien OVERRIDE LASER 400 STOP i RAPD D CO DF ry fe amp amp a amp Om g Op SP Sk lOO oe To PZ Buin op ESE ioe sae DRY ETOF re nett R OVERRIDE 5 OVERRIDE a Ba g i Fig 1 2 4 1 Machine control area of GSK990MC 161 Or Wisi GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Remarks and operation Keys Designation Explanation i di explanation a 2 Edit mode key To enter edit mode decelerates to stop after curren
363. t EDIT block is executed gt Auto mode key To enter auto mode rs mode proce EMME iat memory is selected a ED MDI mode key To enter MDI mode MDI Machine zero To enter machine mode key zero mode Manual mode key MPG mode key DNC mode key For a block preceding with sign If itis on Block skip key the indicator lights up And the block is skipped For switching the execution between single block and blocks If itis on the indicator Lights up ae Auto mode MDI mode The indicator lights up i i Dry run switch if dry run is valid DNC mode M S T function output is invalid if the indicator for M S T function lock lights up 5 To enter step mode Switching to Manual Mode in Auto mode system immediately decelerates to stop Switching to MPG mode in Auto mode system immediately decelerates to stop Switching to DNC mode in Auto mode system decelerates to stop after current block is executed To enter manual mode To enter MPG mode II To enter DNC mode uoneJadO Single block key Auto mode MDI mode M S T lock switch DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode Machine zero MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode DNC mode The indicator lights Machine lock switch up if it is on and the axis movement output is invalid 162 Chapter 1 Operation Panel Keys Desianation Remarks and op
364. t Cance l SYS interface OFFSET setting MDI mode input value gt Enter H compensation num gt X Z gt Enter Ln 001 135 PATH 1 sys INFO opr ALARM G CODE PARA gt Fig 3 9 2 The various operation steps on different pages are described in lt HELP gt OPRT page you can get help in the HELP page if you are unfamiliar with some operations 3 ALARM page In lt HELP gt page press soft key ALARM to enter this page See fig 3 9 3 226 NO aaa paal B ge Gas slulup 885 G86 wo BaF oaae gang 9016 9011 gle 0013 Ln DATA Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting MEANING Parameter been modified that must power off File open fail Data input overflow Program number exists Digit or character 7 input without address Modify program Address with no data but another address or EOB code Modify program Character input wrongly for address or2 or more input Modify program wrongly input for address 2 or more iinput Modify program Program too large use DNC Character can t be used Modify program G code wrongly used Modify program Feeding speed not specified or improper Modify program Insufficient memory Too many Files 1 359 Cd 47 08 58 PATH 1 Fig 3 9 3 The meaning and handling for each alarm number is described in this page 4 G code page In lt HELP gt page press soft key KG
365. t INPUT gt to copy the CNC program files directly Renaming required press key lt CANCEL gt to input the new program number e g O10 or 0100 and then press key lt INPUT gt to copy the program files Chapter 11 System Communication If the program name already exists in the U disk the system prompts Please rename the file Here input the new program number e g 010 or 0100 and then press key lt INPUT gt to copy the CNC program files 2 To copy CNC program files to system disk from U disk a Press soft key USB to switch to USB file directory page gt b Press key to switch the cursor to the file directory c Press key or to move the cursor to select the CNC program files to be copied in the U disk Press soft key COPY then the system prompts COPY TO CNC DISC New Name which is shown in Fig 11 2 2 3 CUR DISK USB DISK FILE NUM 4 FILE DIR LADDER PLC 256 88 08 14 12 18 256 08 08 14 12 18 OPARA PLC 256 08 08 14 12 18 O PARAMETER O CUTTER COMP OPITCH COMP OMACRO VAR OMACRO PRG PART PRGR PRESS DIRECTION KEY SELECT THE FILE DATA 08 56 05 CoPY TO CNC DISK New Name PATH 1 CNC USB COPY DEL RETURN Fig 11 2 2 3 d If renaming for CNC program files is not required press key lt INPUT gt to copy the CNC program files directly Renaming required press key lt CANCEL gt to input the new program number e g 010 or 0100 and then press key lt INPU
366. t around the inner side of a corner 90 lt a lt 180 There are 2 tool path types at offset start or cancel type A and type B which are set by bit parameter NO 40 0 Linear Linear Circular linear Linear Linear Circular gt Linear Programmed path Intersection L Tool center path Se Hul Tool center path c Tool movement around an outer side of an corner at an acute angle a lt 90 There are 2 types of tool paths at offset start or cancel type A and type B which are set by bit parameter NO 40 0 109 I Bulwuwesbold I Bulwuwesbold Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Linear Linear Circular Linear Programmed path 0 Programmed path Tool center path Tool center path Linear Linear Circular Linear Programmed path sie Ghee ae rivera Tool center path L d Tool movement around an outer side of an corner at an acute angle less than 1 a lt 1 Linear linear lt Pr Tool center path Programmed path Fig 4 7 3 5 5 Changing offset direction in offset mode The offset direction is determined by tool radius compensation G code G41 and G42 The signs of the offset value are as follows Table 4 7 3 1 Sign of offset value Fa G code Left offset Right offset Right offset Left offset In a special case the offset direction can be changed in offset mode However the direction change is
367. t is negative in G24 G25 G26 G32 J J value should be moare than value data parameter P269 set value tool radius Width of the rectangular grooves in Y direction in tool radius 2 The screwing cutting radius G33 G34 should be less than J 2 tool radius 0 lt J lt 99999 999mm its absolute value Width of the rectangular grooves in Y direction in used if it is negative G35 G36 G37 G38 99999999 99999999 mm Z vector between arc center and start point arc spiral K interpolation scaling 1 99999 Fixed cycle times 1 99999 Times of recalling a subprogram tesc tk teo de meer ana moe Tano Cutting width increment of interior grooving cycle in XY in plane in G22 G23 L Less than too diameter ang ide tnan 9 Cutting width increment in specified plane in G33 G34 its absolute value used if it is negative 0 mm 99999999mm its absolute value Distance between fineing start point and rectangular used if it is negative side in X direction in G37 G38 Set by data parameter P204 Miscellaneous function output program executed flow subprogram call N 0 99999 Block number 0 999 Parameter number G10 revised online ME o 0 99999 EN 0 99999 9999 ms 1 99999 Calling subprogram number 9999 9999 9999 9999 Scaling Scaling o point R when retracting a _ 99999 999 99999 909 mm Cutting depth or hole botiom s offset in fixed offset OR e aae mm Are adus angle iaplacementfcomervelis _ 00 04 Set by data parameter P2
368. t is the radial overtravel amount when the length amp diameter are measured the length direction s overtravel and radial overtravel amount are the same II 9 Damage the identified tool offset number An unoccupied tool offset number is used to the position of a tools damaged identification D s Q O 3 10 Damaged alloance I The tool dimensation regulation can compensate the tool s cutting status The positive value makes the actual radius ratio less than the specified value For example 1 01 makes the tool radius be less 0 01 than the previous Inputting the nominal tool radius value can set the nominal tool radius value to 0 Note 3 When the diameter is demarcated it is used to set the toolsetting probe diameter B Operation setps of measuring parameter input 1 Item selection move the cursor UP DOWN to select the required 2 Data input when the automatic tool measure is not started the data is input in any modes the Enter key is pressed to modify all data C Operatin steps Step 1 orderly set all tool s measured parameters Step 2 switch to the Auto mode Step 3 press lt Start gt to start the automatic toolsetting s main program then press lt Cycle Start gt to run the measured macro program After the measured is completed the system automatically writes the tool length and radius into the offser register Z workpiece origin setting Note Before Z workpiece origin is set the cu
369. t parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 73 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo I 7 a O Ca 2 S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual and G88 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G88 is replaced by other G codes in group 1 Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation 4 4 11 Boring cycle G89 Format G89 X Y_Z RP F K_ Function This cycle is used for boring a hole Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P_ Minimum dwell time at the bottom of the hole F Cutting feedrate K_ Repetitive number G89 G98 G89 G99 nA ENE A i o Point R level Point Z Point Z Fig 4 4 11 1 This cycle is almost the same as G85 The difference is that this cycle performs a dwell at the hole bottom Before specifying G89 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G89 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed whil
370. tain X Y Z or other axes Example M3 S2000 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G86 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 F120 Positioning bore hole 1 then return to Point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 2 then return to Point R Y 750 Positioning bore hole 3 then return to Point R X1000 Positioning bore hole 4 then return to Point R Y 550 Positioning bore hole 5 then return to Point R G98 Y 750 Positioning bore hole 6 then return to initial level G80 G28 G91 X0 YO Z0 Return to the reference point M5 Spindle stops M30 70 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Limitation G codes in 01 group G00 to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G86 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G86 is replaced by other G codes in group 1 Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation 4 4 9 Boring cycle back boring cycle G87 Format G87 X YZRQP F Function This cycle performs accurate boring Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z In incremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to point Z level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the point Z level R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R level hole b
371. tch to 1 2 Press 192 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting SETTING 3 Press J to enter lt SET gt page input the final user password and the level password SYSTEM 4 Press ssr press the soft key KE SPINDLE PARA to the parameter display page 5 Select the key RECOVER to recover the backuped parameter file SPXX txt of the current selected axis parameter to the servo drive XX axis number For example backup X and the file name SP01 txt SAVE 6 Press to make the servo save the refreshed parameters and the status bar displays the driver s parameter is successfully saved 7 After all parameters are set the parameter switches are closed 3 3 5 3 Servo Debugging To get a real responding servo function of the servo debugging function please cancel the gearratio at side of the driver and all items of compensations at side of the system including the pitch error compensation and backlash compensation 3 3 5 3 1 Page Composition Press the soft key HISERVO DEBUG to enter the servo debugging tool page which contents displayed in Fig 3 3 5 3 1 Fig 3 3 5 3 2 AXIS LYL ST ABSOLUTE 1989 1331 61 580 U 000UU O D FR Q ang O 5 STEP Press up down key to select axis to be adjusted Press MOYE or MOVE check rigid level if MT abnormal press lt INPUT gt If MT run stably press Dir Key to add rigid level till MT abnormal DATA Cd 42 58
372. te K_ Repetitive number G83 G98 G83 G99 I 7 aS O Ca 3 S 3 3 5 vo Point R level Point Z Fig 4 4 4 1 Q It specifies the cut depth for each cutting feed which must be specified as an incremental value In the second and the subsequent cutting feed the tool rapidly traverses to the position which has a distance d to the end position of the last drilling and then performs the cutting feed again d is set by parameter P271 as is shown in Fig 4 4 4 1 Specify a positive value for Q and a negative one will be processed as its absolute value Specify Q in a drilling block If it is specified in the block containing no drilling it is stored as modal data Miscellaneous function M codes are used to rotate the spindle before G83 is specified When G83 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the first hole positioning and the system then proceeds to the next drilling operation 62 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code When the number of repeats K is specified the M code is only executed for the first hole but not for the other holes Note 1 In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Note 2 When the bit parameter NO 43 1 0 no alarm will be issued if there is no cut i
373. te coordinate Absolute coordinate value gales Pea UR coorinale value MPG interruption does not change the relative coordinate values i i The change amount of the machine coordinate value is the Machine coordinate value displacement amount caused by MPG rotation Note The moving amount of MPG interruption is cleared when the manual reference point return is performed for each axis 6 3 Auxiliary Control in MPG Mode The auxiliary operation in MPG mode is identical with that in JOG mode See Sections 4 2 and 4 3 for details 243 Il D s Q O 5 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 6 4 Electronic MPG Drive Function Operation method Enable the electronic MPG drive function by setting G42 0 In Auto mode turn on Dry Run press and control the execution of the part program by rotating the MPG The execution speed of the program becomes faster as the MPG is rotated faster and vice versa This function is usually used for workpiece trial cutting and machining program detection Note 1 The Dry Run is ineffective after the electronic MPG drive function is enabled Note 2 Single block stop execution is effective in single block mode 244 Chapter 7 Auto Operation Chapter 7 Auto Operation 7 1 Selection of the Auto Run Programs 1 Program loading in auto mode AUTO a Press key to enter the Auto mode PROGRAM b Press k
374. te coordinates of point R level Q_ Offset at the hole bottom P_ Dwell time at the hole bottom F Cutting feedrate K_ Reptitive number of fine boring 66 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code G76 G98 G76 G99 spinde Gay ee Spindle CCW La FA gt O Point R level Spindle exact stop Tool Point R i Spindle exact exact stop sto p Point Z P Rapid traverse Rapid traverse gt 60 Shift amount q Fig 4 4 6 1 When the tool reaches the bottom of the hole the spindle stops at a fixed rotation position and the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool nose for retraction This ensures that the machined surface is not damaged and enables precise and efficient boring The retraction distance is specified by the parameter Q and the retraction axis and direction are specified by bit parameter NO 42 4 and NO 42 5 respectively The value of Q must be positive If it is a negative value the negative sign is ignored The hole bottom shift amount of Q is a modal value saved in canned cycle which must be specified carefully because it is also used as the cutting depth for G73 and G83 Before specifying G76 use a miscellaneous function M code to rotate the spindle If G76 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1sthole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next boring operation If the number of repeats K is specified the M code is
375. te in workpiece coordinate system Coordinate of end point relative to start point Coordinate of circle center relative to start point 25 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Arc radius R Arc radius Arc tangential speed CW and CCW on XY plane ZX plane or YZ plane refer to the directions viewed in the positive to negative direction of the Z axis Y axis or X axis in the right hand Cartesian coordinate system as is shown in Fig 4 2 3 1 03 X Y G03 a a Z G17 G18 G19 Fig 4 2 3 1 The default plane mode at power on can be set by bit parameters NO 31 1 and 2 The end point of an arc can be specified by parameter words X Y and Z It is expressed as absolute values in G90 and incremental values in G91 The incremental values are the coordinates of the end point relative to the start point The arc center is specified by parameter words J K corresponding to X Y Z respectively Either in absolute mode G90 or in incremental mode G91 parameter values of I J K are the coordinates of the circle center relative to the arc start point for simplicity the circle center coordinates with the start point taken as the origin temporarily They are the incremental values with signs See Fig 4 2 3 2 I 7 a O Ca s S 3 3 5 vo End point X Y End point Z X End point CY Z Start point Start point Start point i k Center Center Center I o K 6
376. te system Reference point Fig 4 2 11 3 As Fig 4 2 11 3 shows specify the workpiece coordinate system by code G92 X600 Y1200 taking a certain reference point on the tool holder as the tool start point Taking a reference point on the tool holder as the start point if the tool moves by the absolute value code in the program the specified position to which the reference point is moved must adds the tool length compensation the value of which is the difference between reference point and tool nose Note 1 If G92 is used to set the coordinate system in the tool offset the coordinate system for tool length compensation is the one set by G92 before the tool offset is added Note 2 For tool radius compensation the tool offset should be cancelled before G92 is used 4 2 12 Plane selection G17 G18 G19 Format G17 G18 G19 Function Select planes for circular interpolation tool radius compensation drilling or boring with G17 G18 G19 Explanation It has no code parameter G17 is the default plane at Power On The default plane at Power On can also be determined by bit parameters N0 31 1 and 2 The relation between code and plane is as follows 37 I 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual G17 XY plane G18 ZX plane G19 YZ plane The plane keeps unchanged in the block in which G17 G18 or
377. ter to be set is or press the direction key to move the cursor and position the required parameter to be modified SEARCH Method 2 press to position after inputting the parameter number 6 Input a new parameter value by digit keys input corresponding password authority to modifiy different grade parameters 7 Press for confirmation and then the parameter value is downloaded into the driver and the status bar displays the drivers parameter is successfully downloaded Il SAVE 8 Press Ej to make the servo save the refreshed parameters and the status bar displays the driver s parameter is successfully saved 9 After all parameters are set the parameter switches are closed O O D s Q O 5 3 3 5 2 3 Spindle Parameter Backup Select lt MDI gt mode SETTING 2 Press J to enter lt SET gt page set the parameter switch to 1 SETTING 3 Press to enter lt SET gt page input the final user password and the level password SYSTEM 4 Press sere press the soft key SPINDLE PARA to enter the parameter display page 5 Select the key BACKUP to backup the current selected axis parameter to the file SPXX txt XX axis number For example backup X and the file name SP01 txt 6 After all parameters are set the parameter switches are closed 3 3 5 2 4 Spindle Parameter Recover 1 Select lt MDI gt mode SETTING to enter lt SET gt page set the parameter swi
378. th of the program being executed can be monitored in graphic page A Press soft key START or key to enter the DRAW START mode then sign is placed in front of S START B Press STOP soft key or key moved ahead of T STOP C Press softkey SWITCH to switch the graph display among coordinates corresponding to 0 5 DELETE D Press soft key ERASE or key to erase the graph drawn 3 6 Diagnosis Display Il to enter the DRAW STOP mode then sign is O O D s Q O 5 The state of DI DO signals between CNC and machine the signals transferred between CNC and PLC PLC internal data and CNC internal state etc are displayed in the diagnosis page Refer to GSK990MC CNC System PLC Installation and Connection Manual for the meaning and setting of each diagnosis number The diagnosis of this part is used to detect the running states of the CNC interface signals and internal signals rather than modifying the states DIAGNOSIS Press key to enter the Diagnose page which consists of 5 subpages HH SIGNAL SYSTEM BUS DSP WAVE All of them can also be viewed by pressing the soft keys See Fig 3 6 1 216 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting Q Q Q Q Q cu m LL 1
379. that the length of the tool center path is larger than the circumference of a circle However when G41 and G42 are changed the following situation may occur Circular circular linear circular An alarm occurs when the tool offset direction is changed and an alarm Tool offset cannot be cancelled by arc code is issued when the tool number is DO Linear linear The tool offset direction can be changed Programmed path G42 N5 G01 G91 X500 Y 700 N6 G41 G02 J 500 N7 G42 G01 X500 Y700 Here the tool center path is not an arc of a circle but an arc from P1 to P2 Under some conditions an alarm may occur because of the interference check To move the tool around a full circle the circle must be specified in segments 7 a O Ca 2 S 3 3 5 vo Tool center path Fig 4 7 3 10 6 Temporary offset cancel In offset mode bit parameter NO 40 2 determines whether the offset is canceled at the intermediate point temporarily when G28 G30 is specified Please refer to the description of offset cancel and compensation start for detail information about this operation a G28 automatic reference point return If G28 is specified in offset mode the offset is cancelled at the intermediate point and automatically restored after reference point return G28 Programmed Tool center path path Fig 4 7 3 11 112 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code b G29 automatic return from referenc
380. the program 0034 Set up or offset cancel are not allowed in circular instruction Modify the program 0031 0036 G31 is specified in tool compensation in the tool compensation mode Modify the program The plane selected by G17 G18 or G19 is changed in tool compensation C 0037 Modify the program 0038 In tool compensation C overcutting will occur because the arc start point or end point is consistent with the center point of arc Modify the program 0039 Tool nose positioning error in tool compensation C Cannot convert the workpiece coordinate system in the tool compensation C 0040 Cancel the tool compensation before changing the workpiece coordinate Interference occurs in tool compensation C will lead overcutting Modify the pgoram Ten blocks with stop tool instruction are specified in tool compensation mode Modify the program 0043 No authority Change it in password page In canned cycle one of instruction in G27 G28 G29 G30 is specified 0044 Modify the program In canned cycle G73 G83 cutting depth Q is not specified or it is 0 Modify the program In 2 3 4 reference return instructions instruction besides P2 P3 and 0046 P4 is specified 0047 Perform machine zero return before executing instructions G28 G30 G53 gt O O D 5 Q x 0048 In canned cycle plane Z is higher than plane R 0049 In canned cycle plane Z is lower than plane R Move it when changing canned cycle mode
381. the M code is only executed for the first hole It is not executed for the other holes Note In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with the canned cycle code the offset is added or cancelled at the time of positioning to point R level when the tool compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in a separate block in the canned cycle mode the system can add or cancel the offset in real time P is a modal code with its min value set by data parameter P281 and its max value by P282 If P value is less than the value set by P281 the min value takes effect if P value is more than the value set by P282 the max value takes effect P cannot be stored as modal data f it is specified in a block that does not perform drilling Example M3 S2000 Spindle starts to rotate G90 G99 G82 X300 Y 250 Z 150 R 100 P1000 F120 Positioning drill hole 1 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R Y 550 Positioning drill hole 2 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R Y 750 Positioning drill hole 3 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R X1000 Positioning drill hole 4 dwell for 1s at the hole bottom then return to point R Y 550 Po
382. the maximum and minimum value of the axis are set Maximum value of X axis the maximum value along X axis in graphics Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch Minimum value of X axis the minimum value along X axis in graphics Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch Maximum value of Y axis the maximum value along Y axis in graphics unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch Minimum value of Y axis the minimum value along Y axis in graphics Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch Maximum value of Z axis the maximum value along Z axis in graphics Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch Minimum value of Z axis the minimum value along Z axis in graphics Unit 0 0001mm 0 0001inch B Setting steps for graphic parameters a Move the cursor to the parameter to be set b Key in the value required INPUT c Press key to confirm it O D FR Q mp O 5 215 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 2 Graphic page Press soft key HJGRAPH to enter this page See Fig 3 5 2 G32 X YO ZO N12 G 690 X74 235 Y 50 N166 Z30 Mo 51500 Ma N16 Ze 3 N126 X75 425 Y 48 551 Z 428 N128 X75 472 Y 48 356 Z 031 N13 X75 496 Y 48 174 Z 433 Nise Y 48 011 N134 X75 472 Y 47 676 Z 031 N136 X75 425 Y 47 776 Z 028 i ABSOLUTE X 4 IPT om Y 47 897 mm Z 5 48 mm Y al VA X 5 START T STOP je G PARA SWITCH START STOP ERASE Fig 3 5 2 The machining pa
383. the new character d gt Press soft key REPLACE to replace the character where the cursor is located as well as other identical characters in the block by the new one O D s Q mp O 5 Note This replacement operation is only for characters but not for an entire block 10 1 8 Rename of a Program Step for renaming the current program to another one a Select lt EDIT gt mode b Enter the program page and specify a program name with the cursor c Press address ke to key in the new name d Press key to complete the renaming 10 1 9 Program Restart The function is used in the event of an accident such as tool fracture system restarting after power off or emergency stop during program execution After the accident is eliminated the system returns to the program breakpoint by program restart to continue the program execution and then it retracts to original point in Dry Run mode Steps for program restart are as follows 263 Gr Wise GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 1 Solve the machine accident such as tool change offset changing machine zero return 2 Op PROG 2 In lt AUTO gt mode press key FESTART on the panel PROGRAM 3 Press key to enter the program page then press soft key RSTR to enter program restart subpage Fig 10 1 9 1 DISTANCE ABSOLUTE REM DIST UK 61 68 mm xX A 727 tm Xx 63 407 mm 2 Y
384. the one in which the tool enters Explanation 1 Stored stroke check 1 Its boundary is set by data parameters P66 P73 The outside of this area is the forbidden area which is usually set as the machine maximum stroke by the machine builder 2 Stored stroke check 2 Its boundary is set by data parameters P76 P83 or program instructions The inside or outside of this area can be set as a forbidden area by bit parameter NO 11 0 0 inside for forbidden area 1 outside for forbidden area 1 Point A and point B in the following figure must be set when the forbidden area is set by parameters B J K xX gt l Y gt J Z gt K X I gt Least instruction increment unit Y J gt Least instruction increment unit Z K gt Least instruction increment unit Fig 2 6 2 Creating or changing forbidden area by parameters When the forbidden area is set by data parameters P 6 P83 the data should be specified by the distance output increment from the machine coordinate system in the least instruction increment unit 2 When the forbidden area is set using program instructions G12 forbids the tool to enter the forbidden area G13 allows the tool to enter the forbidden area G12 must be specified in a separate block in a program The instructions below are used for creating or changing the forbidden area B I J K X gt 1 Y gt J Z gt K X l gt Least instruction increment unit Y J gt G Least instruction i
385. the program during the tool infeed 4 6 6 Rectangle Outside Fine Milling Cycle G37 G38 Command format G37 G98 G99 Xx Y Z R L J L U D_ FL EK G38 Function The tool performs fine milling outside the rectangle by the specified width and direction and then returns after finishing the fine milling Explanation G37 CCW fine milling cycle outside a rectangle I G38 CW fine milling cycle outside a rectangle X Y The start point within X Y plane Z Machining depth which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to R reference plane in G91 R R reference plane which is absolute position in G90 and position relative to the start point of this block in G91 l Rectangular width in X axis ranging from 0 mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative J Rectangular width in Y axis ranging from 0 mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative L Distance from the milling start point to rectangular side in X axis ranging from 0 mm 99999 9999mm Its absolute value is used if it is negative U Corner arc radius There is no corner transition arc if it is omitted D Tool diameter number ranging from 1 256 DO is 0 by default The current tool diameter value is given by the specified number K Number of repeats 7 O ta s S 3 3 5 vo Cycle process 1 Rapid positioning to the start point within XY plane 2 Rapid down to R level 3 Feed to the hole bottom 4 Perfo
386. the rigid grade reduces or increases one grade C Axis move and axis move soft key negatively positively move the current axis for some distance which is set by P392 at the speed set by P393 Before the system enters the optimization flow repetitively press axis move and axis move to move the axis to view whether the motor vibriates or is abnormal The user cannot continuously press axis move and axis move to move the axis to get the motor s characteristics data after the system enters the optimization flow Note 1 The user presses axis move and axis move to move the axis and collect data after the system enters the optimization flow Note 2 Non professional pesons must not change P392 and P393 otherwise it causes an unsuccessful 194 Chapter 3 Page Display and Data Modification and Setting optimization key the user confirms the operation or the system enters the next step CANCEL key the user cancels some operation or the system returns to the previous operation F Ea key the reset operation key is pressed and the system returns to the intial operation step SAVE G key save the optimized parameters The operation flow is shown below E 195 O D 3 Q mp O 5 SGT Msi GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Enter the rigid grade regulation and optimization page oy Step1 Press lt or gt gt
387. the tool center can not be located at the point and _ specify the workpiece coordinate workpiece reference point the tool is located at a system by CNC instructions at this position Then position can be reference point the distance of the workpiece coordinate system coincides with which to the base point is known Set the the programming Coordinate system workpiece coordinate system using this known distance e g G92 Fig 2 4 3 2 One machining program sets a workpiece coordinate system select one workpiece coordinate system Setting a workpiece coordinate system can move its origin to change Using the following two methods can set a workpiece coordinate system 1 For using G82 See Section Programming 4 2 1 2 For using G54 G59 See Section Programming4 2 8 2 4 4 Absolute Coordinate Programming and Relative Coordinate Programming Definishing an axis movement method is divided into two methods an absolute value definition and relative value definition The absolute value definition is to use an end point s coordinate value of the axis movement to perform a programming is called an absolute coordinate programming The relative coordinate definition is to use an axis movement value to directly program which is called an relative coordinate programming also called an incremental coordinate programming 1 an absolute coordinate value Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User
388. the tool performs rapid retraction for distance d intermittently each feeding If G73 and an M code are specified in the same block the M code is executed at the time of the 1 hole positioning operation then the system proceeds to the next drilling operation If the number of repeats K is specified M code is only executed for the first hole not for the other holes Note 1 In the current version M00 M01 M02 M06 M30 M98 and M99 are the M codes executed after the other codes in a block i e these M codes are executed after the execution of the current statement block Note 2 When the bit parameter NO 43 1 0 no alarm will be issued if there is no cut in value specified in the peck drilling G73 G83 At this moment if the code parameter Q is not specified or it is 0 the system performs the hole positioning in XY plane but does not perform the drilling operation When the bit parameter NO 43 1 1 an alarm will be issued if no cut in value is specified in the peck drilling G73 G83 i e an alarm 0045 Address Q not found or set to 0 G73 G83 occurs when the code parameter Q is not specified or it is 0 If the Q value is negative the system takes its absolute value to perform intermittent feed Note 3 Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation code G43 G44 or G49 is specified in the same block with a canned cycle code the offset is added or cancelled when the tool is positioned to point R If the tool compensatio
389. then locate the cursor to the position to be edited 1 Word insertion After inputting the data press key L J to insert the data to the left of the cursor 2 Word deletion Locate the cursor to the word to be deleted press key to delete the word where the cursor is located 3 Word modification 259 Il O O D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual ALTER Move the cursor to the place to be modified input the new contents then press key to replace the old contents by the new ones 10 1 1 6 Single Block Deletion PROGRAM Select lt EDIT gt mode then press key pow to display the program Locate the cursor to the DELETE Note Regardless of whether there is a sequence number in the block the user can press key S to delete it The cursor should be located at the beginning of the line beginning of the block to be deleted Press keys to delete the block where the cursor is located 10 1 1 7 Deletion of Blocks Blocks deletion from the current displayed word to the block of which the sequence number is specified N100 X100 0 M03 S2000 N2233 S02 N 2300 M30 Cursor current position Area to be deleted Fig 10 1 1 7 1 PROGRAM Select lt EDIT gt mode press key reo to display the program Locate the cursor to the beginning of the target position to be deleted as the position of word N100 in the figure above th
390. ting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0035 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 1 axis in 0 0000 G58 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0036 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 2 axis in 0 0000 G58 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0037 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 3 axis in 0 0000 G58 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0039 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 5 axis in 0 0000 G58 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0038 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 4 axis in 0 0000 G58 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0040 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 1 axis in 0 0000 G59 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm gt O O D 5 Q x 298 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List 0041 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 2 axis in 0 0000 G59 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0042 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 3 axis in 0 0000 G59 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0043 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 4 axis in 0 0000 G59 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0044 Workpiece origin offset amount along the 5 axis in 0 0000 G59 Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0045 The 1 axis coordinate of the 1 reference point in 0 0000 machine coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0046 The 2 axis coordinate of th
391. ting range 0 5000 999 9999 319 gt O D 5 Q x Gr MiB GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0394 The 1 axis backup of coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 0395 The 2 axis backup of coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 0396 The 3 axis backup of coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 0397 The 4 axis backup of coordinate system Setting range 9999 9999 9999 9999 0399 Multiple of interpolation step length 1 Setting range 1 0000 10 0000 0400 Shape matching parameter 2 setting range 0 0020 99 0000 Shape matching parameter 400 is to control error in a permissible range through shape error analyzing and shape optimization based on initial spline curve The bigger the parameter is the bigger the shape error will be and vice versa 0401 Shape matching limit Setting range 1 0000 999 000 When shape matching limit parameter 401 is performing velocity matching calculation the parameter will prevent shape error increasing caused by curvature optimization 0402 Velocity matching parameter Setting range 0 0020 99 0000 gt O D 5 Q x Velocity matching parameter 402 is to smooth velocity by optimizing curvature in which curvature is radially distributed along normal direction of each point on the curve The bigger the parameter the lower the optimization the bigger the accel
392. tion 1 set the direction of the 3 axis returning to the reference point negative direction 0 set the direction of the 3 axis returning to the reference point positive direction 1 set the direction of the 4 axis returning to the reference point negative direction 0 set the direction of the 4 axis returning to the reference point positive direction 1 set the direction of the 5 axis returning to the reference point negative direction 0 set the direction of the 5 axis returning to the reference point positive direction Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 00 8 AXS1 AXS2 AXS3 AXS4 AXS5 Standard setting 0000 1000 System parameter number 00 9 RAB A4TP AXS5 AXS4 AXS3 AXS2 AXS1 1 the 1 axis is set to a rotary axis 0 the 1 axis is set to a linear axis 1 the 2 axis is set to a rotary axis 0 the 2 axis is set to a linear axis 1 the 3 axis is set to a rotary axis 0 the 3 axis is set to a linear axis 1 the 4 axis is set to a rotary axis 0 the 4 axis is set to a linear axis 1 the 5 axis is set to a rotary axis 0 the 5 axis is set to a linear axis gt O O D 5 Q x A4TP RAB 1 each axis as a rotary axis rotates nearby 0 each axis as a rotary axis does not rotate nearby 1 itis taken a 4 axis link system 0 itis not taken a 4 axis link s
393. tion and Setting for Parameters 3 3 2 1 Parameter Display Press soft key K IPARA to enter parameter page There are two subpages including BITPAR and NUMPAR Both of them can be viewed and modified by corresponding soft keys as is shown below 1 Bit parameter page Press soft key BITPAR to enter this page see Fig 3 3 2 1 1 Il ONO Bit Bits BitS Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit1 Bite 0006 MAOB ZPLS HR HER xx XX xxx ZMOD ZRN AY 0007 A4TP ZMI4 ZMIZ ZMIy ZMIx XX XX A4RT HHH al A A 4 O D FR Q mp O 5 0008 AX54 AXSZ AXSY AXSX PLW4 PLWZ PLWY PLWX 809 xxx APZA APZZ APZY APZX UHSM APC HR HH 1 0010 RCUR MS O 1 O PZ cee XXX RX eles ele ee OUT2 al 4 L wae KK RLC ZCL SCBM KX R fj 0011 BF A A A A INPUT 16 56 l PATH 1 ES NUMPAR RETURN Fig 3 3 2 1 1 Refer to APPENDIX 1 PARAMETERS for details 2 Number parameter page Press soft key NUMPAR to enter this page See fig 3 3 2 1 2 183 Il O O D s Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual No ATA e SER communication channel 1 baud rate m oO 1 Ss 3 AY f e004 0 1 system interpolation period mill isecond 005 3 CNC controlled axis 006 1 CNC Language Select CH 1 EN 2 RUS 3 ESP seer The max error of pos
394. tion by the path of transition arc 1 from the start point 5 Perform linear and circular interpolation by the path 2 3 4 5 6 6 perform circular interpolation by the path of transition arc 7 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial level or R level according to G98 or G99 Command path G35 CCW rectangular groove finish milling cycle G36 CW rectangular groove finish milling cycle O Q O CD D gt CD O Q Cam mi a gt C Tool center path Rectangular Rectangular groove border groove border DuluweJbolgd Fig 4 6 5 1 Note The NO 12 1 should be set to 1 when this code is used Example Fine milling a circular groove that has been rough milled in the figure below by canned cycle G35 code X10 Y0 I 80 Fig 4 6 5 2 G90 G00 X50 Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G35 X10 YO Z 50 R5 180 J50 L30 U10 D1 F800 Performing inner rectangular groove milling at hole bottom in the canned cycle G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Cancelling the canned cycle and returning from point R level M30 Limitation when G35 G36 is used G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal code NO 48 0 is set to 1 otherwise G35 G36 is replaced by other codes in group 1 94 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code Tool radius compensation in the fixed cycle command the tool radius compensation is ignored the system calls the tool radius compensation specified by
395. tion explanation E new Feedrate override key Rapid traverse ON OFF Any mode z a i FE SR i gs g Ramid oed ke Auto mode MDI mode Machine 45 a S 4 eee gis nee Rapid override key manual zero return mode MPG mode Ss es S 2 P step MPG override selection Step mode Manual mode DNC For positive negative movement of X Y Z and Nth axes in MANUAL mode and Step mode and the axis moved in positive direction is selected by MPG Manual feeding key mode Machine zero return mode Step mode Manual mode MPG mode Press this key to stop Auto Feed hold key operation Press this key and the system Cycle start key automatically runs Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode Auto mode MDI mode DNC mode Note 1 A block with more than 1 sign at its beginning is skipped by the system even if the skip function is OFF Note 2 In the explanation below the keys in lt gt are the panel keys in are the soft keys at the bottom of the screen indicates the corresponding page of the current soft key Fl indicates there are submenus 164 Chapter 2 System Power ON OFF and Safety Operations Chapter 2 System Power ON OFF and Safety Operations 2 1 System Power on Before GSK990MC CNC system is powered on ensure that a The machine state is normal b The voltage of the power supply conforms to the requirement of the machine c The wiring is co
396. to use a grating ruler Q RAS3 1 set the 3 axis to use a grating ruler a 0 set the 3 axis not to use a grating ruler x RAS4 1 set the 4 axis to use a grating ruler 0 set the 4 axis not to use a grating ruler RAS5 1 set the 5 axis to use a grating ruler 0 set the 5 axis not to use a grating ruler Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 0 0 2 DEC4 DEC4 DEC3 DEC2 DEC1 1 decelerate when the 1 axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal is 1 0 decelerate when the 1 axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal is 0 1 decelerate when the 2 axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal is 1 0 decelerate when the 2 axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal is 0 1 decelerate when the 3 axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal is 1 DEC1 DEC2 DEC3 280 DEC4 DECS5 0 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List decelerate when the 3 axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal is 0 1 decelerate when the 4 axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal is 1 0 decelerate when the 4 axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal is 0 1 decelerate when the 5 axis reference point returns and the deceleration signal is 1 0 decelerate when the 5 axis referenc
397. tops M30 Limitation G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G83 cannot be specified in the same block is replaced by other G codes in group 1 Tool offset The tool radius offset is ignored at the time of the canned cycle positioning because the instruction function does not execute the tool radius compensation 4 4 5 Tapping Cycle G74 or G84 Format G74 G84 X_Y_Z_R_P_F_K_ Function in the tapping cycle when the tapping axis reaches the hole bottom the execution pauses and then the spindle rotates reversely to retract the tapping axis G74 is a left handed tapping cycle and G84 is right handed rotation tapping Explanation X_Y_ Hole positioning data Z_ Inincremental programming it specifies the distance from point R level to the bottom of the hole in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of the hole bottom R_ In incremental programming it specifies the distance from the initial level to point R level in absolute programming it specifies the absolute coordinates of point R P_ dwell time at the hole bottom 63 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual F_ Cutting federate in tapping K Repetitive number specified if necessary G74 G98 G74 G99 Initial level gt 1 R level Spindle CW i Spindle CW lt q P P I 7 aS O Ca 3 Q 3 3 5 vo Initial level
398. travel direction overtravel manual or MPG direction movement release 0504 The 3 axis software overtravel direction overtravel manual or MPG direction movement release 0505 The 3 axis software overtravel direction overtravel manual or MPG direction movement release 0506 The 4 axis software overtravel direction overtravel manual or MPG direction movement release The 3 axis software overtravel direction overtravel manual or MPG direction movement release 0510 The 1 axis hardware overtravel direction overtravel overtravel release manual or MPG direction movement release on The 1 axis hardware overtravel direction overtravel overtravel release manual or MPG direction movement release 0512 The 2 axis hardware overtravel direction overtravel overtravel release manual or MPG direction movement release The 2 axis hardware overtravel direction overtravel overtravel release manual or MPG direction movement release 0514 The 3 axis hardware overtravel direction overtravel overtravel release manual or MPG direction movement release 0515 The 3 axis hardware overtravel direction overtravel overtravel release manual or MPG direction movement release The 4 axis hardware overtravel direction overtravel overtravel release manual or MPG direction movement release The 4 axis hardware overtravel direction overtravel overtravel release 0517 eee manual or
399. trol S5 digit analog output emax spindle speed limiteconstant surface speed function Spindle encoder encoder lines 100 5000p r drive ratio between encoder and spindle 1 255 1255 Spindle override 50 120 divided into 8 to realize real time adjustment Tapping cycle flexible tapping and rigid tapping ePitch error compensation compensation interval compensation origin can be set Compensation range 999 999 pulse equivalent eBacklash compensation compensate the machine s backlash value by fixed frequency or Automatic speed up down method compensation Spindle function etool length compensation A or B type length compensation fuction selected by parameter etool radius compensation C type tool compensation function max compensation value 999 999mm or 99 9999inch Status signal eemergency stopeovertravelestored travel limiteNC ready signaleservo ready signal eMST function completion signal eautomatic run start light signal eautomatic running signal efeed hold Reliability and light signal safety Self diagnostic function esignalesystemebit controleservoecommunicationespindle NC alarm eprogrameoperationeovertraveleservoeconnectionePLCememory ROM and RAM eEditeautoeMDlezero returneJOGesingle stepeMPGeDNC eSingle blockeskipedry runemiscellaneous lockeprogram restarteMPG _ interruptesingle step interrupteMPG interference eMachine lockeinterlockefeed holdecycl starteemergency stopeexternal reset si
400. ty of CNC data which are shown as follows 1 Interface input signal 1000 1015 read signal input to system from PLC by bit i e G signal 1032 read signal input to system from PLC by byte i e G signal 2 Interface output signal 1100 1115 write signal output to PLC from the system by bit i e F signal 1132 write signal a to PLC from the system by byte i e F signal 3 Tool length offset value 1500 1755 readable and writable 4 Tool length wear offset value 1800 2055 readable and writable 5 Tool radius offset value 2100 2355 readable and writable 6 Tool radius wear offset value 2400 2655 readable and writable 125 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 7 Alarm 3000 8 User data list 3500 3755 read only unwritable 9 Modal message 4000 4030 read only unwritable 10 Position message 5001 5030 read only unwritable 11 Workpiece zero offset 5201 5235 readable and writable 12 Additional workpiece coordinate system 7001 7250 readable and writable 3 Explanation for system variables 1 Modal message Table 4 9 2 2 Variable Group number Function number 0 0 0 0 0 0 G10 G11 G00 G01 G02 G03 4002 G17 G18 G19 G90 G91 4004 G94 G95 4005 G54 G655 G56 G57 G58 G59 4006 G20 G21 4007 G40 G41 G42 4008 643 044 040 aa 7 a O Ca 2 S 3 3 5 vo G22 G23 G24 G25 G626 4
401. ually return to the reference point and simultaneously control multi axis 1 G28 alarm when the reference point is not established 0 G28 uses a block when the reference point is not established 1 the reference point memorizes Q the reference point does not memory 1 the machine zero return s deceleration signal is executed by the PLC logic operation 0 1 0 1 Q the machine zero return s deceleration signal directly reads X signal Zero type selection one revolution signal Zero type selection non one revolution signal Zero type selection for non one revolution signal B Zero type selection for non one revolution signal A Standard setting 1110 0000 System parameter number 7 ZMI1 ZMI2 1 zmis ZMI4 ZMI3 ZMI2 ZM set the direction of the 1 axis returning to the reference point negative direction 0 set the direction of the 1 axis returning to the reference point positive direction 1 set the direction of the 1 axis returning to the reference point negative direction 0 set the direction of the 1 axis returning to the reference point positive direction 1 set the direction of the 2 axis returning to the reference point negative direction 0 set the direction of the 2 axis returning to the reference point positive ZMI3 ZMI4 ZMI5 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List direc
402. unction G Code Value to be added to the value of the specified offset number in incremental mode G91 the sum is the tool offset value Explanation The range of tool offset value Geometric offset metric input 999 999mm 999 999mm inch input 99 9998inch 99 9998inch Wear offset metric input 400 000mm 400 000mm inch input 40 0000inch 40 0000inch Note The max value of the wear offset is restrained by data parameter P267 48 Feed G Code 4 8 1 Feed Mode G64 G61 G63 Format Exact stop mode G61 Taping mode G63 Cutting mode G64 Function Exact stop mode G61 Once specified this function keeps effective till G62 G63 or G64 is specified The tool is decelerated for an in position check at the end point of a block then next block is executed Tapping mode G63 Once specified this function keeps effective till G61 G62 or G64 is specified The tool is not decelerated at the end point of a block but the next block is executed When G63 is specified both feedrate override and feed hold are invalid Cutting mode G64 Once specified this function keeps effective till G61 G62 or G63 is specified The tool is not decelerated at the end point of a block and the next block is executed I 7 a O Ca Q 3 3 5 vo Explanation 1 No parameter format 2 G64 is the system default feed mode no deceleration is performed at the end point of a block and next block is executed directly 3 The purpose of i
403. unction The data input parameter and offset modification etc are described in CHAPTER 3 PAGE DISPLAY AND DATA MODIFICATION AND SETTING This chapter will describe the MDI operation function in MDI mode 8 1 MDI Code Input The input in MDI mode is classified into two types 1 By MDI type multiple blocks can be input consecutively 2 By CUR MOD type only one bock can be input The input in MDI type is identical with the program input in Edit mode See CHAPTER 10 PROGRAM EDIT in this manual for details The input in CUR MOD type is introduced below Example Inputting a block GOO X50 Y100 in CUR MOD page The steps are ED MDI 1 Press key to enter MDI mode PROGRAM 2 Press key to enter program page then press soft key CUR MOD to enter CUR MOD page See fig 8 1 1 3 After inputting block GOOX50Y100 in sequence with the keyboard press key for confirmation then the program is displayed on the page As is shown in the figure below Fig 8 1 1 MODAL 300 1500 a8 0000 0000 9000 OTAz wT ABSOLUTE X S7 727 m Y 47 897 mm Z 5 48 mm SPRM 06000 SMAX 100000 17 27 27 PATH 1 PRG MDI CUR MOD CUR NXT DIR Fig 8 1 1 25 il O D FR Q mp O 5 Il Oo D 3 Q O 5 Gr HS GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 8 2 MDI
404. urn to point R Positioning bore hole 4 then return to point R Positioning bore hole 5 then return to point R Positioning bore hole 6 then return to the initial level Return to the reference point and cancel the canned cycle Explanation for the usage of the canned cycle using the tool length compensation 75 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual Reference point Q 350 lt O 1 100 _ 100 100 Unit MM 400 I 1 6 drilling of a 10 hole 7 10 drilling of a 20 hole 11 13 boring of a 095 hole 7 aS O Ca 3 Q 3 3 5 vo Return position 250 Initial point position Unit MM 200 190 ks 150 Fig 4 4 12 1 The values of offset No 11 No 15 and No 31 are set to 200 190 and 150 respectively The program is as follows N001 G92 X0 YO ZO The coordinate system is set at reference point N002 G90 GOO Z250 T11 M6 Tool change NO003 G43 Z0 H11 Tool length compensation at the initial point N004 S300 M3 Spindle start 76 Chapter 4 Preparatory Function G Code N005 G99 G81 X400 Y 350 Z 153 R 97 F120 N006 Y 550 N007 G98 Y 750 N008 G99 X1200 NOO9 Y 550 N010 G98 Y 350 N011 GOO X0 YO M5 N012 G49 Z250 T15 M6 N013 G43 Z0 H15 N014 S200 M3 N015 G99 G82 X550 Y 450 Z 130 R 97 P30 F70 N016 G98 Y 650 N017 G99 X1050 N018 G98 Y 450 N019
405. ut time of reset signal 200 Setting range 50 400 ms 0204 Bits allowable for M codes Setting range 1 2 0205 Bits allowable for S codes Setting range 1 6 0206 Bits allowable for T codes Setting range 1 4 0210 Incremental amount for automatic sequence number 10 insertion Setting range O0 1000 0211 Tool offset heading number input by MDI disabled Setting range 0 9999 0212 Tool offset numbers input by MDI disabled Setting range 0 9999 0214 Error limit of arc radius 0 05 Setting range 0 0001 0 1000 mm 0216 Pitch error compensation number of the 1 axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0217 Pitch error compensation number of the 2 axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0218 Pitch error compensation number of the 3 axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0219 Pitch error compensation number of the 4 axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 0220 Pitch error compensation number of the 5 axis reference point Setting range 0 9999 311 gt Lej D 5 Q x Crs GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 0221 Pitch error of the 1 axis moving to the origin from the 0 direction which is opposite to the zero return s direction Setting range 0 9999 0 9999 Pitch error of the 2 axis moving to the origin from the direction which is opposite to the zero return s direction Setting range 0 9999
406. ution continues Explanation 1 If the single block switch is turned on during return operation the tool performs single block stop at the manual intervention point 2 If an alarm or resetting occurs during the manual intervention or return operation this function will be cancelled 3 Use machine lock mirror image and scaling functions carefully during manual intervention 4 Machining and workpiece shape should be taken into consideration prior to the manual intervention to prevent tool or machine damage The manual intervention operations are shown in the following figure 234 Chapter 4 Manual Operation 1 The N1 block cuts a workpiece A Workpiece N1 Block start point 2 The tool is stopped by pressing the feed hold key in the middle of the N1 block Workpiece 4 After automatic return to point A by G00 speed the remaining moving command of block N1 is executed uoneJadO Workpiece 4 1 5 Workpiece Alignment To ensure the machining precision size shape and position precision and surface quality the alignment positioning must be performed to the workpiece and fixture clamping workpiece The common methods for alignment are alignment by drawing lines alignment by trial cutting etc For GSK218MC system an operation method for alignment using a tool is specially designed Example Using the method for alignment by trial cutting and halving also called halving alignment to position the center i
407. vel nesting Two level nesting Three level nesting Four level nesting Fig 3 2 2 Quadruple subprogram nesting The Command can be called with a subprogram The same subprogram can be called up to 9999 times consecutively or repeatedly 3 2 1 Subprogram Writing Write a subprogram following the format below o ODDE Subprogram number fristes Subprogram M99 Subprogram end Fig 3 2 1 1 Write the subprogram number behind the address O at the beginning of the subprogram and end the subprogram with Command M99 M99 format as above 3 2 2 Subprogram Call The subprogram is called by the call Command of the main program or subprogram The format of the subprogram is as follows I 7 O Ca 2 S 3 3 5 vo Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual M98 POUDI DO LOUTI T iea Repetitive called times Called subprogram number Fig 3 2 2 1 e If no repetition count is specified the subprogram is called just once Example M98 P1002L5 It means a subprogram with number 1002 is repeatedly called 5 times e Execution sequence of calling a subprogram from a main program Main program 3 Subprogram NO010 010100 N0020 N1020 lt eee N0030 M98 P10100L3 N1030 i NOO40 i N10400000 N0050 M98 P10100N N1050 NOO60 N1060 lt lt M99 Fig 3 2 2 2 A subprogram can call another subprogram in the same way as a main p
408. vo s new version MAPC 1 multi circle absolute encoder 0 single circle absolute encoder 286 Appendix 1 GSK990MC Parameter List APC 1 use an absolute encoder 0 donot use an absolute encoder UHSM 1 use to the manually set the machine zero directly 0 donot use to the manually set the machine zero directly Standard setting 1000 0000 System parameter number 0 2 2 DAL DAL 1 add tool length compensation in absolute position display 0 donot add tool length compensation in absolute position display Standard setting 0000 OOO System parameter number 0 2 3 POSM POSM 1 Mode displayed on program monitoring page 0 Mode not displayed on program monitoring page Standard setting 0100 0000 System parameter number 024 NPA NPA 1 To switch to alarm page when alarm occurs 0 Not switch to alarm page when alarm occurs Standard setting 0000 0000 System parameter number 01215 ALM DGN GRA SET SYS PRG POS POS 1 To switch over page by pressing POSITION key in position page gt 0 Not switch over page by pressing POSITION key in position page 3 PRG 1 To switch over page by repressing POSITION key in program page 3 0 Not switch over page by repressing POSITION key in program page x lt SYS 1 To switch over page by repressing PARAMETER key in program page 0 Not switc
409. ware stroke ranges are set by the data parameters P66 P73 with the machine coordinates taken as the reference values Overtravel alarm occurs if the moving axis exceeds the setting software stroke Whether the stroke check is performed after power on and before manual reference point return is determined by bit parameter N0 11 6 0 No 1 Yes Whether the overtravel alarm is issued before or after the overtravel when the software limit overtravel occurs is set by bit parameter N0 11 7 0 before 1 after After the overtravel occurs move the axis out of the overtravel range in the reverse direction in Manual mode to release the alarm 2 5 3 Overtravel Alarm Release PA Method to release the hardware overtravel alarm In manual or MPG mode press key CESS on the panel then move the axis in the reverse direction for positive overtravel move negatively for negative overtravel move positively 2 6 Stroke Check By stored stroke check 1 and 2 the system can specify 2 areas where the tool is forbidden to enter L J K 1 Forbidden area is inside 1 Forbidden area is outside Forbidden area for the tool Fig 2 6 1 Stroke check 168 Chapter 2 System Power ON OFF and Safety Operations When the tool is moved beyond the stroke an alarm is issued and the machine is decelerated and stopped When the tool enters the forbidden area with an alarm issued move the tool in the reverse direction relative to
410. x1 5 on a workpiece can select the parameters 500 500 r min F 1 5x500 750mm min When a multi head thread is machined it multiplies the number of head to get the F value In feed per rev the thread lead is equal to the feedate Example y Feed per minute mode Feed per rev mode 3 Spindle speed 1000r min Spindle speed 1000r min 9 Thread lead 1 0mm Thread lead 1 0mm z So Z axis feedrate 1000 1 1000mm min So Z axis feedrate thread lead1 1mm r 2 G94 feed per minute mode G95 feed per rev mode G00 X120 Y100 position G00 X120 Y100 position M29 1000 specify rigid mode M29 1000 specify rigid mode G74 Z 100 R 20 F1000 right hand rigid tapping G74 Z 100 R 20 F1 right hand rigid tapping G80 cancel tapping cycle G80 cancel tapping cycle G28 G91 X0 YO ZO return to the reference point G28 G91 X0 YO ZO return to the reference point M30 end of program M30 end of program Limitation G code When G84 is used G codes in 01 group GOO to G03 G60 modal G code bit parameter NO 48 0 is set to 1 and G84 cannot be specified in the same block otherwise G84 is replaced by other codes in group 1 M code before G84 is specified using the miscellaneous function M code makes the spindle rotate When the spindle rotation is not specified the system automatically count the current spindle command speed on the R plane and then the spindle is regulated to counterclockwise when G84 and an M code are specified in the s
411. xplanation ior Panel FUNCIONS eenei E a E NERE rn 159 tAk FED DIS Olay AC ER A a ie ee ne 159 1 2 2 Eating K SYD ARE Al Ca iaa a rs Als ERR E E EDER a Dan AREAS DSE SE 160 TA Soreen Operation KEYS siria a chic alanere ss sone Ul at ace Sel ae sene bag 160 1 2 4 Machine Control Area ccsc3 c6c5oicho2 eativ notices deiges L EEK ERE E REEL E REESE ERR ES ERE E REESE REE ERE could ete E ELERS ERE RER EL EEG 161 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM POWER ON OFF AND SAFETY OPERATIONS ccssssccsssssccssssscesseees 165 ZT SYStCNi FOWE OM ore eneret ennen enden esto oct es esa 165 22 DSYSICM POWSIPOM apaan a E lederne era 165 2 SMEV OPSPORE ae seis 166 23 1 RESEL OPSTAO eres EEN AE RES SRERE ES RER SEES NER helen SEERE SEES TE RE SES TRT i eae boa Saddell ee 166 252 EIMCIGENGCY SOP ascetic a ee ee ee ba De ER 166 Zo ROC OMG easton eee ESSENSEN SEEREN REESE SEERE SES teats Gade asa dag tS ER SEE SEES RK MENER TEENS AED FEE VERS FIRER EGEN 167 ZA Cycle Startand Feed HOG 2 aan AENA Aeterna oomideabess 167 275 OVEMIFAVGl Proteccion ssc 6 cassie fiak cd A seu ct rr T Rae 167 2 5 1 Hardware Overtravel Protection ssssssssssee skere ekte er ast een dia LERET ERE LER ERE LER cashes 167 2 5 2 Software Overtravel Protection cccccccccssececceseecceeececceseeecseseeeseuecesseueeecsuesecssueeesseeeeesssseesesseneeenes 168 253 Overravel Alan Releases 55 AAE cece naga cdieangestunadieaetveua ns suchgecsus nanan dacSea ee
412. y G10 code each workpiece coordinate system can be changed respectively 4 2 10 Selecting machine coordinate system G53 Format G53 X_ Y Z_ Function To rapidly position the tool to the corresponding coordinates in the machine coordinate system Explanations 1 While G53 is used in the program the code coordinates behind it should be the ones in the 35 Or JJ Sy J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual machine coordinate system and the machine will rapidly position to the specified location 2 G53 is a non modal code which is only effective in the current block It does not affect the coordinate system defined before Restrictions Select machine coordinate system G53 When the position on the machine is specified the tool traverses to the position rapidly G53 used for selecting the machine coordinate system is a non modal code i e it is effective only in the block specifying the machine coordinate system Absolute value G90 should be specified for G53 If G53 is specified in incremental mode G91 the code G91 will be ignored i e G53 is still in G90 mode without changing G91 mode The tool can be specified to move to a special position on the machine e g using G53 to write a moving program to move the tool to the tool changing position Note When G53 is specified the tool radius compensation and tool length offset are cancelled temporarily They will resume in the next compen
413. y J GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual G23 Function it is used for performing circular interpolations from the circle center by helical line till the programmed figure of the circle groove is machined Explanation G22 CCW inner circular groove rough milling G23 CW inner circular groove rough milling X Y The start point in X Y plane Z Machining depth which is the absolute position in G90 and the position relative to R level in G91 R reference level which is the absolute position in G90 and the position relative to the start point of this block in G91 Circular groove radius which should be greater than the current tool radius Cut width increment within XY plane which is less than the tool diameter but more than 0 First cutting depth in Z axis direction It is the distance below the R level which should be greater than 0 if the first cutting depth exceeds the groove bottom then the machining is performed at the groove bottom Cutting depth for each cutting feed Distance greater than 0 to the end surface to be machined at rapid tool traverse Tool compensation number ranging from 1 256 DO is O by default The current tool diameter value is obtained by the specified sequence number Number of repeats Cycle process 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Rapid positioning to the position in XY plane Rapid down to point R level Cut a de
414. ystem Standard setting 0000 0001 System parameter number 011 0 SCBM ZCL RLC RCUR MSL WCZS RLC ZCL SCBM 1 check the stroke before moving 0 donot check the stroke before moving 1 cancel local coordinate system when performing manual reference point return 0 do not cancel relative coordinate system when performing manual reference point return 1 cancel relative coordinate system after resetting 0 donot cancel relative coordinate system after resetting 283 Gr 44153 GSK990MC Drilling and Milling CNC System Programming and Operation User Manual 1 the workpiece coordinate system s zero is the result that the input values nee subtracts the machine coordinates 0 the workpiece coordinate system s zero is the result that the input values adds the machine coordinates MSL 1 start from the line where cursor locates on cycle start of multi section MDI 0 start from the first line on cycle start of multi section MDI RCUR 1 cursor returns to the starting position in non edit mode after reset 0 cursor not returns to the starting position in non edit mode after reset Standard setting 0000 0010 System parameter number 0 1 1 BFA LZR OUT2 OUT2 1 outer area entry of the 2 stroke is unallowed 0 inner area entry of the 2 stroke is unallowed LZR 1 perform travel check before manual reference return after power on 0 do not perform travel check be

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Installation and User`s Manual  Minka Lavery 4393-77 Instructions / Assembly  Manual del usuario  Behringer CX3400 User's Manual  説明書  Construire une carte animée au cycle 3  Twin-tub Washing Machine Service Manual  Manuals - Boss Audio Systems  取扱説明書 - Dynabook    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file